Unit 4.1 Discussion: Treating Addiction with Methadone
Unit 4
eBook:
Zastrow, C., Kirst-Ashman, K.K. & Hessenauer, S.L. (2019). Empowerment series: Understanding human behavior and the social environment (11th Ed.). Cengage Learning.
· Chapter 10: Biological Aspects of Young and Middle Adulthood
· Chapter 11: Psychological Aspects of Young and Middle Adulthood
· Chapter 12: Social Aspects of Young and Middle Adulthood
Articles, Websites, and Videos:
Determinants of health are those factors which can influence a person’s health. They include the conditions under which we are born, grow, live and advance in age and each is critically important to determining not only the health of an individual, but also a community.
What questions should be asked while making the decision to move in with your partner? In this easy to listen to video, 8 practical questions are asked and answered which should be considered prior to making that decision. Do these seem logical to be considered? They range from thinking about the long term relationship you are considering with your partner to finances and how responsibilities are to be shared. As you watch this, what additional questions come to your mind?
This video will explore how the toxic stress children experience while growing up in poverty negatively affects their brains. Furthermore, it explains how we all have a responsibility to address poverty and the need to intervene within our communities for those who are most vulnerable.
Chapter 10
Biological Aspects of Young and Middle Adulthood
Chapter Introduction
Roy Morsch/Corbis/Getty Images
Learning Objectives
This chapter will help prepare students to
· LO 1 Recognize the contributions of physical development, health status, and other factors to health during young adulthood
· LO 2 Describe the physical changes in middle adulthood, including those affecting physical appearance, sense organs, physical strength and reaction time, and intellectual functioning
· LO 3 Describe the midlife crises associated with female menopause and male climacteric
· LO 4 Summarize sexual functioning in middle age
· LO 5 Describe AIDS—its causes and effects; how it is contracted; how its spread can be prevented; and understand AIDS discrimination
Shannon Bailey, age 22, is a senior in college, majoring in English. She is nearing graduation and is seeking a career focus. She realizes that a degree in English will indicate to potential employers that she probably writes well. Yet she also knows that an English major is not linked to professional positions the way a degree in engineering, for example, is linked to engineering positions. She is confused about what kind of career she wants, and also what kind of career she is qualified for.
To add to her confusion, Eric Kim, whom she has been dating for three years and who is two years older than she, proposed to her a week ago. He wants to get married in a year or two.
At first, Shannon was flattered by the proposal and accepted the ring. But now she is having second thoughts, as she does not know if she wants to be in a committed relationship with Eric for the rest of her life. Shannon realizes that the decisions she makes in young adulthood will have a major impact on the rest of her life-including her health, well-being, and happiness.
Shannon’s parents, Patrick and Laura Bailey, are in the middle adulthood phase of their lives. They have been married for 23 years and have had relatively few serious conflicts. Shannon is their only living child; another child died of sudden infant death syndrome when he was 8 months old. This was very traumatic for them for several years.
More recently, Patrick’s father died from a heart attack. Although their three other parents are still living, they are worried about Patrick’s mother living alone, their parents declining health, and what the future will look like with aging parents. Patrick, who is 50, has been employed as a construction worker most of his adult life. Due to a recession that impacted the housing industry, he was unemployed from 2009 to 2011, creating a heavy financial burden on his family. Luckily, Laura, age 48, has been a carrier for Federal Express for the past 13 years and had more stability in her income. They feel they are just getting back on their feet and are grateful there home was not foreclosed on, as had happened to several of their friends and family members during this time. However, they do still have some outstanding debts, mainly credit cards, and are resuming contributions to their retirement accounts.
They are active in church activities and enjoy taking walks, gardening, playing softball, and bowling. For the past five summers, they have been spending their vacations traveling to various places in the United States in their Buick Enclave SUV.
A Perspective
Young adulthood is both an exciting and a challenging time of life. Growth and decline go on throughout life, in a balance that differs for each individual. In young adulthood, human beings build a foundation for much of their later development. This is when young people typically leave their parents’ homes, start careers, get married, start to raise children, and begin to contribute to their communities.
Middle adulthood has been referred to as the prime time of life. Patrick and Laura Bailey illustrate this. Most people at this age are in fairly good health, both physically and psychologically. They are also apt to be earning more money than at any other age and have acquired considerable wisdom through experiences in a variety of areas. However, middle adulthood also has developmental tasks and life crises. This chapter will examine human biological subsystems in young and middle adulthood and discuss how they affect people’s lives.
10-1Recognize the Contributions of Physical Development, Health Status, and Other Factors to Health during Young Adulthood
10-1aYoung Adulthood
It is difficult to pinpoint the exact time of life we are referring to when we talk about young adulthood. The transition into adulthood is not a clear-cut dividing line. People become voting adults by age 18. However, in most states, they are not considered adult enough to drink alcoholic beverages until 21. A person cannot become a U.S. senator until age 30 or president until age 35. All this presents a confusing picture of what we mean by adulthood.
Various theorists have tried to define young adulthood. Buhler (1933) clustered adolescence and young adulthood together to include the ages from 15 to 25. During this time, people focus on establishing their identities and on idealistically trying to make their dreams come true. Buhler saw the next phase as young and middle adulthood. This period lasts from approximately age 23 to age 45 or 50. This group focuses on attaining realistic, concrete goals and on setting up a work and family structure for life.
Levinson, Darrow, Klein, Levinson, and McKee (1974) broke up young adulthood into smaller slices. They believed that in the process of developing a life structure, people go through stable periods separated by shorter transitional periods. The stage from ages 17 to 22 is characterized by leaving the family and becoming independent. This is followed by a transitional phase from ages 22 to 28, which involves entering the adult world. The age-30 transition focuses on making a decision about how to structure the remainder of life. A settling-down period then occurs from about ages 32 to 40.
The current generation of young adults is called the millennials, compared to past generations who held the titles of baby boomers, Generation X, and upcoming (Generation Z). Currently there are 50 million millennials who grew up in the twenty-first century and the digital age. These young adults have learned to navigate the ever-changing world of technology and have faced traumas such as the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001, and the recession of 2008–2009 (Tanenhaus, 2014).
Ethical Question 10.1
1. Are you taking good physical care of yourself?
10-1bPhysical Development
Young adults are in their physical prime. Maximum muscular strength is attained between the ages of 25 and 30, and generally begins a gradual decline after that. After age 30, decreases in strength occur mostly in the leg and back muscles. Some weakening also occurs in the arm muscles.
Top performance speed in terms of how fast tasks can be accomplished is reached at about age 30. Young adulthood is also characterized by the highest levels of manual agility. Hand and finger dexterity decrease after the mid-30s.
Sight, hearing, and the other senses are their keenest during young adulthood. Eyesight is the sharpest at about age 20. A decline in visual acuity isn’t significant until age 40 or 45, when there is some tendency toward presbyopia (farsightedness). At that point, you start to see people read their newspapers by holding them 3 feet in front of them.
Hearing is also sharpest at age 20. After this, there is a gradual decline in auditory acuity, especially in sensitivity to higher tones. This deficiency is referred to as presbycusis. Most of the other senses—touch, smell, and taste—tend to remain stable until approximately age 45 or 50.
10-1cHealth Status
Young adulthood can be considered the healthiest time of life. Young adults are generally healthier than when they were children, and they have not yet begun to suffer the illnesses and health declines that develop in middle age. (Papalia & Martorell, 2015)
Most young adults report they are in good to excellent health (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). However, rates of injury, homicide, and substance abuse peak at this time (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). In the past, this age group has lacked access to health care, often aging out if they did not go to college or if there were age limits on their parents’ insurance, but with the Affordable Care Act of 2010, most young adults can stay on their parents’ insurance plan until the age of 26. This change has resulted in 5.7 million young adults having health care coverage (The White House, 2015) and allowing young adults the health care they require to prevent or address health concerns. However, the Trump administration has indicated it plans to repeal/replace the Affordable Care Act, which could impact the health care of young adults.
Many people in all socioeconomic classes show a significant interest in measures that promote health. For example, running and other forms of exercising, health foods, and weight control have become very popular.
It has also been found that adults in the United States are using more complementary medicine approaches, including dietary supplements, yoga, chiropractors, meditation, acupuncture, massage therapy, and/or osteopathic manipulation. In 2012, in the National Health Interview Survey, it was found that 33.2 percent of adults used complementary health approaches (NCCIH, 2016).
Even though young adulthood is generally a healthy time of life, health differences can be seen between men and women. For example, women of all ages tend to report more illnesses than do men (Lefrancois, 1999). However, these health issues may be related to gender (such as contraception, pregnancy, or an annual Pap test), rather than more general health problems. Perhaps women are also more conscientious about preventive health care in general.
Of all the acute or temporary pressing health problems occurring during young adulthood, approximately half are caused by respiratory problems. An additional 20 percent are due to injuries. The most frequent chronic health problems of young adulthood are spinal or back difficulties, hearing problems, arthritis, and hypertension. These chronic problems occur even more frequently in families of lower socioeconomic status. For example, young African Americans experience hypertension more frequently than their white counterparts (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
Other health concerns are also on the rise for young adults. Alarmingly, people ages 15–24 account for half of the 20 million newly diagnosed sexually transmitted infections yearly in the United States (CDC, 2015). Obesity rates are of concern with young adults, along with increases in stress levels, lack of sleep, smoking, and alcohol use (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
Men and Health
A 21-year-old male, who has been healthy his entire life, has a pain in his groin area. As he is a student athlete, he assumes it is a pulled muscle and ignores it. Despite the continued discomfort it causes, he believes it is not healing properly due to his continued training. By the time he seeks care, it is too late. He has untreatable prostate cancer. The following year, his family accepts his college diploma on his behalf as he died several months prior to graduation.
This case highlights the need for males to seek medical care. In 2014, 83.2 percent of adults visited a physician; however, the majority of these visits were made by females (CDC, 2015b). Despite recommendations that men visit their primary physician once every two years. (However, it is recommended they go more routinely if they smoke, have high blood pressure, or have high cholesterol.) Between the ages of 18 and 39, men do not visit the physician as often as women, especially for preventive care (CDC, 2015b). The leading causes of death for men are heart disease, cancer, and accidents (CDC, 2015c). Of cancer, the most frequent diagnoses are prostrate, lung, and colorectal; however, lung cancer causes the most deaths (CDC, 2015a). Many of the health issues faced only by men, such as prostate cancer or low testosterone, can be prevented or treated successfully if caught early (NIH, 2016b). It is critical that young males be encouraged to seek routine, preventive health care in order to live to their fullest potential.
Women and Health
Although women do tend to visit the physician more than men, as indicated above, women have unique needs, such as pregnancy, conditions of female organs, and breast health that need to be routinely monitored. Women also have a higher incidence than men of certain health risks; for example, women are more likely to die following a heart attack than men, are more likely to show signs of depression, are affected more often by osteoarthritis, and are more likely to have urinary tract problems (NIH, 2016c). The leading causes of death for women are heart disease, cancer, and chronic lower respiratory disease (CDC, 2016b).
10-1dBreast Cancer
Within the context of health status, an extremely important issue confronting women is the incidence of breast cancer. According to the American Cancer Society (ACS, 2016b), breast cancer is the most common form of cancer among women, except for skin cancer. Approximately 1 out of 8 women will get breast cancer during their lifetime, and about 40,450 women will die from it in every year (ACS, 2016b). It is the second leading cause of cancer death in women, second only to lung cancer (ACS, 2016b). Although men can get breast cancer, the numbers are significantly lower than those of women, with 2,600 cases diagnosed in men each year and 440 reported deaths (ACS, 2016d).
Although older adult women are much more likely to get breast cancer than their younger counterparts, because of its general prevalence it will be discussed here.
Being knowledgeable about the issue of breast cancer is especially important in helping your female clients become aware of risks, prevention, and treatment. If you are a woman, it’s important for your own health. If you are a man, it’s important for the women who are close to you.
Benign Lumps
To begin with, it’s important to note that 80 percent of all breast lumps are benign (not cancerous) (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). These usually take one of two forms (Crooks & Baur, 2014). First, there are cysts, which are pouches of fluid. The other form of lump is a fibroadenoma, which is a more solid, rounded growth of cells resembling scar tissue (Crooks & Baur, 2014, p. 81).
Symptoms
A number of symptoms other than identification of a lump or tumor can indicate malignancy. Tumors can assume a number of shapes and forms. Generally, any change in the external appearance of the breasts should make one suspicious. For instance, one breast becoming significantly larger or hanging significantly lower than the other is a potential warning sign. Discharges from the nipple or nipple discoloration are additional indications, as is any pain in the breast. Dimpling or puckering of the nipple or skin of the breast should be noted. Nipple retraction (where the nipple turns inward) is also a potential sign of cancer. Finally, any swelling of the upper arm or lymph nodes under the arm should be investigated.
Risk Factors
Numerous factors are involved in getting breast cancer (ACS, 2016a). Some are variables that can’t be changed. We have already established that being a woman and advancing age increase risk. About two-thirds of women with breast cancer are age 55 or older by the time the cancer is discovered.
Between 5 and 10 percent of breast cancers are related to genetic mutations, most frequently in the genes labeled BRCA1 and BRCA2 (ASC, 2016e). Women with mutations in these specific genes may increase their likelihood of breast cancer by as much as 80 percent. Note that mutations in other genes may also be linked to increased risk.
Genetic testing can be done to determine if a female has BRCA1 or BRCA2 mutations, but women are encouraged to talk to a genetic counselor or doctor to explain the results (ACS, 2016e).
Family history is another relevant variable in assessing breast cancer risk. Having close female relatives on either side of the family with breast cancer increases a woman’s chances. Risk doubles for women who have a mother, sister, or daughter who has breast cancer and triples for women with two such relatives. (However, note that over 85 percent of all women with breast cancer do not have it in their family history.) Having a prior history of breast cancer increases the chances of developing a new cancer in the same or the other breast.
Race affects risk. “White women are slightly more likely to get breast cancer than are African American women but African American women are more likely to die of this cancer. However, in women under 45 years of age, breast cancer is more common in African American women. Asian, Hispanic, and American Indian women have a lower risk of developing and dying from breast cancer” (ACS, 2016).
Women who have been exposed to radiation treatment in the chest area at some earlier time have greater risk. Risk may also be related to menstruation. It increases a bit for women who started menstruating before age 12 or who went through menopause (the normal change of life occurring in middle age when a woman stops menstruating and can no longer bear children) after age 55. Having dense breast tissue (the fatty, fibrous, and glandular tissue making up breasts) increases the risk of developing breast cancer. Additionally, having been diagnosed with certain benign breast conditions (e.g., certain benign breast tumors) also increases breast cancer risk, although the level of risk varies with the particular condition.
Some risk factors for breast cancer are linked to lifestyle and life choices. Risk increases slightly for childless women and for women having their first child after age 30. Conversely, having numerous pregnancies and bearing children at a young age reduces a woman’s chance of getting breast cancer. The risk posed by taking oral contraception (birth control pills) is not yet understood. Studies have found that women now using birth control pills have a slightly greater risk of breast cancer than women who have never used them. Women who stopped using the pill more than 10 years ago do not seem to have any increased risk. Women should address issues such as this with a physician. Long-term use of combined hormone therapy (HT) with estrogen and progesterone to diminish the negative symptoms of menopause increases the risk of breast cancer and of dying from the disease. The use and effects of hormone therapy are complex and should be carefully discussed with a physician. Since combined HT also “appears to increase the risk of heart disease, blood clots, and strokes,” “there appear to be few strong reasons to use post-menopausal hormone therapy” (ACS, 2016c). Alcohol consumption, especially in greater quantities on a regular basis, increases risk, as does being overweight.
Several other factors that may contribute to the risk of breast cancer are under investigation. However, research results aren’t clear at this time. These factors include high-fat diets, chemicals in the environment, tobacco smoke, and working at night. In contrast, exercise appears to reduce risk, as does having breast-fed a child, especially if the practice lasted for one-and-a-half to two years.
Remember that the factors discussed here do not condemn a woman to getting breast cancer. Such discussion should only alert women to be careful and aware.
Suspicion of Breast Cancer
In the event that a suspicious lump is detected, numerous options can be pursued. First, a mammogram (X-ray of the breast) can be used to detect a tumor. (Note that mammograms are also used for regular screenings, described later.) Improvements in mammogram technology have resulted in decreased amounts of radiation, so there is little if any risk of negative consequences. Diagnostic mammograms “are used to diagnose breast disease in women who have breast symptoms (like a lump or nipple discharge) or an abnormal result on a screening mammogram” (ACS, 2016a). They involve taking more images depicting greater detail of the suspicious area in the breast.
Second, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scans “use radio waves and strong magnets instead of x-rays” (ACS, 2016a). A dye is injected into the bloodstream to accentuate effects. Healthy and diseased bodily tissues absorb the energy in different ways so that a computer can interpret results and discover abnormalities. Some research has found that MRIs can discover more and smaller cancers than can mammograms. However, MRIs are more expensive, may take up to an hour, and involve being confined in a tube (which makes some people quite uncomfortable). In current practice, MRIs are usually used along with mammograms to screen women in high-risk groups, to investigate suspicious tissue, to determine the mass of a cancer that has already been detected, or to check for the existence of cancer in the opposite breast. New imaging tests are also being studied.
Third, an ultrasound (picture of an internal area by the use of sound waves) may also be employed. Ultrasound has become a valuable tool to use along with mammography because it is widely available and less expensive than other options such as MRI. The use of ultrasound instead of mammograms for breast cancer screening is not recommended. Usually, breast ultrasound is used to target a specific area of concern found on the mammogram. Ultrasound helps distinguish between cysts (fluid-filled sacs) and solid masses and sometimes can help tell the difference between benign and cancerous tumors.
Ultrasounds can be beneficial in assessing breasts with exceptionally dense tissue, as tumors may be more difficult to see in mammograms. Research is currently being done to determine the value, pros, and cons “of adding breast ultrasound to screening mammograms in women with dense breasts and a higher risk of breast cancer” (ACS, 2013c).
Fourth, for women with nipple discharge, a ductogram (or galactogram) can be performed. This involves inserting “a very thin plastic tube into the opening of the duct in the nipple” producing the discharge and injecting a very small quantity of a liquid into the duct (ACS, 2016a). This provides a contrast between the injected liquid and breast tissue, thus delineating the structure of the duct. An X-ray can then determine if a mass exists within the duct.
Fifth, a biopsy involves extracting some amount of tissue to examine for cancerous cells. In a fine needle aspiration biopsy (FNAB), an extremely fine needle extracts fluid from the lump for evaluation. In a core needle biopsy, a larger needle is used to remove several cores of tissue from a potentially problematic area discovered during an ultrasound or mammogram. “Because it removes larger pieces of tissue, a core needle biopsy is more likely than an FNAB to provide a clear diagnosis, although it may still miss some cancers” (ACS, 2016c). Vacuum-assisted biopsies such as Mammotome® or ATEC® (Automated Tissue Excision and Collection) (trade names) are outpatient procedures that involve the suctioning of tissue using a hollow probe through a small incision. A surgical biopsy entails a removal by incision of a larger section of the identified mass or abnormal area in addition to some of the surrounding tissue. This more complex procedure, used because of the tissue’s location or because the results of a core biopsy are unclear, is usually performed in a hospital’s outpatient unit and requires anesthesia. The type of biopsy selected depends on a woman’s specific circumstances. “Some of the factors your doctor will consider include how suspicious the lesion appears, how large it is, where in the breast it is located, how many lesions are present, other medical problems you may have, and your personal preferences” (ACS, 2016c).
Treatment of Breast Cancer
If it is established that the lesion is cancerous, several treatment options are available (National Cancer Institute [NCI], 2016a). The type of treatment depends on the complexity, severity/progression of the cancer. Women with breast cancer need to explore all of the options with their doctor to determine their best course of action based on their individual situation. The standard treatment options used are listed below.
1. Surgery: Surgery removes the cancer. During surgery lymph nodes may be removed because they are the first structures to receive drainage from the tumor (NCI, 2016c). The sentinel lymph node is the lymph node to receive the drainage first. This lymph node is evaluated for cancer cells and if no cancer cells are found, removal of more lymph nodes may be unnecessary. Different types of surgery include
· —
lumpectomy: only the tumor and surrounding tissue are removed resulting in the least disruption in the breast’s external appearance.
· —
partial mastectomy: removal of a portion of the breast containing the tumor, tissue around the tumor, and possibly the chest muscle below the cancer.
· —
simple or total mastectomy—the entire breast is removed and possibly some lymph nodes under the arm.
· —
skin-sparing mastectomy: the same amount of internal breast tissue is removed as a simple mastectomy, but the breast remains intact in preparation for breast reconstruction surgery (Mayo Clinic, 2016b).
· —
modified radical mastectomy: “many of the underarm lymph nodes, the lining over the chest muscles, and sometimes part of the chest wall muscles are removed” (NCI, 2016c).
2. Radiation: Radiation therapy involves using “high-powered beams of energy, such as x-rays to destroy cancer cells” (Mayo, 2016a). Radiation can be administered externally (outside the body with a machine) or internally (place radioactive substances in the body). Treatment schedules vary depending on the stage of the cancer treated (NCI, 2016c).
3. Chemotherapy: Chemotherapy involves administering cancer fighting drugs either by injecting them into the vein or ingesting them in liquid or pill form. They are intended to fight and eliminate cancer cells that have split off from the tumor and migrated to other parts of the body. The way chemotherapy is given depends “on the type and stage of the cancer being treated” (NCI, 2016c). Chemotherapy may be used before surgery to shrink a tumor, thereby facilitating the tumor’s removal.
4. Hormone therapy: Hormone therapy involves administration of drugs that block or decrease the effects of the female hormone estrogen in those women whom estrogen encourages the development of breast cancer. One example of hormone therapy is tamoxifen, a drug in pill form that is usually administered for two to five years after breast cancer surgery.
5. Targeted drugs: Targeted drug treatments attack specific cancer cells without harming normal cells (NCI, 2016c). These drugs may kill the cancer cell or slow the cells’ growth.
6. Clinical trials: Some patients take part in a clinical trial to determine if a new cancer treatment is safe and effective or better than the standard treatments as identified above (NCI, 2016c).
All of the treatment options noted may have side effects, ranging from tiredness, hair loss, and premature menopause to greater vulnerability to infections and diseases because of decreased supply of white blood cells. Additionally, when a woman has surgery on her breast it can affect her self-esteem due to tremendous significance placed on breasts in our society. A women’s perception of herself, how others perceive her, and of the effects on her sexual relationships can be severely affected.
One option, for women who have had a mastectomy is reconstructive surgery. Reconstructive surgery is done to make the breast look as natural as possible. In 2015, 106,338 breast reconstruction procedures were performed in the United States (American Society of Plastic Surgeons, 2016). Reconstruction surgery can be performed during the initial surgery (which must be planned in advance) or at a later time. As a last resort, some women turn to alternative or complementary medicine to help fight their cancer. It should be noted, however, that no alternative treatments have been found to cure breast cancer (Mayo, 2016a). Some of these options are acupuncture, a special diet, meditation, and/or yoga. It is believed these treatments can help treat the patient’s mind, body, and spirit (NCI, 2016b).
Many procedures and therapies exist to combat breast cancer. However, early detection is key to effective treatment. Highlight 10.1 describes what women can do to facilitate detection as soon as possible.
Highlight 10.1
Early Detection of Breast Cancer
There are three primary recommendations for early detection of breast cancer. First, the American Cancer Society strongly recommends that women should have an annual mammogram beginning at age 40. Women with a high risk of breast cancer should discuss the issue of having mammograms or other screening tests conducted at an earlier age. Some high-risk women should consider having an annual MRI in addition to their mammogram.
Second, beginning in their 20s or 30s, women should begin having a clinical breast exam (CBE) performed by a health care practitioner at least every three years. Note that many cancers cannot currently be detected by mammography. CBE exams involve the practitioner examining your breasts for abnormalities or changes. The practitioner will also use the pads of her fingers to search for lumps in the breast and under the arms.
The third means of early detection involves conducting a breast self-exam (BSE) beginning in your 20s. The idea is that getting to know the contours and structure of your own breasts can help you detect any changes of abnormalities. You can develop much greater expertise in checking yourself than can a physician or other health professional who checks you only once a year or less. It has been suggested that women conduct a BSE monthly, or at least occasionally. The following describes how to do a BSE:
1. Lie down and put your left arm over your head (when checking your left breast with your right hand). This position spreads out the breast tissue more uniformly and allows you to explore the breast more thoroughly.
2. Use the pads on your three middle fingers to feel for lumps by using circular motions about the size of a dime.
3. Use three levels of pressure—mild, medium, and deep—in order to explore the depth of the entire breast.
4. Move in an up-and-down pattern, illustrated in Figure 10.1 (ACS, 2010a). You should start under your arm and make certain you check all areas of the breast down to the bottom of the lib cage and up to the collarbone.
5. Duplicate the procedure using the three middle fingers of your left hand to check your right breast. Don’t forget to put your right arm over your head.
6. Now get up and look at yourself in the mirror. Push your hands down tightly on your hips, as this tends to emphasize any changes in your breasts. Examine your breasts carefully for any differences or abnormalities.
7. Either standing or sitting in a chair, elevate your left arm slightly (do not raise it too high, as this tenses the muscles too much and makes it more difficult to detect lumps or abnormalities). Carefully inspect your left underarm with your right hand’s three middle finger pads.
8. Using the same approach, examine your right underarm with your left hand.
Figure 10.1Breast Self-Exam
A Final Note
Breast cancer is a critically important issue. In summary, there are two important principles for women lo remember. First, women should become experts on their own bodies. The earlier a lump is found, the smaller it will probably be and the easier it will be to treat. Second, in the event that a lump is found, women should seek help immediately and become knowledgeable about alternative remedies. They should seriously consider the pros and cons of each available option.
10-1eLifestyle and Good Health
These positive health habits include eating breakfast and other meals regularly. Snacking on high-fat and high-sugar foods should be avoided. Moderate eating in order to maintain a normal, healthy weight is important. Smoking and heavy alcohol consumption are dangerous to health and should be avoided. Moderate exercise and adequate sleep also contribute to good health.
Excessive consumption of alcohol has a very negative effect on health. Alcoholics are people who have a continual and compulsive need for alcohol. Physical dependence occurs when body tissues become dependent on the continuous presence of alcohol. Approximately three-quarters of all alcoholics show some impaired liver function. About 8 percent of alcoholics eventually develop cirrhosis of the liver. Cirrhosis involves gradual deterioration of the liver tissue until it no longer can adequately perform its normal functions. These functions include converting food to usable energy. Other effects of alcoholism include cancer; heart problems and heart failure; a variety of gastrointestinal disorders including ulcers; damage to the nervous system; and psychosis.
Stress is another factor that can affect health (NIMH, 2016). Stress can be caused by positive events (such as marriage or a job promotion) or negative events (death of a relative or divorce). There are three different types of stress: routine stress from a sudden change, or traumatic stress (major accident or disaster). Everyone responds differently to these stressors; however, with continued stress an individual may suffer serious health problems such as digestive issues, weight gain, heart disease, high blood pressure, depression, or other illnesses (NIMH, 2016).
Poor people are likely to suffer stress related to their lack of resources. They may be worrying about what to feed their kids near the end of the month when money has run out. Maybe they’re worried about having their phone disconnected or their electricity turned off because they couldn’t pay the bills.
To cope with stress, it is important to obtain proper health care, reach out to others, exercise regularly, seek help from a counselor for any mental health issues, avoid alcohol and drug use as a means of coping, and focus on the positives. Programs such as yoga and meditation also help deal with stress (NIMH, 2016). (For additional material on stress management, see Chapter 14.)
Diet also affects health. Being overweight increases the risk of heart disease, high blood pressure, and other health problems. On the other hand, choosing a well-balanced diet, limiting food intake, and avoiding foods infused with salt and fat can promote good health, especially in conjunction with exercise. For instance, limiting cholesterol intake decreases the risk of heart disease (Seaward, 2012). Cholesterol is “a soft, fat-like substance found among the fats in the bloodstream” (American Heart Association, 1984, p. 1). It can collect in arteries, thereby stalling blood flow. Extreme blockages can arrest the blood flow into the heart and ultimately cause a heart attack. Eating foods low or lacking in cholesterol can significantly decrease these risks.
Health is obviously related to the incidence of death. Spotlight 10.1 discusses the differential death rates and causes of death experienced by different groups.
Spotlight on Diversity 10.1
Differential Incidence of Death
The leading causes of death among all young adults in the United States ages 15 to 24 are accidents, homicide, suicide, and cancer, respectively; among people 25 to 44, the leading causes of death are accidents, cancer, heart disease, and suicide (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
When gender and racial groups are looked at separately, some differences emerge. Death rates for men 15 to 24 are almost three times higher than those for women (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
As for racial differences, the death rate for African American males 15 to 24 is almost double that of their white counterparts (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). The incidence of violent death in the two groups contributes to this difference. Murder is the number one cause of death for young African American men. Recent census data report that African American men ages 15 to 19 are seven times more likely to die from a homicide than are their white peers, and those 20 to 24 are almost nine times more likely. The U.S. homicide rate is six times the rate in Holland, five times the rate in Canada, and eight times the overall rate in Europe (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2013). You might ask yourself why you live in such a violent society.
The death rate for people of color between the ages of 15 and 44 is about twice as high as that for whites (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
The difference in the death rates of people of color and whites reflects a significant difference in environment. Of course, there are people of virtually every ethnic and racial background who are poor. However, in the United States, if you are African American or a member of a number of other minority groups, including Latinos/Latinas and Native Americans, you are more likely to be poor than if you are white. This is a complicated issue. However, much of the difference in circumstances is due to a long history of prejudice and discrimination. If you’re poor, you’re more likely to be living in the crowded urban center of a city than in the suburbs. If you’re poor and live in the inner city where the crime rate is higher, you are more likely to be a homicide victim. Inner cities also have higher rates of air pollution, which (similar to smoking cigarettes) causes lung and heart disease.
If you are poor, you are also more likely not to have employment that provides adequate health insurance. You’re more likely to find yourself in a position where you can’t go to a doctor when you’re sick because you have no money and no insurance. Young adulthood is supposed to be the healthiest time of life, and it is for most people. However, overall health status varies drastically depending on environment and living conditions. It’s important for social workers to be aware of the impact that poor environments can have on people.
Poverty is often linked to minority status. Many minorities have been physically abused, burdened by the abuse of others’ power, and treated unfairly. The result is the likelihood of a poor standard of living, including a poor health status with more health problems. Instead of asking what people can do to get out of poor environments, social workers need to ask how these environments can be changed to improve the living conditions of the oppressed people.
10-2Describe the Physical Changes in Middle Adulthood, including Those Affecting Physical Appearance, Sense Organs, Physical Strength and Reaction Time, and Intellectual Functioning
10-2aMiddle Adulthood
Middle age has no distinct biological markers. Different writers identify the beginning of middle adulthood as ranging from 30 to 40 and the end of this age period as ranging from 60 to 70. Somewhat arbitrarily, this text will view middle adulthood as ranging from ages 30 to 65. This period indeed covers a large number of years.
10-2bPhysical Changes in Middle Age
Changes in Physical Functioning
Most middle-aged people are in good health and have substantial energy. Small declines in physical functioning are barely perceptible. At age 48, for example, Althea Lawrence, who jogs, may notice it takes her a little longer to run the course. These decreases in physical functioning may be sufficient to make people feel they are aging.
People age at different rates, and the decline of the body systems is gradual. A major change is a reduction in reserve capacity, which serves as a backup in times of stress and during a dysfunction of one of the body’s systems. Common physiological changes in middle age include diminished ability of the heart to pump blood. The gastrointestinal tract secretes fewer enzymes, which increases the chances of constipation and indigestion. The diaphragm weakens, which results in an increase in the size of the chest. Kidney function is reduced. In some males, the prostate gland (the organ surrounding the neck of the urinary bladder) enlarges, which can cause urinary and sexual problems.
kali9/E+/Getty Images
In addition to gradual reductions in energy levels, middle-aged adults also have less capacity to do physical work. A longer time is needed to recoup strength after an extended period of strenuous activity. Working full-time at a job and then socializing into the wee hours of the morning is harder. Recovering from colds and other common ailments generally takes longer. It takes longer for pain in joints and muscles to subside after extensive physical exercise. Middle-aged adults are best at tasks that require endurance rather than rapid bursts of energy; they need to make adjustments in their physical activities to compensate for these changes in energy level.
Health Changes
In the early 40s, a general slowing down in metabolism usually begins. Individuals who reach this age either begin to gain weight or have to compensate by eating less and exercising more.
Health problems are more apt to arise. Signs of diabetes may occur, and the incidence of gallstones and kidney stones increases. Hypertension, heart problems, and cancer also occur at higher rates during the middle adult years than in the younger years. Back problems, asthma, arthritis, and rheumatism are also more common. Because nearly all these ailments can be treated, middle-aged adults need to have periodic physical examinations in order to detect and treat these illnesses in their early stages.
One major health problem during middle age is hypertension, or high blood pressure. The disorder predisposes people to heart attacks and strokes. The disorder affects about 40 percent of adults in the United States, and is more prevalent among African Americans and poor people (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). Fortunately, the disorder is now often detected by blood pressure screening, and can generally be effectively treated with medication.
The typical middle-aged American is quite healthy. The three leading causes of death for those between the ages of 35 and 54 are, in order, cancer, heart disease, and accidents. Between ages 55 and 64 the leading causes are cancer, heart disease, and strokes (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
Changes in Physical Appearance
Gradual changes in appearance take place. Some people become alarmed when they discover these changes. Gray hairs begin to appear. The hair may thin. Wrinkles gradually appear. The skin may become dry and lose some of its elasticity. There is a redistribution of fatty tissue; males are apt to develop a “tire” around their waist, and the breasts of women may decrease in size. Minor ailments develop that cause a variety of twinges.
Some studies with interesting results have been conducted on personal appearance. Knapp and Hall (2010) reviewed studies in which slides of both women and men were shown to subjects. The studies found that those judged to be physically attractive were also judged to be brighter, richer, and more successful in their social lives and career.
Having a physically attractive body has become an obsession in our society. Americans spend thousands of hours and millions of dollars on grooming themselves, exercising, and dieting. The “body beautiful” cult leads those who judge themselves to be attractive to believe that they are superior to those they judge to be less attractive.
The Double Standard of Aging
Gray hair, coarsened skin, and crow’s feet are considered attractive in men; they are viewed as signs of distinction, experience, and mastery. Yet the same physical changes in women are viewed as unattractive indicators that they are “over the hill.” Many men in our society view older women as having less value as sexual and romantic partners and even as business associates or prospective employees (Knapp & Hall, 2010). For example, some middle-aged television anchorwomen allege they have been discharged from their positions because normal changes in their physical features are considered unattractive.
Today, the double standard of aging is waning (Papalia et al., 2012). Men too are suffering from the premium placed on youth. Both men and women age 50 and older encounter age discrimination (although it’s illegal) in looking for a job.
In the area of career advancement, men are more apt than women to feel old before their time if they have not achieved career or financial success. Our society places more pressure on men than on women to have a successful career.
Ethical Question 10.2
1. If you were an employer, would you be reluctant to hire someone who was 50 or older?
Changes in Sense Organs
A gradual deterioration occurs in the sense organs during middle adulthood. Middle-aged adults are apt to develop problems with their vision that may force them to wear bifocals, reading glasses, or contact lenses. As the lens of the eye becomes less elastic with age, its focus does not adjust as readily. As a result, many people develop presbyopia—which means they become farsighted. They are unable to focus sharply for near vision and thus need reading glasses. The psychological impact of having to wear glasses may be minor or can be fairly serious if the person is fearful about growing older.
During middle age, there is also a gradual hardening and deterioration of the auditory nerve cells. The most common deterioration in middle adulthood is presbycusis, which is a reduction in hearing acuity for high-frequency tones. Middle-aged men generally have significantly greater losses of high-frequency tones than middle-aged women. Sometimes the hearing loss is enough so that a hearing aid is needed. There are generally some minor changes in taste, touch, and smell as a person grows older. Most of these changes are so gradual that a person makes adjustments without recognizing that changes are occurring.
Changes in Physical Strength and Reaction Time
Physical strength and coordination are at their maximum in the 20s and then decline gradually in middle adulthood. Generally, these declines are minor. Manual laborers and competitive athletes (boxers, football players, weight lifters, wrestlers, ice skaters) are most apt to be affected by these gradual declines. As Highlight 10.2 illustrates, some sports figures who have been applauded and worshipped by fans may experience an identity crisis in middle adulthood when they are no longer as competitive. Their lifestyle and identity have been based on excelling with athletic skills; as those skills fade, they need to find new interests and another livelihood.
Highlight 10.2
An Identity Crisis: When the Applause Stops
Chuck Walters excelled in sports in grade school and high school. In high school, he lettered in basketball, football, and baseball. In his senior year, he was tall and weighed about 220 pounds. He was a halfback on the football team and scored ten touchdowns in eight games. He was an outfielder on the baseball team and batted .467, hitting 13 home runs. Especially good at basketball, he was quick and averaged 23.4 points a game.
He was recruited by a number of universities for both his football and basketball skills. He chose to accept a basketball scholarship at a major midwestern university. As a bonus for accepting a scholarship, an alumnus bought him a Hummer. The purchase was hidden, as it violated NCAA rules for athletes. Another alumnus gave him a summer job as a construction worker, which paid well and didn’t require much work. Chuck had concentrated on sports and partying in high school and college. In college, he chose the easiest major he could find (physical education) and only occasionally went to class. By taking the minimum number of credits needed to maintain his basketball eligibility and by having a tutor, be managed to make his grades and play varsity basketball. He loved college. He had plenty of money, a new vehicle, and many dates, and was worshipped on campus as a hero. He thought this was the way to live. In his junior year, he averaged 16.7 points as a guard, and in his senior year, he was an all-conference selection and averaged 22.3 points a game.
He also began experimenting with cocaine. He loved being applauded and adulated. He thought the merry-go-round would keep whirling around. To his surprise, he wasn’t drafted by the pros. So he went to Europe to play basketball, hoping to excel so that some professional team would give him a tryout. He played in Europe for five years and was traded several times. At age 30, he was finally cut.
This cut led to a major identity crisis. Chuck realized the applause and adulation were now coming to a screeching halt. He drank and used cocaine to excess to try to numb the pain of his loss. He had failed to graduate from college, having only junior standing when his scholarship eligibility ran out. He had been carried in college by his tutor because his reading and writing skills were at the 10th-grade level. He now fears he has no saleable skills and is worried his money may soon run out. He can no longer support his extravagant lifestyle. At the present time, he is considering trying to get some fast money by smuggling cocaine into the United States. His cocaine habit is costing him $100 per day. What should he do? He doesn’t know, but he’s dulling the pain with cocaine.
Changes in Intellectual Functioning
Contrary to the notion that you can’t teach an old dog new tricks, mental functions are at a peak in middle age. Middle-aged adults can continue to learn new skills, new facts, and can remember those they already know well. Unfortunately, many middle-aged people do not fully use their intellectual capacities. Many settle into a job and family life and are less active in using their intellectual capacities than they were in their younger years, when they were attending school or when they were learning their profession or trade. Some middle-aged adults are unfortunately trapped by the erroneous belief that they can’t learn anything new.
If a person is mentally active, that person will continue to learn well into later adulthood. Practically all cognitive capacities show no noticeable declines in middle adulthood. Adults who mistakenly believe that they completed their education in their 20s are apt to show declines in their intellectual functioning in middle adulthood. There is truth in the adage “What you do not use, you will begin to lose.”
There are variations in regard to specific intellectual capacities. People in middle adulthood who use their verbal abilities regularly (either on the job or through some other mental stimulation such as reading) further develop their vocabulary and verbal abilities. There is some evidence that middle-aged adults may be slightly less adept at tests of short-term memory, but this is usually compensated by wisdom gained from a variety of past experiences (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). If middle-aged adults are mentally active, their IQ scores on tests are apt to show slight increases.
Creative productivity is at its optimum point in middle age. Scientists, scholars, and artists have their highest rate of output generally in their 40s—and their productivity tends to level off in the late 40s or 50s (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). There are different age peaks for different types of creative production. In general, the more unique, original, and inventive the production, the more likely it is to have been created in a person’s 20s or 30s rather than later in life. The more a creative act depends on accumulated development, however, the more likely it is to occur in the later years of life.
Middle-aged adults tend to think in an integrative way. That is, they tend to interpret what they see, read, or hear in terms of its personal and psychological meaning. For example, instead of accepting what they read at face value (as younger people are apt to do), middle-aged adults filter information through their own learning and experience. This ability to interpret events in an integrative way has a number of benefits. It enables a person to better identify scams and “con games,” because an integrative thinker is less naive. It enables many adults to come to terms with childhood events that once disturbed them. It enables middle-aged people to create inspirational legends and myths by putting truths about the human condition into symbols that younger generations can turn to for guidelines in leading their lives. Papalia and Martorell (2015) note that people need to be capable of integrative thought before they can become spiritual and moral leaders.
Integrative thinking also enables people in their 40s and 50s to be at the peak of their practical problem-solving capacities. People in this age group are best able to arrive at quality solutions for everyday problems and crises, such as what is wrong with an automobile that fails to start, how to repair a hole in drywall in a house, and what types of injuries require medical attention.
In the past few decades, an increasing proportion of middle-aged adults have been returning to college. Some want an additional degree to move up a career ladder. Some seek training that will help them to perform their present jobs better. Some are preparing to seek a new career. Some are taking courses to fill leisure time and to learn about subjects they find challenging. Some want to expand their knowledge in special-interest areas, such as photography or sculpting. Some want to expand their interests in preparation for retirement years. Professionals in rapidly expanding fields (such as computer science, law, health care, gerontological social work, engineering, and teaching) need to keep up with new developments. Social work practitioners often take workshops and continuing education courses to keep abreast of new treatment techniques, new programs, and changes in social welfare legislation. In our modern, complex society, it is essential that learning continue throughout one’s lifespan.
Life is more meaningful if one’s intellectual capacities are being challenged and used. College instructors are generally delighted to have returning students in their classes, because such students have a wealth of experiences to share and are usually highly committed to learning. Compared to younger students, they are less apt to major in “having a good time.”
When middle-aged adults return to college, they often need a few weeks to get used to the routine of taking notes in classes, writing papers, and studying for exams. A few courses, such as mathematics and algebra, tend to be particularly difficult because returning students have forgotten some of the basic concepts they learned years ago. Because people at age 50 learn at nearly the same rate and in the same way as they did at age 20, most returning students do well in their courses.
Colleges are not the only places that offer adult education courses. Courses are also provided by vocational and technical centers, businesses, labor unions, professional societies, community organizations, and government agencies. The concept of lifelong education has been a boon for many colleges and universities.
In middle adulthood, there is generally only a small amount of deterioration in physical capacities, and almost no deterioration in potential for mental functioning. Cognitive functioning may actually increase well into later adulthood (Lefrancois, 1999). The sad fact is that many people are not sufficiently active, either mentally or physically. As a result, their actual performance, physical and mental, falls far short of their potential performance.
10-3Describe the Midlife Crises Associated with Female Menopause and Male Climacteric
10-3aFemale Menopause
Menopause is the event in every woman’s life when she stops menstruating and can no longer bear children. The median age when menopause occurs is 51 years, although it may occur in women as young as 36, or may not occur until a woman is in her mid-50s. The time span ranging from two to five years during which a woman’s body undergoes the physiological changes that bring on menopause is called the climacteric. There is some evidence of a hereditary pattern for the onset of menopause, because daughters generally begin and end menopause at about the same age and in the same manner as their mothers.
Menopause is caused by a decrease in the production of estrogen, which leads to a cessation of ovulation. Menopause begins with a change in a woman’s menstrual pattern. This pattern varies between women. Periods may be skipped and become irregular. There may be a general slowing down of flow of blood during menstruation. There may be irregularity in the amount of blood flow and in the timing of periods. Or there may be an abrupt cessation of menstruation. The usual pattern is skipped periods, with the periods occurring further and further apart.
During menopause, a number of biological changes occur. The ovaries become smaller and no longer secrete eggs regularly. The fallopian tubes, having no more eggs to transport, become shorter and smaller. The vagina loses some of its elasticity and becomes shorter. The uterus shrinks and hardens. The hormone content of urine changes. All of these changes are biologically related to cessation of functioning of the reproductive system.
The reduction of activity of the ovaries affects other glands and may produce disturbing symptoms in some women. A majority of women undergoing menopause encounter few, if any, disturbing symptoms. As Spotlight 10.2 indicates, the symptoms of menopause may even vary among cultures.
Spotlight on Diversity 10.2
Cultural Differences in Women’s Experience of Menopause
The importance of doing cross-cultural research on widely held beliefs is indicated in a study by Lock (1991) that compares Japanese women’s experience of menopause to that of Canadian women. Vast differences were found. Only 12.6 percent of Japanese women who were beginning to experience irregular menstruation reported experiencing hot flashes in a two-week period compared to 47.4 percent of Canadian women. Fewer than 20 percent of Japanese women had ever had a hot flash, compared to almost 65 percent of Canadian women.
There is no specific Japanese word for a hot flash, which is surprising, because the Japanese language makes many subtle distinctions about all kinds of body states. This lack of a word for a hot flash supports the finding of a low incidence of what most Western women report as the most troubling symptom of menopause.
Chornesky (1998) notes that Mayan women in Mexico do not report having any symptoms related to menopause. Chornesky also reports that symptoms of menopause are uncommon among Native American women, interestingly, in Native American cultures menopause is viewed as an important rite of passage, signifying entrance into the highly respected state of elderhood and opening up the opportunity to assume important new social roles. For example, in the Lakota Sioux tribe, only after menopause can a Lakota woman become a midwife or a medicine woman and assume roles that are equal to those of men in tribal affairs (Chornesky, 1998).
What does this research tell us? It emphasizes the importance of conducting cross-cultural studies on biological phenomena. The findings also mean that it would be a mistake to use a list of menopausal symptoms drawn up in one country to assess women in another country. The findings also suggest the possibility of biological interpopulation variations in physical symptoms, such as hot flashes. Finally, the research suggests that different cultures view events (such as menopause) differently.
Hot flashes appear to be due to a malfunction of temperature control mechanisms in the hypothalamus (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). Estrogen deficiency contributes to this malfunction. Hot flashes generally disappear spontaneously after a few years.
Other changes may occur during menopause, most of which are due to reduced estrogen. The hair on the scalp and external genitalia may become thinner. The labia may lose their firmness. The breasts may lose some of their firmness and become smaller. There is a tendency to gain weight, and the body contour may change, though some women lose weight. Itchiness, particularly after showering, may occur. Headaches may increase, and insomnia may occur. Some muscles, particularly in the upper legs and arms, may lose some of their elasticity and strength. Growth of hair on the upper lip and at the corners of the mouth may appear. Many of these symptoms can be minimized by regular exercise. In approximately one of four women who are postmenopausal, the decrease in estrogen leads to osteoporosis (see Highlight 10.3).
Highlight 10.3
Osteoporosis
Osteoporosis is a thinning and weakening of the bones. As a result of a drop in blood calcium level, bones become thin and brittle, with a consequent reduction in bone mass. Osteoporosis is a major factor leading to broken bones in later life. Women are much more susceptible to osteoporosis, particularly women who are white, thin, and smokers, and those who do not get enough exercise or calcium. Women who have had their ovaries surgically removed in middle age are also more susceptible to osteoporosis.
One of the dangers of osteoporosis is fractures of the vertebrae, which can lead to those affected becoming stooped from the waist up, with a height loss of 4 inches or more. Osteoporosis also often leads to hip fractures in older women.
Osteoporosis is preventable. The most important preventive measures include exercising, getting more calcium, and avoiding smoking. Exercise appears to stimulate new bone growth. It should become part of the daily routine early in life, and continue at moderate levels throughout life. Weight-bearing exercises (such as jogging, aerobic dancing, walking, bicycling, and jumping rope) are particularly beneficial in increasing bone density.
Most women in the United States drink too little milk and eat few foods rich in calcium. It is recommended that women should get between 1,000 and 1,500 milligrams (or more) of calcium daily, beginning in their youth (Papalia et al., 2012). Dairy foods are calcium rich. To avoid high-cholesterol dairy products, low-fat milk and low-fat yogurt are recommended. Other foods rich in calcium include canned sardines and salmon (if eaten with the bones still present), oysters, and certain vegetables, such as broccoli, turnips, and mustard greens. Also useful is taking recommended daily amounts of vitamin D, which helps the body absorb calcium.
An alternative treatment that used to be recommended is hormone replacement therapy (HRT), which involves the administration of estrogen to women at high risk for developing osteoporosis, such as those who have had their ovaries removed at a fairly young age. HRT is now seldom recommended for preventing osteoporosis, as a major study in 2002 found that women who received HRT, rather than a placebo, suffered more strokes, more heart attacks, and more blood clots, and had higher rates of invasive breast cancer (Spake, 2002).
A variety of psychological reactions also accompany menopause, but certainly not every woman encounters psychological difficulties at this time. If a woman is well adjusted emotionally before menopause, she is unlikely to experience psychological problems during it (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017).
The psychological reactions a woman has to menopause are partly determined by her interpretations of this life change. If a woman sees this change as simply being one of many life changes, she is not apt to have any adverse reactions. She may even view menopause as a positive event, for she no longer has to bother with menstruation or worry about getting pregnant.
There is no clear-cut way to identify the exact time when menopause ends. Most authorities agree that the climacteric can be considered as ending when there has been no menstrual period for one year. Physical symptoms of menopause usually end when ovulation ceases.
Some doctors urge that some type of birth control be continued for two years after the last period in order to prevent pregnancy. “Change-of-life” babies are rare because conception, although possible, is unlikely to occur. Middle-aged pregnancies do present increased health risks. The child has a higher chance of having a birth defect. For example, the risk of Down syndrome is greatest with older parents; the chances rise from 1 in 2,000 among 25-year-old mothers to 1 in 40 for women over 45 (Papalia et al., 2012). Spontaneous abortions are more common in women who become pregnant after the age of 40. In addition, older women are more apt to have a prolonged labor due to the loss of elasticity of the vagina and the cervix.
Since the most troublesome physical symptoms of menopause are linked to reduced levels of estrogen, hormone replacement therapy (HRT) in the form of artificial estrogen is sometimes prescribed by physicians. Because estrogen taken alone increases the risk of uterine cancer, women who still have a uterus are usually given estrogen in combination with progestin, a form of the female hormone progesterone. The use of HRT has become highly controversial, as it has been found that HRT increases the risk of strokes, heart attacks, invasive breast cancer, and blood clots (Spake, 2002). The medical profession is now studying using alternative approaches to treating menopause.
10-3bMale Climacteric
In recent years, there has been considerable discussion about “male menopause.” In a technical sense, the term is a misnomer, as menopause means the cessation of the menses. The term male climacteric is more accurate. It should be noted that men who have gone through male climacteric still retain the potential to reproduce.
Sometime between the ages of 35 and 60 men reach an uncertain period in their lives that has been termed a midlife crisis. It is a time of high risk for divorce, for extramarital affairs, for career changes, for accidents, and even for suicide attempts. All men experience it to some degree and emerge a bit changed, for better or for worse. It is a time of questions: “Is what I’m doing with my life really satisfying and meaningful? Would I be better off if I had pursued a different vocation or career? Do I really want to be married to my partner?”
Male climacteric is a time when a man reevaluates his marriage and his family life. This period of reassessment is often characterized by nervousness, decrease in sexual activity, depression, decreased memory and concentration, decreased sexual interests, fatigue, sleep disturbances, irritability, loss of interest or self-confidence, indecisiveness, numbness and tingling, fear of impending danger, and/or excitability. Other possible symptoms are headaches, vertigo, constipation, crying, hot flashes, chilly sensations, itching, sweating, and/or cold hands and feet.
A man going through male climacteric usually encounters some event that forces him to examine who he is and what he wants out of life. During this crisis, he looks back on his successes and failures, his degree of dependency on others, the outcomes of his dreams, and examines his capabilities for what lies ahead. Depending on what he sees and how he deals with it, this experience can be either exhilarating or demoralizing. He sees the disparity between youth and age, between hope and reality.
Male climacteric is caused by a combination of biological and psychological factors. As a male grows older, his hair thins and begins to turn gray. He develops more wrinkles and tends to develop a “tire” around his waist. His physical energy gradually decreases, and he can no longer run as fast as he once did. There are changes in his heart, his prostate, his sexual capacity, his chest size, his kidneys, his hearing, and his gastrointestinal tract.
The production of testosterone gradually decreases. Testosterone is an androgen that is the most potent naturally occurring male hormone. It stimulates the activity of male secondary sex characteristics, such as hair growth and voice depth, and helps to prevent deterioration in the sex organs in later life. The male sex glands are essential for the vitality of youth. These glands are the first glands to suffer when aging occurs. Two of the subtler changes (as compared to hair loss, wrinkles, slowing blood circulation, and more sluggish digestion) are a decline in the number of sperm in an ejaculation and a reduction of testosterone present in the plasma and urine. The testes lose their earlier vigorous functioning and produce decreasing amounts of hormones. Older men generally take a longer time to achieve an erection. It also takes a longer time before an erection can be regained after an orgasm.
Some men do have greater hormonal fluctuations at climacteric. Hyde and DeLamater (2017) summarize studies that have found evidence of monthly cycles in some men with hormonal fluctuations in a 30-day rhythm.
While biological changes (including the diminishing production of sex hormones) play an important part in male climacteric, perhaps even more important is the problem of being middle-aged in a culture that worships youth. Many of the problems associated with male climacteric are due to psychological factors.
There is the fear of aging, which is intensified by the awareness that mental and physical capacities are declining, including sexual capacities. Also involved is the fear of failure, either in a job or in the man’s personal life. Fear of women may be a part of this. A man may think that his sexual prowess is waning, and then may fear women’s greater sexual capacities. He may also have a fear of failing in his sexual activities. The man with self-doubts is especially susceptible to the fear of rejection. He is very sensitive to derogatory comments about his age, his physique, or his thinning hah. A fear of death may be apparent as he realizes he has probably lived at least half of his life. All of these fears are apt to have an adverse impact on his emotional and sexual functioning.
A significant part of male climacteric is due to depression, which is often brought on when a man fears aging and recognizes that His sexual powers are waning (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011). He also realizes that he will never achieve the successes that he envisioned for himself years earlier. His bouts with depression may be so profound that he may contemplate suicide. Depression during this midlife crisis may also be triggered by a reevaluation of childhood dreams, conflicts in need of resolution, new erotic longings and fantasies, sadness over opportunities lost, and a new questioning of values. All of this is coupled with a search for new meaning in life. He realizes half of his life may be gone, and time becomes more precious. He worries about things undone, and there does not seem to be enough time for everything. He has the feeling of missing out on a big chunk of life. The man who is engaged in activities outside his daily job is a less likely candidate for depression. It is unbalanced to be so busy with getting ahead that the pleasures of life are missed. To recapture some of his former enthusiasm and perhaps to shake some of his unsettling doubts and fears, he may drive himself to work harder, to exercise more, or to seek younger women.
A man at midlife is also apt to experience a growing dissatisfaction with his job. He feels a sense of entrapment as the pressure to pay bills forces him to continue working at a job that he finds increasingly boring and unfulfilling. At the same time, his personal identity is deeply entwined with his work roles. His job has provided him with an opportunity to further develop his identity, to enter into a stable set of relationships with colleagues and/or clients, and to explain his place in the world. Now he questions that place. Occupational aspirations may change several times during this period. The emphasis may shift from measuring success in terms of achievement to measuring it in terms of economic security. Also at this time, movement up the occupational ladder is largely completed. If a man has not achieved his work goals by age 40 or 50, he may realize he may never achieve them; he may even be demoted one or two steps down the occupational ladder.
10-3cMidlife Crisis: True or False?
The ease or panic with which a man faces his middle years will depend on how he has accepted his faults and his strengths throughout life. The man who has developed a strong affective bond with his family will fare better than the man who has followed a more isolated and career-oriented course. To age gracefully is to realize that he has done the best he could with his life.
Many physicians will prescribe antidepressant therapy and counseling, and recommend the support and understanding of family and close friends (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011). Men who undergo a midlife crisis need to realize that there is still a great deal of pleasure and satisfaction to be gotten out of life. This is not the end; there are still things left for them to do.
Women go through similar psychological worries (for example, the empty-nest syndrome). Recent research indicates that a declining proportion of women are affected by the empty-nest syndrome because more women are emphasizing careers. Midlife is a time of reassessment for both sexes as people in this age group look over their lives. It is a time of reprioritizing one’s life. With the right attitude, this period can become a time of reappraisal, renewed commitment, and growth.
But the realization of slow deterioration in one’s physical capacities and of a disparity between one’s earlier dreams and present reality is apt to be a crisis for many people.
Some health evidence shows that midlife is a time of crisis for many people. Hypertension, peptic ulcers, and heart disease are most often diagnosed in middle-aged patients. The rate of first admissions for alcoholism treatment is higher for middle-aged individuals than for younger adults (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). These statistics suggest that middle adulthood can be a period of stress and turmoil.
Thus, it appears that midlife is a time of transition and change. It is a crisis for some, but not for others (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011). For some women, menopause is a precipitating factor that sets off a midlife crisis; for other women, some of the symptoms may be uncomfortable, but an identity crisis is not precipitated. For some men and women, their children leaving home precipitates an identity crisis; other men and women delight in seeing their children grow and develop, and experience a new sense of freedom in being able to travel more and to pursue more vigorously special interests and hobbies. Most men and women look forward to the departure of the youngest child.
Men who undergo a midlife crisis are apt to have had adjustment problems for a long time. Kaluger and Kaluger (1984, p. 541) conclude, “Midlife crises may be the result of unadjusted adolescents and young adults who grow up to be unadjusted middle-aged adults rather than the result of a universal crisis confined to midlife.”
Stage theorists (such as Daniel Levinson; see Chapter 11) view midlife as a crisis, believing that the middle-aged adult is suspended between the past and the future, trying to cope with this gap that threatens life’s continuity. Adult development experts are virtually unanimous in their belief that midlife crises have been exaggerated (Santrock, 2013). There is often considerable variation in the way people experience the stages of life.
In contrast to stage theories, the contemporary life events approach asserts that such events as divorce, remarriage, death of a spouse, and being terminated from employment involve varying degrees of stress, and therefore vary in their influence on an individual’s development (Lorenz, Wickrama, Conger, & Elder, 2006). This approach asserts that how life events influence an individual’s development depends not only on the life event itself but also on a variety of other factors, including physical health, family supports, the individual’s coping skills, and the socio-historical context. (For example, an individual may be better able to cope more effectively with divorce today than in the 1960s because divorce has become more commonplace and accepted in today’s society.)
10-4Summarize Sexual Functioning in Middle Age
10-4aSexual Functioning in Middle Age
Sexual expression is an important part of life for practically all age groups. In this section, we will focus on sexual functioning during middle adulthood—in marriage, in extramarital relationships, for those who are divorced or widowed, and for people who have never married.
Sex in Marriage
A close relationship exists between overall marital satisfaction and sexual satisfaction, particularly for men (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). These two factors probably influence each other. Marital satisfaction probably increases the pleasure derived from sexual intercourse, and a satisfying sexual relationship probably increases the satisfaction derived from a marriage. Women are much more likely to be orgasmic in very happy marriages than in less happy marriages (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011).
Generally speaking, marriage partners report satisfaction with marital sex. For men, satisfaction is highest in the 18–24 age group and decreases slightly as men grow older. For women, satisfaction is highest in the 35–44 age group. These findings are consistent with studies that have found that a man’s sex drive reaches its peak at a relatively young age, whereas a woman’s tends to peak in her late 30s or early 40s (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017).
The percentage of people engaging in sexual intercourse by age groups is presented in Table 10.1. The frequency of coitus is highest when the individuals are in their 20s and 30s, and then gradually declines as people grow older.
Table 10.1
Percentage Engaging in Sexual Intercourse
|
Age Groups |
Not At All |
A Few Times Per Year |
Few Times Per Month |
2–3 Times a Week |
4 OR More Times a Week |
|
Men |
|||||
|
18–24 |
15 |
21 |
24 |
28 |
12 |
|
25–29 |
7 |
15 |
31 |
36 |
11 |
|
30–39 |
8 |
15 |
37 |
23 |
6 |
|
40–49 |
9 |
18 |
40 |
27 |
6 |
|
50–59 |
11 |
22 |
43 |
20 |
3 |
|
Women |
|||||
|
18–24 |
11 |
16 |
32 |
29 |
12 |
|
25–29 |
5 |
10 |
38 |
37 |
10 |
|
30–39 |
9 |
16 |
6 |
33 |
6 |
|
40–49 |
15 |
16 |
44 |
20 |
5 |
|
50–59 |
30 |
22 |
35 |
12 |
2 |
Source: Santrock (2016)
Hyde and DeLamater (2011) note that for women there is a strong correlation between the frequency of intercourse and satisfaction with marital sex. There is also a strong correlation between a wife’s ability to communicate her sexual desires and feelings to her husband and the quality of marital sex.
After the birth of their first child, couples report less sexual satisfaction on average than do childless couples (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011). The presence of children in a family generally functions as an inhibition to sexual relations. Contrary to popular belief, the highest frequency of sexual intercourse occurs in childless couples. Many adjustments, pressures, and problems can be associated with parenthood.
For some couples, the birth of the first child produces difficulties, particularly if the pregnancy was unplanned. Wives usually experience the most stress after the birth of the first child. They are apt to be concerned about their physical appearance, have increased responsibilities that lead to fatigue, and sometimes feel neglected by their husbands as the husband–wife interactions and social activities tend to decline. The arrival of more children tends to further lessen sexual satisfaction in the marriage.
Married couples now use a greater variety of sexual techniques than couples in earlier generations did. The female-on-top position is increasingly being used, because it gives the female greater control over stimulation of the clitoris than the man-on-top position. Oral sex has also become more popular. Couples today also spend a longer time making love than couples did decades ago. Most couples now spend between 15 minutes and an hour having sex (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011). This change may reflect a greater awareness by married men and women that women are more likely to enjoy sex more and to be orgasmic if intercourse is unhurried.
Crooks and Baur (2011) summarize information on masturbation:
Most men and women, both married and unmarried, masturbate on occasion. Women tend to masturbate more after they reach their 20s than they did in their teens. Kinsey hypothesized that this was due to increased erotic responsiveness, opportunities for learning about the possibility of self-stimulation through sex play with a partner, and a reduction in sexual inhibitions. Masturbation is often considered inappropriate when a person has a sexual partner or is married. Some people believe that they should not engage in a sexual activity that excludes their partners, or that experiencing sexual pleasure by masturbation deprives their partners of pleasure. Others mistakenly interpret their partner’s desire to masturbate as a sign that something is wrong with their relationship. But unless it interferes with mutually enjoyable sexual intimacy in the relationship, masturbation can be considered a normal part of each partner’s sexual repertoire. It is common for people to continue masturbation after they marry. In fact, individuals who engage in sexual activity with their partners more frequently than other individuals also masturbate more often. (p. 233)
See Highlight 10.4— Five languages of love.
Highlight 10.4
Five Languages of Love
Some people mistakenly believe that being a great sex partner is the best way to communicate love to one’s mate. A good sex life is indeed important, but there are five other more important ways to express love to one’s mate, according to Gary Chapman (1992). These five emotional love languages are
· (1)
words of affirmation,
· (2)
quality time,
· (3)
gifts,
· (4)
acts of service, and
· (5)
physical touch.
We fall in love because of the way we feel about ourselves when we are with that person. In a nutshell, if we want a certain person to love us, we need to make that person feel special. What is the secret to making someone feel special? Chapman indicates it is through the above five emotional love languages. It is important to recognize that there is considerable variation in how each person prioritizes these love languages; for example, one person may assign the highest value to physical touch and the lowest to gifts, while another person may assign the highest value to quality time and the lowest to words of affirmation. If we want our mate to feel special, it is critical for each of us to determine the values that our mate assigns to each of these love languages. Before we discuss how we determine our mate’s priorities about these five languages of love, each of these love languages will be briefly described.
(1) Words of affirmation: Words of appreciation, or verbal compliments, are powerful communicators of love. Examples include the following: “You look great in that outfit”; “The dinner you just made is the best I’ve eaten in a long time”; “I truly appreciate you doing the laundry this evening”; and “I love how you can talk with anyone.” Words of affirmation have an additional benefit of building your mate’s self-image and confidence. (The focus of love should not be on getting something you want, but on doing something for the well-being of the one you love.)
(2) Quality time: Some mates believe that doing things together, being together, and focusing in on one another is the best way to show love. “Quality time” involves giving your mate your undivided attention. If your mate highly values quality time, you need to turn off the TV and focus on attending to what your mate is desiring. Quality time is not just being in close proximity, but being together with focused attention. One way to learn to better communicate focused attention with your mate is to establish a daily sharing time in which each of you talks about some significant things that happened to you that day and how you feel about them.
(3) Gifts: In every culture, members give gifts to one another. A gift is something your mate can hold in his or her hand and conclude “Look! He is thinking of me,” or “She values me.” If your mate’s primary love language is receiving gifts, you should become a proficient gift giver. Giving gifts may be the easiest love language to learn. Gifts do not necessarily have to always be material in nature; for example, if your mate is encountering a crisis, your most powerful gift may be physical presence. Gifts also do not need to be expensive to send a powerful message of love. Mates who forget a special day of their mate’s (such as a birthday) will soon discover that their mate feels neglected and unloved.
(4) Acts of service: There are an infinite number of acts of service—vacuuming, cooking a meal, doing the dishes, washing your mate’s car, painting a room, making the bed, taking out the trash, fixing a broken appliance, going to the grocery store to purchase products your mate wants, volunteering to visit your mate’s parents, and so on. Discovering what your mate most wants you to do in regard to acts of service requires observation and trial and error. (You can let your mate know what you most desire in regards to acts of service by highlighting what you most cherish—while remembering that demands stop the flow of love.)
(5) Physical touch: Physical touch is a way to communicate emotional love. Everyone needs to be held and hugged. Rene Spitz (1945) demonstrated that even young children need physical contact, such as being cuddled and held. Without such direct physical contact, the social, intellectual, emotional, and physical development of children will be severely stunted. Everyone needs to observe what their mate cherishes in regard to physical touch: sometimes hugging your mate, stroking their back, holding hands, or a kiss on the cheek will fulfill this need. The right physical touch can improve a relationship, while the wrong physical touch (such as hitting) can break a relationship. If your mate’s primary love language is physical touch, holding him or her when he or she is in crisis may be the most important thing you can do. Physical touch includes learning and doing what your mate cherishes in your sexual relationship.
Each of us has a primary love language—odds are that your mate’s primary love language is not the same as yours. All of us need to observe and learn (often through trial and error) what our mate’s primary love language is. And then we need to seek to fulfill our mate’s love language—if we want him or her to feel special and be in love with us.
Extramarital Sexual Relationships
Different studies have found a wide variation in the percentage of men and women who report having had an affair while they were married: 5 to 26 percent of husbands, and 1 to 23 percent of wives reported having affairs (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). For males, the frequency of extramarital coitus decreases with age, whereas with females, there is a gradual increase up to around age 40. These sex differences may reflect differences in the peaking of the sex drive. Wives with full-time jobs outside the home are more apt to have extramarital affairs than are wives who do not have jobs. Wives with full-time jobs have an increased opportunity to become acquainted with a variety of men who are not known by the husband.
1. Do you believe an extramarital affair is sometimes justifiable? If you were married and your spouse had an extramarital affair, would you seek a divorce?
Spouses become involved in extramarital coitus for a variety of reasons. In some cases, marital sex may not be satisfying. The spouse’s partner may have a long-term illness or a sexual dysfunction, or the couple may be separated. The extramarital affair may represent an attempt to obtain what is missing in the marriage. Some seek extramarital involvements to obtain affection, to satisfy curiosity, to find excitement, or to add to their list of sexual conquests. Some become involved in extramarital affairs to get revenge for feeling wronged by their spouse. Some want to punish their spouse for not being more affectionate or appreciative. In many cases, there is a combination of reasons for an extramarital affair.
Some surveys have examined why a high percentage of married couples do not have extramarital affairs. The most mentioned reason is that it would be a betrayal of trust in the love relationship. Other stated reasons are that it would damage the marital relationship, that it would hurt the spouse, and that the probable benefits of an affair are not worth the consequences (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011).
In most cases, extramarital affairs are carried out in secret. Sometimes the spouse later discovers the affair. Typical reactions to the affair are summarized by Maier (1984) through his experiences as a marriage counselor:
Among the most common feelings expressed by a spouse after such a discovery are anger and a sense of being deceived and betrayed. In addition, the affair is often seen as a symbolic insult to the spouse’s affection and sexual adequacy. Certain subcultures consider it appropriate to seek some type of revenge or retribution.
Generally speaking, isolated sexual experiences are less disturbing to spouses than prolonged extramarital affairs. Brief sexual encounters can sometimes be written off as temporary reactions to sexual frustration; however, longer affairs are seen as greater threats to the marital love relationship, (p. 322)
The discovery of an extramarital affair may lead to a divorce, but not always. Sometimes the discovery of an affair is a crisis that forces a couple to recognize that problems (sexual or nonsexual) exist in their marriage, and the couple then seek to work on these to improve the marriage. Some spouses reluctantly accept and adjust to the affair without saying much. They may be financially dependent on their partner, or they may have a low sense of self-worth and have made adjustments to being emotionally abused by their spouse in the past. Others show little reaction because they realize a divorce is expensive, socially degrading, and may result in loneliness. In such marriages, the relationship may become devitalized, with the partners having little emotional attachment to each other.
A few spouses react to an extramarital affair by gradually entering into a consensual extramarital relationship. In such a relationship, extramarital sexual relationships are permitted and even encouraged by both partners. One type of consensual extramarital sex arrangement is mate swapping. In this arrangement, two or more couples get together and exchange partners, either retiring to a separate place to have sexual relations or having sex in the same room with various combinations of partners.
Ethical Question 10.4
1. Do you view mate swapping as being unethical?
Sex following Divorce
A great majority of formerly married persons become sexually active within a year after divorce. When matched for age, divorced men have a slightly higher frequency of coitus than do married men. Divorced men also tend to have a variety of partners (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). Divorced women also generally have a fairly active sex life, although the incidence of postmarital sex tends to be lower than when they were married. They also tend to have a smaller number of partners than do divorced men (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). Divorced women report a higher frequency of orgasm than they experienced in marital sex (Hyde & DeLamater, 2011). Divorced men also report that sexual relationships are satisfying.
These results do not mean that sex following a divorce is more satisfying than marital sex. People who have a satisfying sexual relationship may be less likely to get a divorce. People who get divorced are probably not as likely to give high ratings to their sexual relationship when they were married.
Divorced people today are less concerned about hiding their sexual relationships from their children than were divorced people a generation ago. Divorced people apparently now have more liberal views on sex than in the past.
Sex in Widowhood
Ending a marriage by divorce can be traumatic, but a marriage ended by the death of one’s spouse is usually more traumatic. In a divorce, a spouse has input into the decision to part, but most widows and widowers have no input and wish their partner were still alive. They have to adjust not only to being single, but also to the death of a loved one.
Widowers are more likely than widows to establish a new sexual relationship. In middle and later adulthood, there are substantially more single women than single men. There is greater cultural acceptance of older men dating younger women than vice versa. Cultural patterns also encourage widowers to establish new sexual relationships, whereas widows feel pressure to be sexually loyal to their deceased spouse. Widows also tend to receive more emotional support from friends and family, and therefore they may feel less need to form a new sexual relationship.
Sex among the Never Married
Very little research has been conducted on the sexual lifestyles of never-married adults. The attitudes of singles about their status vary widely. Some plan never to marry. Some want to marry, but haven’t found the right partner; others have found someone they want to marry but that person refuses to marry. Some desperately seek a partner.
The lifestyles of the never-married vary tremendously. Some contently become celibate. Others are highly involved in the singles scene—living in apartments for single people, going to singles bars, and joining singles clubs. Some singles have numerous sexual partners. Some singles, on the other hand, become involved in their careers or hobbies, and though they may date occasionally, they do not want the restrictions of marriage. Some singles are content to date someone steadily for a few years and, when that relationship sours, move on to another. Some cohabit with an opposite-sex or same-sex partner. Some become addicted to alcohol or to some other drug, and spend relatively little time in romantic relationships.
Celibacy
Although some people find abstinence to be very difficult, others experience it as satisfying. Periods of celibacy may be important for self-exploration and recovery from broken romances.
10-5Describe AIDS–Its Causes and Effects; How It Is Contracted; How Its Spread Can Be Prevented; and Understand AIDS Discrimination
10-5aPeople Living with AIDS: A Population-at-Risk
The remainder of this chapter will focus on AIDS (acquired immune deficiency syndrome). AIDS is a devastating disease that has the potential to kill more people than any other. It is a contagious, incurable disease that targets the body’s immune system and generally reduces the body’s capacity to defend itself against disease. The HIV virus (human immunodeficiency virus) and AIDS were first identified in 1981 and quickly became known as a disease affecting only gay men.
AIDS in the United States
In the United States today, HIV/AIDS affects a wide range of individuals. It is estimated that 1,218,400 individuals over the age of 13 have HIV. In 2014, an estimated 44,000 new cases of HIV were diagnosed, with an estimated 13 percent of those individuals not being aware they were affected at the time of the diagnosis (CDC, 2016a). Gay males are the population most affected by HIV, with the greatest number of new cases being young black gay males (CDC, 2016). Despite this, HIV/AIDS is affecting other populations as well. In 2014, HIV transmitted through heterosexual sex accounted for 24 percent of all new HIV diagnoses (CDC, 2016). HIV, mainly acquired through heterosexual contact or injection drug use, is now the leading cause of death in women in the United States between the ages of 25 and 44 (Hyde and DeLamater, 2017). In addition, HIV is increasing in the population of individuals age 50 and older (CDC, 2016).
10-5bWhat Causes AIDS?
AIDS is caused by a type of virus called HIV, an abbreviation for human immunodeficiency virus. A virus is a protein-coated package of genes that invades a healthy body cell and alters the normal genetic apparatus of the cell, causing the cell to reproduce the virus. In the process, the invaded cell is often killed. The HIV virus falls within a special category of viruses called retroviruses, so named because they reverse the usual order of reproduction within the cells they infect.
HIV invades cells involved in the body’s normal process of protecting itself from disease and causes these cells to produce more of the virus. Apparently, HIV destroys normal white blood cells, which are supposed to fight off diseases invading the body. As a result, the body is left defenseless and can fall prey to other infections. The virus devastates the body’s immune, or defense, system so that other diseases occur and eventually cause death. Without a functioning immune system to combat germs, the affected person becomes vulnerable to bacteria, fungi, malignancies, and other viruses that may cause life-threatening illnesses, such as cancer, pneumonia, and meningitis.
10-5cHow Is AIDS Contracted?
HIV is transmitted through transmission of body fluids, including blood, semen, pre-seminal fluids, rectal/vaginal secretions, and breast milk. HIV is transmitted primarily through sexual intercourse, contaminated blood, contaminated needles, and from an infected woman to her baby during pregnancy or childbirth (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). In rare cases, it has been transmitted through oral sex, blood transfusions, organ /tissue transplants, eating food that has been pre-chewed by a person with HIV, and deep open-mouth kissing if both partners have sores or bleeding gums. HIV is not spread through saliva (CDC, 2016).
10-5dDiagnosis
Several tests have been developed to determine if a person has been exposed to the AIDS virus. These tests do not directly detect the virus, but rather the antibodies a person’s immune system develops to fight the virus. For a person who has been infected with HIV, it generally takes two to three months before enough antibodies are produced to be detected by the test. The tests only establish the presence of antibodies that indicate exposure to the virus.
10-5eThe Effects of HIV
Once a person is infected with HIV, several years may go by before symptoms of AIDS appear.
Within 2–4 weeks after infection with HIV, an individual may have symptoms (CDC, 2016).
Initial symptoms include dry cough, abdominal discomfort, headaches, oral thrush, loss of appetite, fever, night sweats, weight loss, diarrhea, skin rashes, tiredness, swollen lymph nodes, and lack of resistance to infection. (Many other illnesses have similar symptoms, so it is irrational for people to conclude they are developing AIDS if they have some of these symptoms.)
As AIDS progresses, the immune system is less and less capable of fighting off “opportunist” diseases, making the infected person vulnerable to a variety of cancers, nervous system degeneration, and infections caused by other viruses, bacteria, parasites, and fungi. Ordinarily, opportunistic infections are not life-threatening to people with healthy immune systems, but they are frequently fatal to people with AIDS, whose immunological functioning has been severely compromised.
10-5fTreatment and Prevention of AIDS
AIDS is a syndrome, not one specific disease. AIDS simply makes those infected by the vims increasingly more vulnerable to any disease that might come along. The disease process of AIDS involves a continuum whereby those affected become more and more vulnerable to devastating diseases.
At this time, there is no cure for AIDS. There are a multitude of hurdles to overcome in combating the disease. AIDS is caused by a form of virus, and even with modern technology, we don’t know how to cure a virus. For example, the common cold is caused by a virus; despite millions of dollars spent on research in the hopes of finding an effective cure, such a treatment has not yet been found for this common ailment. Currently, serious research is being undertaken to understand, prevent, and fight AIDS.
A person with AIDS receives medical attention.
A. Ramey/Photo Edit
Prevention can be pursued in two major ways. First, people can abstain from activities and behaviors that put them at risk for contracting the disease. Second, scientists can work on developing a vaccine to prevent contracting the disease, similar to vaccines that prevent polio or measles. A vaccine might either block the virus from attacking a person’s immune system or bolster the immune system so that HIV is unable to invade it.
Ethical Question 10.5
1. If you knew someone who was HIV positive, would you be hesitant to interact with that person? If you had children, would you be hesitant to have them interact with children who are HIV positive?
· Abstinence or delay of sexual activity, especially for youth.
· Being faithful, especially for those in committed relationships.
· Condom use, for those who engage in risky behavior. It is advisable to use a condom when having sexual intercourse with a new partner until it is certain that the person does not test positive for HIV. Condoms are 85 to 95 percent effective protecting against HIV if used properly (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017).
Other recommendations include the following:
· Stop injecting drugs and do not share needles with other people. If you are unable to stop your drug use, you need to use only new, sterile needles.
· If pregnant or breast feeding, take medicine to treat HIV (such as ART) as prescribed by your physician.
· If your partner is HIV positive, talk to a physician about PrEP, a medication taken to lower your risk of infection. PrEP stands for Pre-Exposure Prophylaxis, The word “prophylaxis” means to prevent of control the spread of an infection or disease, The goal of PrEP is to prevent HIV infection from taking hold if you are exposed to the virus. This is done by taking one pill every day. PrEP is composed of some of the same medicines used to keep the virus under control in people who are already living with HIV. PrEP is not a vaccine. Studies have found the risk of getting HIV is much lower for those who take PrEP consistently than for those who do not take PrEP (Wahlberg, 2016).
10-5gImpacts of Social and Economic Forces: AIDS Discrimination and Oppression
People who test positive for HIV or who have AIDS are often victimized by discrimination. Many Americans have a “them and us” mentality about those who test positive for HIV or who have AIDS. They want to have no contact with anyone who has HIV. They erroneously think that casual social contact may put them at risk. As a result, people who have the AIDS virus are apt to be shunned, risk losing their jobs, and often are abandoned by family, spouses, lovers, and friends. In some communities, when it becomes public knowledge that a child has the AIDS virus, parents of other children have reacted by not allowing their children to attend the same school and by prohibiting their children from having any contact with the child who is HIV positive.
Spotlight 10.3 summarizes material on the social and economic impact of AIDS worldwide.
Spotlight on Diversity 10.3
AIDS: A Global Epidemic
In the United States, the number of deaths from AIDS has, been dropping since 1995 (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017). This drop has largely been due to expensive drug treatments, which are mainly available in more affluent nations. More than 37 million people worldwide are now infected with AIDS (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017), most of them in the developing nations of Asia and Africa. Rates of infection are increasing most rapidly in the world’s poorest regions, especially in Africa, India, and China. More than 34 million people have died of AIDS since 1981 (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017).
Sub-Saharan Africa (southern Africa) is more heavily affected by AIDS and HIV than any other region of the world. This area is estimated to have around two-thirds of the global total infected by HIV. There are over 17 million AIDS orphans, whose parents have died of AIDS (Hyde & DeLamater, 2017).
Prospects for coping with the AIDS epidemic in poor nations are gloomy, because of the high cost of drugs that delay the onset of AIDS.
10-5hProfessional Values and AIDS
Social work has traditionally supported and advocated for oppressed and disenfranchised groups in our country—African Americans, Hispanics, the poor, older people, gays and lesbians, and women. Social workers have an ethical obligation to combat the numerous injustices connected with AIDS. AIDS is not a gay disease or an intravenous drug user’s disease. It is a human disease.
Medical care for a person with AIDS in Africa.
Jeremy Horner/Corbis Documentary/Getty Images
Ethical Question 10.6
1. Do you believe the United States and other developed countries have a moral obligation to provide assistance to developing countries to empower them to more effectively prevent the transmission of HIV and to treat those who are HIV positive?
It should be noted that in June 1998 the U.S. Supreme Court ruled that people infected with HIV (including those who have AIDS) are covered by the 1990 Americans with Disabilities Act, which protects those with a disability against discrimination in jobs, housing, and public accommodations.
Chapter 11
Psychological Aspects of Young and Middle Adulthood
Chapter Introduction
Paul Burns/Blend Images/Getty Images
Learning Objectives
This chapter will help prepare students to
· LO 1 Describe Erikson’s theories of psychological development during young and middle adulthood
· LO 2 Describe Peck’s theory of psychological development during middle adulthood
· LO 3 Describe Levinson’s theories of life structure, life eras, and transitions during adulthood
· LO 4 Summarize Maslow’s theory on hierarchy of needs
· LO 5 Describe emotional intelligence and social intelligence
· LO 6 Describe nonverbal communication cues
· LO 7 Summarize Glasser’s choice theory of human behavior
· LO 8 Describe Gawain’s theories about intuition and how human behavior is affected by it
· LO 9 Understand the issue of substance abuse
A Perspective
Figuring out the underlying reasons that cause others’ actions often has substantial payoffs. If a salesperson knows what motivates people to buy a certain product, he or she can then structure the sales pitch around this focus. If a social worker knows why a father is abusing his child, the worker then knows what has to be changed to stop the abuse. If a mother knows what discipline techniques will be effective with her children, she is then better prepared to curb their unwanted behavior. The primary focus of this human behavior and social environment text is to provide theoretical frameworks that will help the reader to observe and assess human behavior.
Debbie Peepers is a computer programmer; her husband, Doug, is a mechanical engineer. Although they have had little formal training in assessing human behavior, playing amateur psychologist is one of their favorite leisure activities. As with anything else, assessments of human behavior are apt to be more accurate when one has greater knowledge and awareness of the significant cues to attend to. Professional social workers who will be planning interventions with people and organizations have a special need to develop their assessment skills. Young and middle adulthood provides another developmental stage to examine some of the psychological dynamics of human behavior. Because there is a paucity of psychological theories specifically directed at young and middle adulthood, the primary focus of this chapter will be on describing contemporary theories and models for assessing human behavior throughout the lifespan.
11-1Describe Erickson’s Theories of Psychological Development during Young and Middle Adulthood
11-1aIntimacy versus Isolation
Erikson (1950) theorized that after young people develop a sense of identity, they next face the psychosocial crisis of intimacy versus isolation, which generally occurs in young adulthood (roughly during the 20s). Intimacy is the capacity to experience an open, tender, supportive relationship with another person, without fear of losing one’s own identity in the process of growing close. In such a relationship, the partners are able to understand, cognitively and emotionally, each other’s points of view. An intimate relationship permits the sharing of personal feelings as well as the disclosure of ideas and plans that are not fully developed. There is respect for each other and mutual enrichment in the interactions. Each person perceives an enhancement of his or her well-being through the stimulating interactions with the other.
Intimacy involves being empathetic and able to give and receive pleasure within the relationship. Although intimacy is often established within the context of a marital relationship, marriage itself does not produce intimacy. In some marriages, there is considerable intimacy (including sharing and mutual respect). However, in empty-shell marriages and in marriages with considerable conflict, there is very little intimacy. There are additional contexts where intimacy is apt to develop. The work setting is one of these, where close friendships are often formed. Close friendships are also apt to develop through membership in social and religious organizations.
Traditional socialization patterns in our society create different problems for males and females in the establishment of intimacy. Many boys are taught to be restrained in expressing their feelings and personal thoughts. They are also socialized to be competitive and self-reliant. They are raised to believe that they should be sexually aggressive and seek to “go as far as possible” in order to demonstrate their virility to their male friends. Males are thus often unprepared for intimate heterosexual relationships—which require that they express their feelings, be supportive rather than competitive, and have a commitment to continuing the relationship rather than piling up sexual trophies.
Traditionally, girls are socialized to be better prepared for the emotional demands of intimacy. They are socialized to express their feelings and personal thoughts and to be nurturant. They may, however, enter an intimate relationship with inappropriate expectations based on traditional gender-role stereotypes. For example, they may expect their partner to be stronger or more resourceful than he is. (The women’s movement has changed gender-role expectations and socialization practices for males and females; hopefully, the difficulties that men and women experience in forming intimate relationships will be reduced in future years.)
The negative pole of the crisis of young adulthood is isolation. People who resist intimacy continually erect barriers between themselves and others. Some people view intimacy as a blurring of the boundaries of their own identity and therefore are reluctant to become involved in intimate relationships. Some people are so busy seeking or maintaining their identity that they cannot share and express themselves in an intimate relationship.
Isolation may also result from situational factors. A young person may be so involved in studying to get into medical school that he or she may not have the time for an intimate relationship. Or a teenage girl may become pregnant, deliver and start raising the child, and then have few opportunities to become involved in a close relationship with an adult.
Isolation may also result from diverging spheres of activity and interest. An example of how isolation may develop in a traditional marriage involves Bill and Mary Ramsey. They married while in their early 20s, after dating for four years and enjoying doing many activities together. They were very much in love. They both wanted a traditional marriage. In their early years of marriage, they had two children, and Mary was content to stay at home to raise them. In her leisure time, she interacted with the other wives in the neighborhood. Bill worked as an insurance agent and spent his leisure hours hunting, fishing, and attending sporting events with male friends. As the years passed, Mary and Bill had less and less in common. Isolation became increasingly evident in their lack of mutual understanding and their lack of support for each other’s needs and life goals.
11-1bGenerativity versus Stagnation
Erikson’s (1963) seventh life-stage developmental crisis is generativity versus stagnation. Generativity involves a concern with and interest in establishing and guiding the next generation. The crisis of generativity versus stagnation is perceived by a middle-aged adult to involve a commitment to improve the life conditions of future generations. The achievement of generativity involves a willingness to care about the people and the things that one has produced. It also involves a commitment to protecting and enhancing the conditions of one’s society.
The achievement of generativity is important for the survival and development of any society. It involves the adult members’ dedicating themselves to contributing their skills, resources, and creativity to improve the quality of life for the young.
The contributions may be monumental, as were Martin Luther King Jr.’s and Gandhi’s to equality and human rights. For most people, however, the contributions are less well known—for example, the work done by volunteers for human service organizations. Adults serve on school boards, are active members of parent-teacher associations, serve on local government boards, are active in church activities, and so on. In each of these roles, adults have opportunities to positively influence the quality of life for others. To some extent, it is a reciprocity situation—when these adults were younger they were recipients of such services from other adults; now they are providers of such services. (See Highlight 11.1: The Key to Success in Work, and in Life—Be Focused.)
Highlight 11.1
The Key to Success in Work, and in Life—Be Focused
Daniel Goleman (2013) makes a strong case that the key to being successful in work, in love, and in life is to have the right focus. Doing a job well requires applying concentration. Creative insights flow best when we have an open mind, carefully exploring and analyzing all options. Having a good love life involves having a focus on doing what will lead our partner to feel that he or she is special.
Goleman (2013) asserts that there are three types of focuses: inner, other, and outer. The successful person becomes skilled at all three.
“Inner focus” involves having a high level of self-awareness and self-management. It involves knowing our strengths and limits. It involves having a set of values that involves a respect for ourselves and for others. It involves the ability to handle our distressing emotions so that those emotions do not interfere with getting things done. It involves marshaling our positive emotions to stay motivated in working toward our goals. It involves being able to bounce back from setbacks.
“Other focus” involves our ability to empathize with other people. It includes being able to understand how others perceive things, to connect, with their feelings, and to figure out how we can help them to face their life challenges and to improve their lives. Being skilled at “other focus” leads to teamwork and collaboration. It leads others to respect us, to want to resolve interpersonal conflicts, and to attend to what we say.
“Outer focus” involves our abilities to sense the larger forces that shape our world. It involves having the capacity to engage in critical thinking, including the ability to formulate constructive and winning strategies.
Goleman (2013) asserts that the capacity to focus constructively can be enhanced in a variety of ways. A few will be summarized. When we are studying a subject (such as statistics), we should give that subject our full attention tune out external distractions, such as a TV playing in the background or thinking about how our social life is going. It is very useful to receive expert feedback on how we can improve our capacities in reaching the goals we set. That expert might be a mentor, a life coach, a teacher, or someone who has excelled in an area involving a goal that we have set. Another suggestion is the necessity to put in the needed time to develop our capacities to achieve our goals; the more we engage in focused practice, the more our brain circuitry establishes the habits we need to be successful.
An example of someone who excelled at all three of the above focuses was Susan Butcher. Butcher won the Iditarod four times. The Iditarod Trail Dog Race is the biggest sporting event in Alaska. It is an annual long-distance dog race in early March from Anchorage to Nome, Alaska. Mushers and a team of 16 dogs, of which at least 6 must be in harness at the finish line, cover the 1,000-mile distance in 9 to 15 days. Teams frequently race through blizzards causing whiteout conditions, subzero temperatures, and gale-force winds that can cause wind chills to reach . This race has typically been won by macho men who race their dogs all day and rest at night, or go all night and rest during the day. Butcher observed her dogs closely (other focus) and concluded they performed much better by running and resting alternately in four- to six-hour chunks throughout the night and day instead of 12 hours on and 12 off. She took the risk of using this strategy (outer focus) to run the Iditarod, while the macho men used the 12-hour on-and-off strategy. She also sensed (inner focus) that she had the internal fortitude to survive and thrive with this new strategy. She won four times!
An example of a leader who was not focused was Tony Howard, who was the CEO of BP in 2010 when the BP oil disaster occurred in the Gulf of Mexico. In the spring of 2010 the Deepwater Horizon oil rig exploded and sank in the Gulf. An estimated 210 million gallons of oil were discharged. Eleven persons died in the disaster. The oil spill was the largest in the history of the petroleum industry. Countless sea animals and birds were killed. The coasts of the Gulf were severely impaired environmentally. BP, the owner of the oil rig, has paid over $42 billion to settle criminal and civil suits. Tony Howard showed little concern for the spill’s victims. He seemed annoyed by this “inconvenience” to his company and to his personal life. He claimed the disaster was not BP’s fault but the subcontractor’s fault, and took no responsibility. In fact, at the peak of the crisis he took a vacation and had a number of photos taken of himself sailing on his yacht. A few months later, BP discharged him as CEO. His actions during this crisis indicate he had extremely low levels of inner, other, and outer focuses.
The opposite of generativity is stagnation. Stagnation indicates a lack of psychological movement or growth. Some adults are self-centered and seek to maximize their pleasures at the expense of others; such people are stagnated because they have difficulty looking beyond their own needs or experiencing satisfaction in taking care of others. Having children does not necessarily guarantee generativity; adults who are unable to cope with raising children or with maintaining a household are likely to feel a sense of stagnation. Burnout has been identified as being one of the signs of stagnation (Davis, McKay, & Eshelmen, 2000).
Different individuals manifest stagnation in different ways. A narcissistic individual who generally relates to others in terms of how others can serve him may be fairly happy until the physical and psychological consequences of aging begin to occur. Such individuals often then experience an identity crisis when they realize their beautiful bodies and other physical attributes are waning. Many of these individuals experience a conversion to finding other meanings in living. For example, they coach Little League teams or become involved in church activities.
On the other hand, a depressed person is likely to perceive himself or herself as having insufficient resources to make any contribution to society. Such a person is apt to have low self-esteem, to be pessimistic about opportunities for improvement in the future, and therefore to be unwilling to invest effort in self-improvement or in seeking to help others.
11-2Describe Peck’s Theory of Psychological Development during Middle Adulthood
11-2aPeck’s Theories of Psychological Development
Peck (1968) asserted that there are four psychological advances critical to successful adjustment in middle adulthood:
1. Socializing versus sexualizing in human relationships. Peck suggests it is psychologically healthy for middle-aged adults to redefine the men and women in their lives so that they value them as individuals, friends, and companions, rather than primarily as sex objects.
2. Valuing wisdom versus valuing physical powers. Peck views wisdom as the capacity to make wise choices in life. He suggests that well-adjusted middle-aged adults are aware that the wisdom they now have more than compensates for decreases in stamina, physical strength, and youthful attractiveness.
3. Emotional flexibility versus emotional impoverishment. Emotional flexibility is the capacity to shift emotional investments from one activity to another, and from one person to another. Middle-aged adults are apt to experience breaking of relationships due to the deaths of friends, parents, and other relatives and the growing independence of children and their moving out of the home. Physical limitations may also necessitate a change in activities.
11-3Describe Levinson’s Theories of Life Structure, Life Eras, and Transitions during Adulthood
11-3aLevinson’s Theories of Life Structure, Life Eras, and Transitions for Men
Levinson and his colleagues (Levinson, Darrow, Klein, Levinson, & McKee, 1974; Levinson & Levinson, 1978) studied 40 men ages 35 to 45, including business executives, academic biologists, novelists, and hourly workers in industry. These men were interviewed and given personality tests. From these data, Levinson constructed some developmental theories of life changes in adulthood.
At the heart of Levinson’s theory is the concept of life structure. This term is defined as “the underlying pattern or design of a person’s life at a given time” (Levinson, 1986, p. 6). A person’s life structure shapes and is shaped by the person’s interactions with the environment. Components of the life structure include the people, institutions, things, places, and causes that a person decides are most important, as well as the dreams, values, and emotions that make them so. Most people build their life structures around their work and their families. Other important aspects of one’s life structure may include religion, racial identification, ethnic heritage, societal events (such as wars and economic depressions), and hobbies.
According to Levinson, life involves a number of passages: from the freedom of childhood to entering school; from school to the work world; from not dating to dating; from dating to breaking up or marrying; from marrying to divorce; and so on. Levinson sees some structure to these series of life passages. He asserts that people shape their life structures during the following four overlapping eras (each of which is 20 to 30 years in length):
1. Preadulthood (birth to age 22) is the formative time from conception to the end of adolescence.
2. Early adulthood (age 17 to age 45) is the era in which people make choices that significantly influence their lives, and the era in which people display the greatest energy and experience the most stress.
3. Middle adulthood (age 40 to age 65) is the era in which people tend to have reduced biological capacities but increased social responsibilities.
4. Late adulthood (age 60 and beyond) is the final phase of life.
There are transitional periods within some of these eras, and there are also transitional periods of about five years each that connect these eras. These transitional periods are displayed in Table 11.1, which shows the approximate ages when these transitions occur. (The transitions do not consume all the time in these periods because there are times of stability within each transitional period.)
Table 11.1
Eras and Transitional Periods in Levinson’s Theories of Adult Development (Males)
|
Eras |
Transitions |
|
1. Preadulthood (ages 0 to 22) |
Early adult transition (ages 17 to 22) |
|
2. Early adulthood (ages 17 to 45) |
Entry life structure for early adulthood (ages 22 to 28) Age-30 transition (ages 28 to 33) Culminating life structure for early adulthood (ages 33 to 40) Midlife transition (ages 40 to 45) |
|
3. Middle adulthood (ages 40 to 65) |
Entry life structure for middle adulthood (ages 45 to 50) Age-50 transition (ages 50 to 55) Culminating life structure for middle adulthood (ages 55 to 60) Late adult transition (ages 60 to 65) |
|
4. Late adulthood (age 60 and beyond) |
|
Early adult transition (ages 17 to 22). During this transition (which may take three to five years), men move from preadulthood into adulthood. A person moves out of his or her parents’ home and becomes more financially and emotionally independent. Going to college or joining the military service serves as a transitional institutional situation between being a child in a family and reaching full adult status.
Entry life structure for early adulthood (ages 22 to 28). This phase has been called “entering the adult world.” During this phase, a young person becomes an adult and builds the entry life structure for early adulthood. Aspects of this phase often include: involvement with work, which may lead to a career choice; intimate relationships with others, which may lead to marriage and children; choosing a home; involvement with social and civic groups; and relationships with family and friends.
Two important features of this phase are a dream and a mentor. During this phase, men often have a dream of their future, which is usually viewed in terms of a career. The vision of becoming a highly successful corporate president or a famous writer spurs them on and energizes their work activities. A man’s success during these apprenticeship years is strongly influenced by finding a mentor. A mentor is older (usually by about 8 to 15 years). The relationship with the mentor is a friendship with adult equality, but the mentor also performs the fatherly tasks of teaching, caring, criticizing, helping, and offering constructive suggestions in both career and personal matters.
Ethical Question 11.1
1. Our dream of our future often becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy. What is your dream of your future?
Age-30 transition (ages 28 to 33). During this phase, men take another look at their lives. They may review whether the commitments made during the previous decade were premature, or they may consider making strong commitments for the first time. Some men move fairly effortlessly through this transition. Others experience crises in which they decide their present life structures are intolerable, yet they have grave difficulty in formulating better ones. Marriage conflicts may erupt during this phase, and divorce is common. Work responsibilities may shift as the man is promoted, changes jobs, or settles into his job after a period of uncertainty. Some men seek counseling to help clarify their goals.
Culminating life structure for early adulthood (ages 33 to 40). This phase is ushered in by a period of “settling down.” The person makes a concerted effort to realize youthful dreams. The apprenticeship is over. During this phase, men make deeper commitments to family, work, and other important aspects of their lives. They set specific goals for themselves (such as a certain level of income and moving into their own house) with a set timetable. They work at finding a niche in society by anchoring their lives in terms of career, family, and community involvement. They also work on advancing themselves to build a better life, become more creative, improve their skills, and so on. In the middle to late 30s, toward the end of the settling-down period, comes a phase called “becoming one’s own man” (BOOM). During BOOM, a man often becomes independent of his mentor and may be at odds with his wife, boss, children, friends, lover, or coworkers. During this phase, a man chafes under the authority of those who have power and influence over him, and seeks to break away and speak with his own voice. However, he also fears a loss of respect from significant others during this period.
Midlife transition (ages 40 to 45). This transition is focused on completing the work of early adulthood while learning the ropes of middle adulthood. Similar to all other transitional periods, this transition is both an ending and a beginning. During this period, men (now more acutely aware of their mortality) question nearly every aspect of their lives. Many men find this as a time of moderate or severe crisis. People in this stage undergo a midlife reappraisal that often involves emotional turmoil. Previous values are reviewed. Such a review is often healthy; through examining the choices that they made early in life, they have the opportunity to focus on aspects of themselves that may have been neglected. Those who successfully negotiate this phase come to terms with the dreams of their youth and emerge with a more realistic view of themselves. Many men at this stage experience a midlife crisis (described in Chapter 10).
A man at midlife feels older than the younger generation, but is not yet ready to call himself middle-aged. A person at this age needs to integrate his need for separateness and his need for attachment to others. People at this age need to become “more compassionate, more reflective and judicious, less tyrannized by inner conflicts and external demands, and more genuinely loving of themselves and others” (Levinson, 1986, p. 5). People who fail in this task lead lives that become increasingly stagnant and trivial.
Entry life structure for middle adulthood (ages 45 to 50). During this transition, a man in his mid-40s begins a life structure that may involve new choices: perhaps a new wife or a different way of relating to his wife, or perhaps a new career or a restructuring of his present work. The most successful people often find middle age to be the most gratifying and creative time of life as they use opportunities that arise to allow new facets of their personalities to flower. Those who are unsuccessful in resolving the tasks of midlife lead a constricted life, or they keep busy in an organized but unfulfilling lifestyle.
Age-50 transition (ages 50 to 55). This transition is likely to be an especially difficult time for men whose midlife transition has been relatively smooth. Most men experience a moderate crisis at this time. It is another time at which men review where they have come from, and make plans for where they are heading.
Culminating life structure for middle adulthood (ages 55 to 60). This phase is generally a stable transition in which men finish the framework of their life structure for middle adulthood. During this phase, those who are able to rejuvenate themselves enrich their lives and generally find the 50s a time period of great fulfillment.
Late adult transition (ages 60 to 65). This is a major transitional turning point, as it is a time for ending middle age and preparing for late adulthood.
Note that Levinson primarily studied middle-aged men. As a result, he has only limited and speculative information of the transitions and adjustments that occur in late adulthood. However, an important finding of Levinson is that life is a series of passages—from periods of stability to periods of instability. This cycle continues throughout life.
Various researchers have applied Levinson’s theories to women’s lives, as discussed in Spotlight 11.1.
Spotlight on Diversity 11.1
Application of Levinson’s Theories to Women: An Evaluation
Papalia and Olds (1992) reviewed four unpublished dissertations describing studies that used female subjects and Levinson’s research design. The four investigators interviewed a total of 39 women from 28 to 53 years old. The women were primarily white, although eight were African American. Most respondents were employed, but some were not. The studies included a mix of married and unmarried respondents, with and without children.
These studies tend, in general, to support the idea that women undergo similar kinds of age-linked changes as men, but they also found some important differences.
The Mentor: Women were substantially less likely to have a mentor. Many of the women identified role models during their 20s, but only four had a true mentor relationship. If these women’s patterns are typical, many women may be hampered in their careers by lack of a mentor.
The Love Relationship: Levinson found that men want a “special woman” who helps them pursue their dreams. In the studies on women, all 39 respondents sought a “special man,” but these women mostly saw themselves as supporting their special man’s dreams, rather than wanting a special man who would support them in achieving their goals.
The Dream: Most respondents had dreams (goals they wanted to achieve in life). But their dreams were vaguer, more complex, more tentative and temporary, and less career-oriented than those of men. Most women’s dreams were split between achievement and relationships. Women were more likely to define themselves in relation to others—husbands, children, parents, or colleagues. Whereas men tend to “find themselves” by separating from their families of origin and pursuing their own interests, women tend to develop their identity through the responsibilities and attachments of relationships.
Whereas men dream of achievements in occupations or careers, women dream of a mix of family and career interests. Although many female respondents sought to help their “special man” achieve his goals, others began at about age 30 making greater demands on their husbands to accommodate their interests and goals in regard to career, marriage, and raising children.
Levinson and Levinson (1996) completed a study in which 45 women were intensively interviewed. The women ranged in age from 35 to 45 years. The study was designed to focus on three subgroups:
· (1)
15 homemakers drawn randomly from the city directory of New Haven, Connecticut,
· (2)
15 women who had careers in major corporate financial organizations in New York City, and
· (3)
15 female faculty members in colleges and universities.
The latter two groups were struggling to combine career and family.
A major finding of the study was that women, similar to men, go through a predictable, age-linked series of developmental stages, moving from one period to the next via transitions that are often painful and turbulent. Levinson concludes that his conception of life cycle, eras, and periods in life structure development provides a framework for the study of both men and women.
Yet Levinson found a number of profound differences between how men and women develop throughout their lives. Many of these differences relate to the phenomenon he calls gender splitting—the rigid division between male and female. Gender splitting includes such dimensions as differences in traditional gender-role expectations between men and women, the splitting between the female homemaker and the male provisioner, and the splitting of the personal qualities identified as “feminine” and “masculine.” (Levinson notes that the evolution of society in the past few centuries has been gradually reducing the splitting.)
The women in the homemaker sample sought, at a young age, to lead predominantly traditional, family-centered lives. They entered marriage with the belief that their primary role was to continue the traditional family; the wife’s role was to be the homemaker, have children, and do most of the domestic tasks. They viewed the husband’s role as occupying the dominant family position and being the provisioner—devoting himself to outside work and bringing back the resources needed to sustain the family. These women were in for a shock. By midlife, only 1 homemaker of the 15 was not working outside the home. Fifty percent were legally divorced, and most of the rest were psychologically divorced. Most of these women were currently in the workforce, and several of those who had legally divorced were in a second marriage. At midlife, motherhood was becoming a less central component of their life structure. Many of these women, as they developed in their 30s and 40s, became more independent and sought to exist on more equal terms with men. Thus, young women who actively sought at a young age to have a traditional, family-centered life eventually sought to establish a more modern lifestyle, which Levinson called the “anti-traditional figure.” Levinson concludes that a traditional marriage is no longer viable in our culture.
The women who had careers, in contrast, attempted even at a young age to modify the traditional pattern. A recurrent theme in their lives was the intense conflict between the “traditional homemaker figure” and the “internal anti-traditional figure.” These women struggled with being everything to everyone and seeking to have everything. They spoke of excitement and joy and playfulness and challenge. But they were constantly plagued by exhaustion, worries about their children, and exasperation with their spouses who failed to do their fair share in helping with the household responsibilities and raising the children.
The study reveals considerable hardships for both the homemakers and the “career women”—anguish, stressful and traumatic experiences, marital difficulties, problems in raising their children, problems at work, and difficulties in personal relationships. The difficulties and anguish reported by these female subjects appear more pronounced than do those reported by Levinson in his earlier study of men.
11-4Summarize Maslow’s Theory on Hierarchy of Needs
11-4aMaslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Abraham Maslow (1954, 1968, 1971) viewed humans as having tremendous potential for personal development. He believed it was human nature for people to seek to know more about themselves and to strive to develop their capacities to the fullest. He viewed human nature as basically good and saw the striving for self-actualization as a positive process because it leads people to identify their abilities, to strive to develop them, to feel good as they become themselves, and to be beneficial to society. Yet he believed that very few people fully attain a state of self-actualization. Rather, Maslow saw most people as being in a constant state of striving to satisfy their needs.
Maslow identified a hierarchy of needs that motivate human behavior. “When people fulfill the most elemental needs, they strive to meet those on the next level, and so forth, until the highest order of needs is reached.” (Maslow, 1971, p. 27) In ascending order, these needs are
1. Physiological: Food, water, oxygen, rest, and so on.
2. Safety: Security, stability, and freedom from fear, anxiety, threats, and chaos. A social structure of laws and limits assists in meeting these needs.
3. Belongingness and love: Intimacy and affection provided by friends, family, and lover.
4. Self-esteem: Self-respect, respect of others, achievement, attention, and appreciation.
5. Self-actualization: The sense that one is fulfilling one’s potential and is doing what one is suited for and capable of. This need results in efforts to create and to learn. A fully developed, self-actualized person displays high levels of all of the following characteristics: accepts self, others, and nature; seeks justice, truth, order, unity, and beauty; has problem-solving abilities; is self-directed; has freshness of appreciation; has a richness of emotional responses; has satisfying and changing relationships with other people; is creative; and has a high sense of moral values.
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs is illustrated in Figure 11.1. The needs at each level must be fairly well satisfied before the needs at the next level become important. Thus, physiological needs must be fairly well satisfied before safety needs become important, and so on. As applied to social work practice, Maslow’s theory indicates that social workers must first help clients meet basic needs (e.g., physiological needs). Once clients’ basic needs are met, higher-level needs can be dealt with.
Figure 11.1Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Maslow did not offer an age-stage approach to development. Striving for self-actualization is seen as a universal process that can be observed at nearly all ages. However, it is likely that there is some progression among age groups. Infants probably have a strong emphasis on physiological needs. As a person gradually grows older, safety needs are emphasized, and then belongingness and love needs, and so on. Because middle-aged adults have had a variety of learning experiences and tend to be at the peak of their earning potential, they tend to have a greater opportunity to focus on meeting self-actualization needs. However, such crises as unemployment, prolonged illness, and broken relationships can switch the emphasis to a lower level of need.
11-5Describe Emotional Intelligence and Social Intelligence
11-5aEmotional Intelligence
Psychologists Peter Salovey and John Mayer coined the term emotional intelligence (EI) in 1990 (Papalia et al., 2012). It refers to the ability to recognize and deal with one’s own feelings as well as the feelings of others. Daniel Goleman (1995) popularized the EI concept and expanded it to include such qualities as empathy, motivation, social competence, optimism, and conscientiousness.
McClelland had done some earlier work on factors related to emotional intelligence (Papalia et al., 2012). In the 1960s, the U.S. State Department concluded that a test of general knowledge was a poor predictor of how well those applying to be foreign service officers would perform. In addition, the test tended to screen out women and people of color. McClelland devised a selection process that had nothing to do with general knowledge. He found that the best foreign service officers had positive expectations of others, were perceptive of the needs of others, and were skillful in forming social networks. His selection process emphasized these characteristics, and led to the appointment of effective foreign service officers. It also ended the discrimination against women and people of color.
Goleman (1995) developed an EI test. Studying nearly 500 corporations, Goleman found that those who rose to the top of the corporate ladder tended to score highest on EI. Goleman (1998, 2001) found the following competencies to be most closely associated with effective work performance:
· Self-awareness (accurate self-assessment, emotional self-awareness, and self-confidence)
· Self-management (trustworthiness, achievement drive, initiative, adaptability, and self-control)
· Social awareness (empathy, organizational awareness, and service orientation)
· Relationship management (exerting influence, conflict management, leadership, communication, building bonds, teamwork and collaboration, being a catalyst for change, and developing others)
Goleman (1998) found that excelling in at least one competency in each of these four areas appears to be a key to success in almost any job.
According to Maslow, we have a basic need to belong and a basic need to be loved.
KidStock/Blend Images/Alamy Stock Photo
Emotional intelligence is not the opposite of cognitive intelligence. Some very bright people score high in EI, whereas others score lower. Some less-than-average scorers on IQ tests score high on EI, whereas others score lower.
Emotional intelligence is not easy to measure.
There are many emotions. How do we rate someone who can handle fear, but not guilt? The usefulness of a certain emotion may also depend on the circumstances; for example, it may not be functional for a person to be happy at a funeral when everyone else is sad.
Daniel Goleman (2006) has drawn on social neuroscience research to propose that social intelligence is made up of social awareness (including social cognition, empathy, attunement, and empathic accuracy) and social facility (including self-presentation, influence, concern, and synchrony).
There are various types of intelligence, including intellectual competencies, emotional intelligence, and social intelligence. Counseling/psychotherapy often involves helping people to modify their patterns of social intelligence, particularly those that cause clients to have problems in their interpersonal relationships.
Some tests have been developed to measure SI (Goleman, 2006). Like IQ tests, SI tests are usually based on a 100-point scale in which 100 is the average score. Most people score between 85 and 115. Scores of 140 are considered to be very high. People with SI scores below 80 may have an autism spectrum disorder. These people are apt to have trouble making friends, and with communication. They might need social skill training. People with SI scores over 120 are considered to be very socially skilled and well adjusted, and probably will excel in jobs that involve direct contact and communication with people.
11-5bSocial Intelligence
Closely related to emotional intelligence is social intelligence. Social Intelligence (SI) has been defined in a variety of ways.
According to the original definition of Edward Thorndike (1920, p. 228), social intelligence is “the ability to understand and manage men and women, boys and girls, to act wisely in human relations.” According to this definition, it is equivalent to interpersonal intelligence.
Some authors have restricted the definition of SI to deal only with knowledge of social situations. With this perspective, SI is synonymous with social cognition or social marketing intelligence.
A common, contemporary definition of SI is the capacity to effectively negotiate complex social relationships and environments. People with high SIs are considered socially skilled, and generally work well in jobs that involve direct contact and communication with other people. People with low SI are best suited to work in positions with low customer contact because they are apt not to have the required interpersonal communication and social skills for success with customers/clients.
11-6Describe Nonverbal Communication Cues
11-6aMezzo-System Interactions: Nonverbal Communication
In seeking to assess human behavior, it is also important to attend to nonverbal communication. Sigmund Freud (quoted in Knapp & Hall, 1992) noted, “He that has eyes to see and ears to hear may convince himself that no mortal can keep a secret. If his lips are silent, he chatters with his fingertips; betrayal oozes out of him at every pore” (p. 391).
It is impossible not to communicate. No matter what we do, we transmit information about ourselves. Even an expressionless face communicates messages. As you are reading this, stop for a minute and analyze what nonverbal messages you would be sending if someone were observing you. Are your eyes wide open or half closed? Is your posture relaxed or tense? What are your facial expressions communicating? Are you occasionally gesturing? Do you occasionally roll your eyes? What would an observer deduce from these nonverbal cues about what you are feeling at the moment?
At times, nonverbal cues (such as sweating, stammering, blushing, and frowning) convey information about feelings that we desire to hide. By developing skill in reading nonverbal communication, we can be more aware of what others are feeling and better able to interact effectively. Because feelings stem from thoughts, nonverbal cues such as blushing also transmit information about what people are thinking.
11-6bThe Functions of Nonverbal Communication
Nonverbal communication interacts with verbal communication. Nonverbal communication has the following functions in relation to verbal communication:
1. Nonverbal messages may repeat what is said verbally. A husband may say he is really looking forward to becoming a father and repeat this happy anticipation with glowing facial expressions.
2. Nonverbal messages may substitute for verbal ones. If a close friend has just failed an important exam, you can get a fairly good idea what he or she is thinking and feeling by looking at your friend’s facial expressions.
3. Nonverbal messages may accent verbal messages. If someone you are dating says he or she is angry and upset with something you did, the depth of these feelings may be emphasized by pounding a fist and pointing an accusing finger.
4. Nonverbal messages may serve to regulate verbal behavior. Looking away from someone who is talking to you is a way of sending a message that you are not interested in talking.
5. Nonverbal messages may contradict verbal messages. An example of such a double message is someone with a red face, bulging veins, and a frown on the face, yelling, “Me—angry? Hell no, what makes you think I’m upset?” When nonverbal messages contradict verbal messages, the nonverbal messages are often more accurate. When receivers perceive a contradiction between nonverbal and verbal messages, they usually believe the nonverbal (Adler & Towne, 1981, p. 257).
Although nonverbal messages can be revealing, they can also be unintentionally misleading. Think of the times when people have misinterpreted your nonverbal messages. Perhaps you tend to say little when you first wake up, and others have interpreted this as meaning that you are preoccupied with a personal concern. Perhaps you have been quiet on a date because you are tired or because you’re thinking about something that has recently happened. Has your date at times misinterpreted such quietness to mean you are bored or unhappy with the relationship? When you have been thinking deeply about a subject, have you had an expression on your face that others have interpreted as a frown? Nonverbal behavior is often difficult to interpret. A frown, for example, may represent a variety of feelings: being tired or angry; feeling rejected, confused, unhappy, irritated, disgusted, or bored; or simply being lost in thought. Nonverbal messages should not be interpreted as facts, but as clues that need to be checked out verbally to determine what the sender is thinking and feeling.
The remainder of this section will examine some examples of how we communicate nonverbally. Many of the examples are taken from white, middle-class American nonverbal communication. Nonverbal communication is strongly culture-based. In other words, the identical nonverbal behavior may be interpreted differently depending on the cultural/ethnic/racial background of the observer. For example, a comfortable interpersonal distance may be six inches in some cultures and six feet in others. Awareness of these differences is especially critical when communicating with clients of different cultural/ethnic/racial backgrounds. Such awareness is the only thing that makes accurate understanding possible. To illustrate, direct eye contact by a social worker is usually considered desirable by white clients but is considered rude and intimidating by many Native Americans. Kissing between adult males is usually interpreted as indicating a gay relationship in our culture, but such kissing is a greeting custom in some European cultures. Adult males who wear skirts in our culture are viewed as weird, but kilts (knee-length pleated skirts) are commonly worn by men in Scotland and by Scottish regiments in the British army. (An example of the importance of nonverbal communication is presented in Highlight 11.2.)
Highlight 11.2
Eye-Accessing Cues
Neuro-linguistic programming (NLP) focuses on better understanding verbal and nonverbal communication (Lankton, 1980). Everyone has, at most, five sensory systems through which we connect with physical reality: the eyes (visual), ears (auditory), skin (kinesthetic), nose (smell), and tongue (taste). For each situation, your memories involved only one or two senses. For example, what do you remember most about the last grocery store that you were in? Perhaps you recalled an image of fresh fruits and vegetables, or heard the hustle and bustle of the activity, or smelled the fresh flowers.
Whenever we interact with external world, we do so through sensory representations. Your sensory connection with a grocery store is apt to be quite different from your friend’s. The same applies for everyone. Your most enjoyable sexual experience may be a visual one; your partner’s may be auditory or kinesthetic.
We operate out of our sensory representations of the world, and not in “reality” itself. Our sensory representations provide us with a map of the territory. But the map is not the territory.
According to NLP, to assess another’s actions accurately, it is important to identify the sensory representational system used by that person. If we are able to identify the Other’s representational system and “join with” that system in our interactions with the person, communication is apt to flow much more smoothly and rapport is enhanced. Conversely, if two people are unable to “join” together with the same representational system, communication may be tangential, and rapport will be adversely affected. The implications of this point are immense. Successful salespersons, educators, and therapists identify and “join” with the representational systems of the people they seek to influence. Once a person (customer, student, or client) has joined with the influencer, the influencer is able to lead the person in the direction she or he chooses. To a large extent the process of therapy, education, and sales can be defined as involving two steps:
· (1)
the influencer’s finding a way to join with the person to be influenced, and
· (2)
the influencer then leading the person in a new (and, one hopes, positive) direction.
In our culture, people primarily use the visual, auditory, and kinesthetic (touch) systems. (A few other cultures place greater emphasis on smell and taste.) Unless the listener is aware of the sensory representational system the speaker is using, the listener may misinterpret what the speaker is intending. For example, when a client says “I understand you,” the intended message depends on the representational system he or she is in:
· Visual: “That looks really good to me.”
· Auditory: “I hear you clearly.”
· Kinesthetic: “What you are saying feels right to me.”
In the course of growing up, people learn to favor particular representational systems for particular events. We are not only visual or auditory or kinesthetic. The sense in use depends on the situation, the context. It appears, though, that we tend to have a primary mode, in that we use more of one mode.
Eye-accessing cues are a fairly reliable way to determine which representational system is dominant at a given time. The following chart shows the eye-accessing cues for the three representational systems used in our culture: visual, auditory, and kinesthetic.
A simple example illustrates the importance of recognizing eye-accessing cues, in our society; when parents scold their children, they often become additionally angry when the children look down. Such parents erroneously assume their children are ignoring what they are saying. They may even yell, “Look at me when I’m talking to you!” In actuality, the eyes being down signals that the children feel bad about their misbehavior.
11-6cPosture
In picking up nonverbal cues from posture, one needs to note the overall posture of a person and the changes in posture. We tend to take relaxed postures in nonthreatening situations and to tighten up when under stress. Some people never relax, and their rigid posture shows it.
Watching the degree of tenseness has been found to be a way of detecting status differences. In interactions between a higher-status person and a lower-status person, the higher-status person is usually more relaxed, while the lower-status person is usually more rigid and tense (Knapp & Hall, 2014). For example, note the positions that are usually assumed when a faculty member and a student are conversing in the faculty member’s office.
Teachers and public speakers often watch the posture of listeners to gauge how the presentation is going. If members in the audience are leaning forward in their chairs, it is a sign that the presentation is going over well. The audience slumping in their chairs is a cue that the presentation is beginning to bomb.
11-6dBody Orientation
Body orientation is the extent to which we face toward or away from someone with our head, body, and feet. Facing directly toward someone signals an interest in starting or continuing a conversation; facing away signals a desire to end or avoid conversation. The phrase “turning your back” on someone concisely summarizes the message that is sent when you turn away from someone. Can you remember the last time someone signaled that he or she wanted to end a conversation with you by turning away from you?
11-6eGestures
Most of us are aware that our facial expressions convey our feelings. When we want to hide our true feelings, we concentrate on controlling our facial expressions. We are less aware that our gestures also reveal our feelings, and we put less effort into controlling our gestures when we want to cover up our feelings. As a result, gestures are sometimes better indicators of how we really feel.
People who are nervous tend to fidget. They may bite their fingernails, tap their fingers, rub their eyes or other parts of their body, bend paper clips, or tap a pencil. They may cross and uncross their legs. They may rhythmically swing one leg or move one foot back and forth.
Many gestures provide cues to a person’s thoughts and feelings. Clenched fists, whitened knuckles, and pointing fingers signal anger. When people want to express friendship or attraction, they tend to move closer. Hugs can represent a variety of feelings: physical attraction, good to see you, best wishes in the future, and friendship. Shaking hands is a signal of friendship and a way of saying, “Hello” or “Goodbye.”
Albert Scheflen (1974) notes that a person’s sexual feelings can be signaled through gestures. He describes preening behavior, which is designed to send a message that the sender is attracted to the receiver. Preening behavior includes rearranging one’s clothing, combing or stroking one’s hair, and glancing in a mirror. Scheflen cites a number of invitational preening gestures that are specific to women: exposing or stroking a thigh, protruding the breast, placing a hand on the hip, and exhibiting a wrist or palm. Naturally, these gestures do not always suggest sexual interest; they may occur for a variety of other reasons.
There are also invitational preening gestures for men. As a woman talks, a man may gaze into her eyes intently. As conversation continues, he may lean in farther and farther toward the woman until he starts to close the gap between them. A man may stand with his pelvis thrust forward or sit or stand with legs wide apart. He may also stick his thumbs in his belt hoops, fingers aiming at his pelvic region; or thrust his hands in his pocket, thumbs pointing toward his pelvis. Male preening behaviors may include straightening his jacket or tie, rolling up sleeves or cuffs, or smoothing his hair. He may tend to mimic the woman’s gestures (Renninger, Wade, & Grammar, 2004).
Gestures are also used in relation to verbal messages for a variety of purposes: repeating, substituting, accenting, contradicting, and regulating. Some people literally speak with their hands, arms, and head movements. Many people are unaware of the number of gestures they use, and then (if videotaped) are surprised to view the extent to which they communicate with gestures.
Psychologists Michael Kraus and Dacher Keltner (2009) found that people of higher socioeconomic status are ruder when conversing with others. Their study showed that body language can signal a person’s socioeconomic status. The researchers videotaped pairs of undergraduate students, who were strangers to one another, during one-on-one interviews. The researchers then observed certain gestures that indicate level of interest in the other person during one-minute slices of each conversation. They found that students whose parents were from backgrounds of higher socioeconomic status (SES) engaged in more “impolite” gestures such as doodling, grooming, and fidgeting. Lower-SES students engaged in more “I’m interested” gestures, such as laughter and raising of the eyebrows. Like a peacock’s tail, the seemingly snooty gestures of higher-SES students indicate modern society’s version of “I don’t need you.” Lower-SES individuals cannot afford to brush off others. They have fewer resources, and tend to be more dependent on others.
11-6eGestures
Most of us are aware that our facial expressions convey our feelings. When we want to hide our true feelings, we concentrate on controlling our facial expressions. We are less aware that our gestures also reveal our feelings, and we put less effort into controlling our gestures when we want to cover up our feelings. As a result, gestures are sometimes better indicators of how we really feel.
People who are nervous tend to fidget. They may bite their fingernails, tap their fingers, rub their eyes or other parts of their body, bend paper clips, or tap a pencil. They may cross and uncross their legs. They may rhythmically swing one leg or move one foot back and forth.
Many gestures provide cues to a person’s thoughts and feelings. Clenched fists, whitened knuckles, and pointing fingers signal anger. When people want to express friendship or attraction, they tend to move closer. Hugs can represent a variety of feelings: physical attraction, good to see you, best wishes in the future, and friendship. Shaking hands is a signal of friendship and a way of saying, “Hello” or “Goodbye.”
Albert Scheflen (1974) notes that a person’s sexual feelings can be signaled through gestures. He describes preening behavior, which is designed to send a message that the sender is attracted to the receiver. Preening behavior includes rearranging one’s clothing, combing or stroking one’s hair, and glancing in a mirror. Scheflen cites a number of invitational preening gestures that are specific to women: exposing or stroking a thigh, protruding the breast, placing a hand on the hip, and exhibiting a wrist or palm. Naturally, these gestures do not always suggest sexual interest; they may occur for a variety of other reasons.
There are also invitational preening gestures for men. As a woman talks, a man may gaze into her eyes intently. As conversation continues, he may lean in farther and farther toward the woman until he starts to close the gap between them. A man may stand with his pelvis thrust forward or sit or stand with legs wide apart. He may also stick his thumbs in his belt hoops, fingers aiming at his pelvic region; or thrust his hands in his pocket, thumbs pointing toward his pelvis. Male preening behaviors may include straightening his jacket or tie, rolling up sleeves or cuffs, or smoothing his hair. He may tend to mimic the woman’s gestures (Renninger, Wade, & Grammar, 2004).
Gestures are also used in relation to verbal messages for a variety of purposes: repeating, substituting, accenting, contradicting, and regulating. Some people literally speak with their hands, arms, and head movements. Many people are unaware of the number of gestures they use, and then (if videotaped) are surprised to view the extent to which they communicate with gestures.
11-6fTouching
Rene Spitz (1945) demonstrated that young children need direct physical contact, such as being cuddled, held, and soothed. Without such direct physical contact, the emotional, social, intellectual, and physical development of children will be severely stunted. Spitz observed that in the 19th century high proportions of children died in some orphanages and other child-care institutions. The deaths were not found to be due to poor nutrition or inadequate medical care, but instead to lack of physical contact with parents or nurses. From this research came the practice of nurturing children in institutions—picking them up, holding them close, playing with them, and carrying them around several times a day. With this physical contact, the infant mortality rate in institutions dropped sharply.
Knapp and Hall (2014) describe findings that suggest that eczema, allergies, and certain other medical problems are in part caused by a person’s lack of physical contact with a parent during infancy. Physical stimulation of children facilitates their intellectual, social, emotional, and physical development.
Adults also need physical contact. People need to know that they are loved, recognized, and appreciated. Touching through holding hands, hugging, and pats on the back are ways of communicating warmth and caring. Unfortunately, we have been socialized to refrain from touching, except in sexual contacts.
Touching someone is in fact an excellent way of conveying a variety of messages, depending on the context. A hug at a funeral will connote caring, while a hug when meeting someone connotes “It’s good to see you.” A hug between parent and child conveys “I love you,” whereas a hug on a date may have sexual meanings. Numerous therapists have noted that communication and human relationships would be vastly improved if people reached out and touched others more—with hugs, squeezes of the hand, kisses, and pats on the back. Touch is crucial for the survival and development of children, and touch is just as crucial for adults, to assure them that they are worthwhile and loved.
11-6gClothing
Clothes keep us warm and cover certain areas of our body so we are not arrested for indecency. But clothes have many other functions. Certain uniforms tell us what a person does and who we can receive services from: for example, uniforms of police officers, firefighters, nurses, physicians, and waiters. People intentionally and unintentionally send messages about themselves by what they wear. Clothes give messages about our occupations, personality, interests, sexuality, groups we identify with, social philosophies, religious beliefs, status, values, mood, age, nationality, and personal attitudes. For example, the way an instructor dresses sends messages to the class as to the kind of atmosphere he or she is seeking to create.
Any given item of clothing can convey several different meanings. For example, the tie a man selects to wear may reflect sophistication or nonconformity. In addition, the way the tie is worn (loosened, tightly knotted, thrown over one’s shoulder, soiled and wrinkled) may provide additional information about the wearer.
A problem often encountered by women is that they lack a socially dictated business uniform. Men wear ties and suits in bland, dark colors. Women interested in developing professional and business careers are still seeking clothing that will convey the best impression. Often they must choose between “masculine-looking,” unattractive, bland clothing and clothing that is more colorful and aesthetically attractive but considered unprofessional in some settings.
Clothes also affect our self-image. If we feel we are well dressed in a situation, we are apt to be more self-confident, assertive, and outgoing. If we feel we are poorly dressed in a situation, we are apt to feel more reserved, feel less confident, and be less assertive. When we’re feeling at a low tide, dressing up can make us feel better about ourselves and raise our spirits.
There is a real danger of misreading nonverbal messages. We often stereotype others based on skimpy information, and frequently our interpretations are in error—which may lead to serious adverse consequences. One of the authors remembers a client he interviewed in a correctional facility who for the previous four years had lived in an elegant fashion, traveled all over Europe and North America, and stayed in the finest hotels. He financed this lifestyle by writing bad checks. He stated that whenever he needed money, he would carefully dress in an expensive suit and would have no trouble cashing his bogus checks.
11-6hPersonal Space
Each of us carries around a kind of invisible bubble of personal space wherever we go. The area inside this bubble is perceived as our private territory. The only people we are comfortable in allowing to enter our private territory are those we are emotionally close to. We feel we are being invaded when strangers and people we are not emotionally close to enter our private territory.
Edward Hall (1969) identified four distances or zones that we set in our daily interactions. We use these distances to guide us in setting the type of interactions we want to have with others. The particular zone we choose depends on the context of the conversation, how we feel toward the other person, and what our interpersonal goals are. These zones include the intimate zone, the personal zone, the social zone, and the public zone.
Intimate Zone
The intimate zone begins with skin surface and goes out about 18 inches. We generally let only people we are emotionally very close to enter this boundary, and then mostly in private situations—comforting, conveying caring, making love, and showing love and affection. When we voluntarily let and want someone to enter this zone, it is a sign of trust. We lower our defenses. Think about the dates you have. If the person moves within this zone and sits tight against you, it is a signal that he or she is comfortable with the relationship and may want it to progress further. On the other hand, if the person seeks to maintain a safe distance of two or more feet, the person is still sorting out the relationship or wants a more distant relationship.
When someone moves into this intimate zone without our wanting them to, we feel invaded and threatened. Our posture becomes more upright, and our muscles tense. We may move back and avoid eye contact as a way of signaling we want a more distant relationship. When we are forced to get close to strangers (on crowded buses and elevators), we tend to avoid eye contact and try not to touch others, probably as a way of conveying, “I’m sorry I’m forced to invade your territory. I’ll try not to bother you.”
Personal Zone
The personal zone ranges from about 18 inches to approximately four feet. This is the distance at which couples stand in public. Interestingly, if someone of the opposite sex at a party stands this close to someone we are dating or are married to, we tend to become suspicious of that person’s intentions. If we see our spouse or date move this close to someone of the opposite sex at a party, we may become suspicious and sometimes jealous.
The far range of the personal zone (from about two-and-a-half to four feet) is the distance at which we convey that we are seeking to keep the other person at arm’s length. It is the distance just beyond the other person’s reach. Interactions at this distance may still be reasonably close, but they are much less personal than the ones that occur at a closer distance. Sometimes in communication at arm’s length people are testing whether they want the relationship to become emotionally closer.
When two people are romantically involved, they love to be as close as possible to each other.
Social Zone
The social zone ranges from about 4 feet to about 12 feet. Business communications are frequently exchanged in this zone. The closer part of this zone (from four to about seven feet) is the distance at which people who work together usually converse, and it is the distance at which salespeople and customers usually interact.
The 7- to 12-foot range is the distance for more impersonal and formal situations. For example, this is the distance at which our boss talks to us from behind his or her desk. If we were to pull our chair around to the boss’s side of the desk in order to sit closer, a different kind of relationship would be signaled. Furniture arrangement in an office also conveys signals about the type of relationship the officeholder wants to have. For example, an office in which there is a desk between the officeholder and the customer/client/student suggests that a formal and impersonal interaction is being sought. An office in which a desk is not used as a barrier suggests that a warmer, less formal interaction is allowed.
Public Zone
The public zone runs outward from 12 feet. Teachers and public speakers often use a distance of 12 to 18 feet from their audience. In the farther distances of public space (beyond 25 feet), two-way communication is difficult. Any speaker who voluntarily chooses to have considerable distance from the audience is not interested in having a dialogue.
11-6iTerritoriality
Territoriality is behavior characterized by identification with an area in such a way as to indicate ownership and defense of this territory against those who may invade it (Knapp & Hall, 2014). Many animals will strike back against much larger organisms if they feel their territory is being invaded.
Territoriality also exists in humans. There are even things we feel we own that we really do not own. Students tend in each class to select a certain seat to sit in. If someone else should happen to sit in your chosen seat, do you feel your territory is being invaded?
What we acquire as property is a strong indicator of our interests and values. The things we acquire are often topics of conversation—cars, homes, leisure-time equipment, plants, clothes. These material things also communicate messages about our status. Wealthy people acquire more property. Interestingly, we generally grant more personal space and greater privacy to people of higher status. For example, we will knock at the boss’s office and wait for an invitation to walk in before entering. With people of a status similar to ours or of a lower status, we frequently walk right in.
11-6jFacial Expressions
For most people, the face and eyes are the primary sources of nonverbal communication. Facial expressions often mirror our thoughts and feelings. Yet facial expressions are a complex source of information for several reasons. First, they can change rapidly. Slow-motion films have shown that a fleeting expression can come and go in as short a time as a fifth of a second (Knapp & Hall, 2014). In addition, researchers have found that there are at least eight distinguishable positions of the eyes and lids, at least eight positions for the eyebrows and forehead, and at least 10 for the lower face (Knapp & Hall, 2014). As a result, we have several hundred different possible expressions, and compiling a directory of them and their corresponding emotions is almost impossible.
Ekman and Friesen (1975) identified six basic emotions that facial expressions reflect: fear, surprise, anger, happiness, disgust, and sadness. These expressions appear to be recognizable in all cultures. People seeing photos of these expressions are quite accurate in identifying these emotions. Therefore, although facial expressions are complex, these six emotions can fairly accurately be identified (Knapp & Hall, 2010).
A word of caution should be noted about reading facial expressions. Because people are generally aware that their facial expressions reflect what they are feeling and thinking, they may seek to mask their facial expressions for a variety of reasons. For example, a person who is angry, but doesn’t want others to see the anger, may seek to hide this feeling by smiling. Therefore, in reading facial expressions we should be aware that the sender may be seeking to conceal his or her real thoughts and feelings.
The eyes are also great communicators. When we want to end or avoid a conversation, we look away from the other person’s eyes. When we want to start a conversation, we often seek out the other’s eyes. We may wait until the receiver looks at us as a signal to begin. The eyes also communicate dominance and submission. When a high-status person and a low-status person are looking at each other, the low-status person tends to look away first. Downcast eyes signal submission or giving in. (Downcast eyes may also signal sadness, boredom, or fatigue.)
Good salespeople are aware that eyes are a sign of involvement. When they know they have caught our eye, they begin their pitch and seek to maintain eye contact. They know there are social norms in our society, such as the courtesy of hearing what a person has to say once we allow the person to begin speaking. These social norms trap us into hearing the sales pitch once eye contact has been made. Good salespeople watch eyes in a store in another way. They observe what items we are looking at and then seek to emphasize those items in their sales pitch.
Eye expressions suggest a wide range of human emotions. Wide-open eyes suggest wonder, terror, frankness, or naivete. Raised upper eyelids may mean displeasure. A constant stare connotes coldness. Eyes rolled upward suggest another’s behavior is unusual or weird.
When we become emotionally aroused or interested in something, the pupils of our eyes dilate. Some counselors are so skilled in reading pupil dilation that they can tell when they touch on a subject that a client is sensitive about.
Voice
The tone of one’s voice often has more influence than do the actual words spoken. The same word or phrase may have many meanings. Therefore, the way we say the word is the meaning we give to the word. For example, Knapp and Hall (2010, p. 367) show how the meaning of the following sentence is changed by the word that is emphasized.
1. He’s giving this money to Herbie. (He is the one giving the money, nobody else.)
2. He’s giving this money to Herbie. (He is giving, not lending the money.)
3. He’s giving this money to Herbie. (The money being exchanged is not from another fund or source; it is this money.)
4. He’s giving this money to Herbie. (Money is the unit of exchange, not a check.)
5. He’s giving this money to Herbie. (The recipient is Herbie, not Eric or Bill or Rod.)
When we ask a question, we usually raise our voice at the end of the sentence. When we make a declarative statement, we usually lower our voice at the end of the sentence. Sometimes we intentionally manipulate our voice to contradict the verbal message.
In addition to emphasizing certain words in a sentence, one’s voice can communicate in many other ways. These ways include length of pauses, tone, pitch, speed, volume, and disfluencies (such as stammering or saying, “uh,” “um,” and “er”). All of these factors together have been called paralanguage. Paralanguage deals with how something is said and not with what is said (Knapp & Hall, 2014).
Paralanguage can communicate the exact opposite of what the verbal message is. You might practice through changing your voice how you would seek to convey literally, and then sarcastically, messages such as
· “I really like you.”
· “I’m having a perfectly wonderful time.”
· “You’re really terrific.”
When paralanguage and the verbal message are contradictory, the former will carry more meaning. When there is a contradiction between words and the way something is said, subjects usually interpret the message in terms of the way it is said (Knapp & Hall, 2014).
An excellent way to learn more about the way you are using paralanguage is to videotape one of your conversations or speeches and then watch the replay. Such a process will also give you valuable feedback about your other forms of nonverbal communication.
11-6kPhysical Appearance
Although it is common to hear people say that only inner beauty really counts, research shows that outer beauty (physical attractiveness) plays an influential role in a broad range of interpersonal interactions. Male college professors tend to give higher grades to females who are physically attractive than to those who are less attractive. In one study, attractive females were more effective in modifying the attitudes of male students on national issues than were less attractive females. Attractive persons, regardless of sex, are rated high on credibility, which greatly increases their ultimate persuasiveness in a variety of areas, including sales, public speaking, and counseling (Knapp & Hall, 2014). Conversely, unattractive defendants are more likely to be judged guilty in courtrooms and more likely to receive longer sentences (Knapp & Hall, 2014). The evidence is clear that initially we respond much more favorably to those perceived as physically attractive than to those seen as less attractive. Attractiveness serves to open doors and create greater opportunities.
Physically attractive people have been found to outstrip less attractive people on a wide range of socially desirable evaluations, including personality, popularity, success, sociability, persuasiveness, sexuality, and often happiness (Knapp & Hall, 2014). For example, attractive women are more apt to be helped and less likely to be the objects of aggressive (nonsexual) acts.
Less attractive people are at a disadvantage from early childhood on. Teachers, for example, interact less (and less positively) with unattractive children. Physical attractiveness is also a crucial factor in determining who we decide to date and who we decide to marry. In many situations, practically everyone prefers the most attractive date regardless of her or his own attractiveness and regardless of being rejected by the most attractive date (Knapp & Hall, 2014).
Ethical Question 11.2
1. Do you sometimes discriminate against people who are less attractive? For example, do you seek to date only people who are physically attractive?
Unattractive men who are seen with attractive women are judged higher in a number of areas than are attractive men who are seen with attractive partners (Bar-Tal & Saxe, 1976). They are judged as making more money, as being more successful in their occupation, and as being more intelligent. Apparently, the evaluators reason that unattractive males must have to offset this imbalance by succeeding in other areas to be able to obtain dates with attractive women.
The shape of one’s body suggests certain stereotypes that may or may not be accurate. People who are overweight are judged to be older, more old-fashioned, less strong physically, more talkative, less good-looking, more agreeable and good-natured, more trusting of others, more dependent on others, and more warmhearted and sympathetic. People who are muscular are rated as being stronger, better looking, younger, more adventurous, more self-reliant, more mature in behavior, and more masculine.
People with a thin physique are rated as younger, more suspicious of others, more tense and nervous, less masculine, more pessimistic, quieter, more stubborn, and more inclined to be difficult. Both overweight people and very thin people have been found to be discriminated against when seeking to obtain jobs, buy life insurance, adopt children, and be accepted into college. Being tall is a strong advantage in the business world for men but not for women. Shorter men are shortchanged on salaries and job opportunities (Knapp & Hall, 2014).
We have considerable capacity to improve our physical appearance. Eating well, exercising, learning to manage stress, learning to be assertive, getting adequate sleep, improving grooming habits, and improving choice of clothes will substantially improve physical appearance. Improving physical appearance will open more doors and create more opportunities.
11-6lThe Environment
Most of us have been in immaculate homes that have “un-living rooms” with plastic furniture coverings, lampshade covers, and spotless bare tables that send off-putting nonverbal messages: Do not get me dirty, do not touch, do not put your feet up. In such homes, we are not able to relax; their owners wonder why guests don’t relax and have a good time. They are unaware that the environment is communicating messages that lead guests to feel uncomfortable.
The attractiveness of a room shapes the kind of communication that takes place and also influences the happiness and energy of people working in it. When people are in an unattractive room, they tend to become tired and bored and take longer to complete assigned work than when in an attractive room. When people are in a pleasant room, they display a greater desire to work, and they communicate many more feelings of comfort, importance, and enjoyment. Workers do a better job and generally feel better in an attractive environment (Knapp & Hall, 2014).
The color of rooms apparently affects mood and productivity. In one study, children who were given an IQ test scored about 12 points higher in rooms they described as beautiful than they did in rooms they described as having ugly colors (Knapp & Hall, 2014). The beautiful rooms appeared to stimulate alertness and creativity. Friendly words and smiles increased in the beautiful rooms, and irritability and hostility decreased. The most arousing colors are, in order, red, orange, yellow, violet, blue, and green. The pastel colors of pink, baby blue, and peach are thought to have a calming effect. Some prison and jail administrators are now painting cells in pastel colors, hoping that it will have a calming and relaxing effect on inmates.
Businesses have found that they can control the rate of customer turnover through environmental design. Dim lighting, comfortable seats, and subdued noise levels will encourage customers to talk more and spend more time in a bar or restaurant (Knapp & Hall, 2014). If the goal is to run a high-volume business (as in a fast-food place), businesses can encourage customer turnover with bright lights, uncomfortable seats, and high noise levels (for example, by having poor soundproofing). Chairs can be constructed to be comfortable, or they can be made uncomfortable by putting pressure on the sitter’s back. Airports seek to get travelers into the restaurants and bars where they will spend money by having comfortable chairs, tables where people can converse, and dim lighting. They discourage travelers from sitting in waiting areas by using bright lighting and by having uncomfortable chairs bolted shoulder to shoulder in rows facing outward, which makes conversation and relaxation more difficult.
Casino owners in Las Vegas build their facilities without windows or clocks so that customers will be less aware of how long they have been gambling. The aim is to keep people gambling as long as possible. Without windows, some customers are unaware that they are gambling into the next day.
The shape and design of buildings affect interaction patterns in many ways. In apartment buildings, people who live near stairways and mailboxes have more contact with neighbors than do those who live in less heavily traveled parts of the building. Access to neighbors increases communication. Fences, rows of trees, and long driveways increase privacy.
As indicated earlier, types and placement of furniture in offices convey messages about whether the officeholder wants informal, relaxed communication or formal, to-the-point communication. A round table, for example, suggests the officeholder is seeking to have the communication seen as egalitarian, whereas a rectangular table suggests the communication should recognize status and power differentials. With a rectangular table, the high-status people generally sit at one end of the table. If the meeting is between parties of equal strength, one contingent tends to sit on one side, and the other on the other side, rather than intermingling the members. A classroom in which the chairs are in a circle suggests the instructor wants to create an informal discussion atmosphere. A classroom with the chairs in rows suggests the instructor wants to create a formal, lecture-type atmosphere.
11-7Summarize Glasser’s Choice Theory of Human Behavior
11-7aChoice Theory
William Glasser (1998) developed a choice theory explanation of human behavior. A major thrust of choice theory is that we carry around pictures in our heads, both of what reality is like and of how we would like it to be. Glasser (1984, p. 32) asserts, “All our behavior is our constant attempt to reduce the difference between what we want (the pictures in our heads) and what we have (the way we see situations in the world).”
Some examples will illustrate this idea. Each of us has a detailed idea of the type of person we would like to date; when we find someone who closely matches our idea, we seek to form a relationship. Each of us carries around a picture album of our favorite foods; when we’re hungry, we select an item and go about obtaining that food.
How do we develop the pictures/albums/ideas that we believe will satisfy our needs? According to Glasser, we begin to create them at an early age (perhaps even before birth) and we spend our whole lives enlarging them. Essentially, whenever what we do gets us something that satisfies a need, we store the picture of it in our personal albums. Glasser (1984) gives an example of this process by describing how a hungry child added chocolate chip cookies to his picture album:
Suppose you had a grandson and your daughter left you in charge while he was taking a nap She said she would be right back, because he would be ravenous when he awoke and she knew you had no idea what to feed an eleven-month-old child. She was right. As soon as she left, he awoke screaming his head off, obviously starved. You tried a bottle, but he rejected it—he had something more substantial in mind. But what? Being unused to a howling baby, and desperate, you tried a chocolate chip cookie and it worked wonders. At first, he did not seem to know what it was, but he was a quick learner. He quickly polished off three cookies. [Your daughter] returned and almost polished you off for being so stupid as to give a baby chocolate. “Now,” she said, “he will be yelling all day for those cookies.” She was right. If he is like most of us, he will probably have chocolate on his mind for the rest of his life. (p. 19)
When this child learned how satisfying chocolate chip cookies are, he placed the picture of these cookies in his personal picture album.
By pictures, Glasser means perceptions from our five senses of sight, hearing, touch, smell, and taste. The pictures in our albums do not have to be rational. Anorexics picture themselves as too fat and starve themselves to come closer to their irrational picture of thinness. Rapists have pictures of satisfying their power needs and perhaps sexual needs through sexual assault. To change a picture, we must replace it with one that will at least reasonably satisfy the need in question. People who are unable to replace a picture may endure a lifetime of misery. Some battered women, for example, endure brutal beatings and humiliations in marriage because they cannot picture themselves as worthy of a loving relationship.
Glasser notes that whenever the picture we see and the one we want to see differ, a signal generated by this difference leads us to behave in a way that will obtain the picture we want. We examine our behavior and select one or more desired pictures that we believe will help us reduce this difference. These behaviors include not only straightforward problem-solving efforts but also manipulative strategies such as anger, pouting, and guilt. People who act irresponsibly or ineffectually have either failed to select responsible behaviors from their repertoires or have not yet learned responsible courses of action.
Glasser believes we are driven by five basic, innate needs. As soon as one need is satisfied, another need (or perhaps two or more acting together) pushes for satisfaction. Our first need is survival. This includes such vital functions as breathing, digesting food, sweating, regulating blood pressure, and meeting the demands of hunger, thirst, and sex.
Our second need is love and belonging. We generally meet this need through family, friends, pets, plants, and material possessions.
Our third need is power. According to Glasser, this need involves getting others to obey us and then receiving the esteem and recognition that accompany power. Our drive for power sometimes conflicts with our need to belong. Two people in a relationship may struggle to control it rather than create an egalitarian relationship.
Our fourth need is freedom. People want the freedom to choose how they live their lives, to express themselves, to read and write what they choose, to associate with whom they want, and to worship or not worship as they believe.
Our fifth need is fun. Glasser believes learning is often fun; this gives us a great incentive to assimilate what we need to satisfy our needs. Classes that are grim and boring are major failings of our educational system. Laughter and humor help fulfill our need for fun. Fun is such a vital part of living that most of us have trouble conceiving of life without it.
Choice theory explains why and how we make the choices that determine the course of our lives. It is an internal control psychology: Glasser (1998) asserts that we choose everything we do. Following are the major axioms of choice theory:
· 1.
The only behavior we can control is our own. No one can make us do anything we do not want to do, as long as we are willing to endure the consequences (i.e., punishment for not doing what others want us to do). If we choose to do what others want us to do under the threat of severe punishment, we tend to be passive-aggressive by not performing well. When we try to force others to do what they do not want to do, they may choose not to do it—or choose to also be passive-aggressive by not performing well.
· 2.
All we can give or get from other people is information. How we deal with that information is our choice or theirs. A teacher, for example, can assign readings to students, but he is not responsible if some students choose not to read them. The teacher therefore should not feel responsible for those students who choose not to do the readings. The teacher can choose, of course, to give consequences to those students who fail to follow the reading instructions—such as giving them a lower grade.
· 3.
All we can do from birth to death is “behave.” Glasser indicates all behavior is “total behavior” and is made up of four inseparable components: acting, thinking, feeling, and physiology. Each of these components interacts and affects the three other components. (The next two axioms elaborate on this interaction.)
· 4.
All long-lasting psychological problems are relationship problems. Relationship problems are also a partial cause of many other problems, such as fatigue, pain, weakness, and autoimmune diseases (such as fibromyalgia and rheumatoid arthritis). Glasser (1998) states,
Most doctors believe that adult rheumatoid arthritis is caused by the victims’ immune systems attacking their own joints as if these joints were foreign bodies. Another way of putting it is that their own creative systems are trying to protect these people from a perceived harm. If we could figure out a way to stop this misguided creativity, millions of people who suffer from this disease and a host of other relentless diseases, called autoimmune diseases, could be helped. (pp. 137–138)
Our usual way of dealing with an important relationship that is not working out the way we want it to is to choose misery—emotional misery and physical misery.
· 5.
Human brains are very creative. A woman who has been sexually abused as a child may develop a dissociative identity disorder to psychologically shield herself from the emotional pain of the abuse. According to Glasser, almost all medical problems for which physicians are unable to identify the cause are partially created by the ill person’s brain to deal with unhappiness that she or he is experiencing. Unhappiness is the force that inspires the creativity inherent in the brain to be a partial cause of symptoms described in the DSM-5 (American Psychiatric Association, 2013a)—aches and pains (such as migraine headaches) and physical illnesses (such as heart disease, cancer, adult asthma, and eczema).
In regard to the brain creating the symptoms in the DSM-5, Glasser (2003) describes how unhappiness may lead the brain to create hallucinations:
Suppose, instead of your creativity presenting an idea to you as a thought, it created a voice uttering a threat or some other message directly into the auditory cortex of your brain. You would hear an actual voice or voices; it could be a stranger or you might recognize whose voice it was. It would be impossible, just by hearing it, for you to tell it from an actual voice or voices. (p. 114)
Since we can hear voices, our brains can create voices that we hear when no one else is around. Since we can see, it can create visual hallucinations. Since we can feel pain, it can create pain—perhaps in greater severity and duration than what we experience from an injury or illness. Since we are able to fear, the brain can and does create disabling phobias.
Our thoughts also have an impact on our physiological functioning. Highlight 11.3 provides some examples of healing thoughts versus disease-producing thoughts.
Highlight 11.3
The Impact of Thoughts on Physiological Functioning
Diseases and medical conditions are caused by a variety of factors; what we eat; exposure to germs, viruses, and bacteria; genetics; too much or too little sun; lack of exercise; lack of sleep; and thoughts. The following are examples of how our thoughts impact our physiological functioning.
1. Under hypnosis; “I will feel no pain”→ painless surgery without anesthesia.
2. Under hypnosis; “Something hot is burning my arm”→ blister.
3. Deep breathing relaxation: “I am relaxing: → painless dental drilling without anesthesia.
4. “I no longer want to live”→ death in a few years.
5. “I don’t want to die yet”→ ravaged by cancer, person continues to live.
6. When having a cold: “I must get all these things done”→ cold lingers for weeks. When having a cold: “I will take time off to rest and relax”→ cold ends after a few days.
7. Hangover: “This pain is killing me”→ intense pain hangover: “I will relax and ignore the pain”→ pain soon subsides (the same is true for most other headaches).
8. “I am worried about such and such,” or “I have so much to do tomorrow”→ inability to fall asleep.
9. “I will have serious complications if I have this surgery”→ greater likelihood of complications.
10. “This plane I’m going to fly on is going to crash”→ anxiety, panic attacks. (Panic attacks, if frequent, can lead to a variety of illnesses, including hypertension and heart problems.)
11. A woman thinking she’s pregnant, when she isn’t → morning sickness and enlarged stomach.
12. Thinking relaxing thoughts → immune system functions well, fights off illnesses, and facilitates healing.
13. Thinking alarming thoughts (such as “I miss—so much!”) → high stress level → a variety of illnesses, including heart problems, colitis, stomach problems, skin rashes, ulcers, aches and pains, headaches, cancer, colds, and flus. (Immune system is suppressed when a person is under high levels of stress.)
14. “I will do well today in this sport, by focusing on” → being good at tennis, golf, bowling, baseball, or other sport.
15. “I am too fat; by controlling my eating, I can control part of my life”→ anorexia and a variety of health problems.
16. “By throwing up after eating, I can maintain my weight and figure and also enjoy the good taste of food”→ bulimia and a variety of health problems.
17. “I need several drinks to get through the day and numb my pain”→ alcoholism.
18. “I love food so much, I don’t care what happens to me”→ compulsive; overeating; obesity, diabetes, and a variety of other health problems.
19. Are certain thought processes involved in autoimmune diseases, such as multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia?
20. “I need to get more work done, in a shorter time, for the next 10 years”→ Type A personality, hypertension, heart problems, and strokes.
21. “I will never forgive—for what s/he did.” Or “I’ll get even with her/him if it’s the last thing I do in life”→ hostility, heart problems, and strokes.
22. “Sex is disgusting,” or “My partner stinks,” or “My partner is inept at lovemaking”→ lack of sexual arousal and other sexual dysfunctions.
Note: Rational therapy (see Chapter 8) assumes that our emotions and our actions/behaviors are largely determined by our thoughts. Choice theory suggests that our thoughts affect our physiological functioning. It appears that our thoughts have a major impact on our lives!
· 6.
Barring untreatable physical illnesses or severe poverty, unsatisfying relationships are the primary source of crimes, addictions, and emotional and behavioral disorders.
· 7.
It is a serious mistake (from which it is irrational to expect positive results) to seek to control others by nagging, preaching, punishing, or threatening to punish them. As indicated earlier, the only person one can effectively control is oneself. In order to progress in improving human relationships, we need to give up seeking to control others through nagging, preaching, putting down, or threatening punishment.
Ethical Question 11.3
1. Is it unethical to seek to control others by nagging, preaching to, or punishing them? Do parents sometimes need to nag, preach to, and punish their children?
· 8.
The unsatisfying (problematic) relationship is always a current one. We cannot live happily without at least one satisfying relationship. In a quality relationship, each person seeks to meet his or her needs and wants, and those of the other person.
· 9.
The solving circle is a good strategy for two people who know choice theory to use in redefining their freedom and improving their relationship. Glasser advocates its use in marital and dating relationships. Each person pictures the relationship inside a large circle, called the solving circle. An imaginary circle is drawn on the floor. The two people sit on two chairs within the circle. They are told there are three entities in the solving circle: the two of them and the relationship. They are asked to agree that maintaining the relationship takes precedence over what each person wants. In the circle, each person tells the other what he or she will agree to do to help the relationship. Within those limits, the two must reach a compromise on their conflicts.
· 10.
Painful events that happened in the past greatly influence what we are today, but dwelling on the past can contribute little or nothing to what we need to do now—which, is to improve an important present relationship.
· 11.
It is not necessary to know our past before we can deal with the present. It is good to revisit the parts of our past that were satisfying, but it is even better to leave what was unhappy alone.
· 12.
· 13.
When we have difficulty getting along with other people, we usually make the mistake of choosing to employ external control psychology, attempting to coerce or control others by nagging, preaching, moralizing, criticizing, or using put-down messages.
· 14.
Because relationships are central to human happiness, improving our emotional and physical well-being involves exploring how we relate to others, and looking for ways to improve how we relate to others (particularly those we feel closest to).
· 15.
It is therapeutic to view our behavior in terms of verbs. For example, it is more accurate to say to oneself, “I am choosing to depress,” or “I am depressing,” instead of thinking, “I am suffering from depression,” or “I am depressed.” When we say, “I am depressing,” we are immediately aware that we are choosing to depress, and have the choice to do and feel something else (such as “I will go golfing and enjoy the day”). People who instead say, “I am depressed,” mistakenly tend to believe the depressing is beyond their control. In addition, they are apt to mistakenly believe the depressing has been caused by what someone else has done to them. To recognize that we have the power to choose to stop depressing (or to stop angering or frustrating) is a wonderful freedom that people who adhere to the view that they are largely controlled by others will never have.
· 16.
All behavior (thinking, feeling, acting, and physiology) is chosen, but we have direct control over only the acting and thinking components. We do, however, control our physiology and our feelings through how we choose to act and think. It is not easy to change our actions and thoughts, but it is all we can do. When we succeed in coming up with more satisfying actions and thoughts, we gain a great deal of personal freedom.
· 17.
Whenever you feel as if you don’t have the freedom you want in a relationship, it is because you, your partner, or both of you are unwilling to accept a key axiom of choice theory: You can only control your own behavior. The more you and your partner learn choice theory, the better you will get along with one another. Choice theory supports the Golden Rule.
· 18.
People choose (although some are unaware of doing so) to play the mentally ill roles described in the DSM-5 (American Psychiatric Association, 2013). These people have the symptoms described in the DSM-5, but they are not mentally ill (if mental illness is defined as a disease of the mind). These people do not have an untreatable or incurable mental illness. The symptoms only indicate that these people are not as healthy as they could learn to be. (For additional information on this topic, see “Interactional Model” in Chapter 8.)
· 19.
A mentally healthy person enjoys being with most of the people he or she knows—especially the important people, such as family and friends. A mentally healthy person likes people and is more than willing to help an unhappy friend, colleague, or family member to feel better. A mentally healthy person laughs a lot and leads a mostly tension-free life. He or she enjoys life and has no trouble accepting others who are different. He or she does not focus on criticizing others nor on trying to change them. He or she is creative. When unhappy (no one can be happy all the time), a mentally healthy person knows why he or she is unhappy and will attempt to do something about it.
Glasser’s views are controversial. Thoughts are not the only determinants of physiological illnesses (as Glasser suggests). Many other factors contribute to the formation of physiological illnesses. For example, substances such as tomatoes, milk, and chocolate can cause eczema in certain people. Some illnesses, such as Huntington’s disease, are caused by genetic inheritance.
11-8Describe Gawain’s Theories about Intuition and How Human Behavior Is Affected by It
11-8aIntuition
The cerebrum (the area of conscious mental processes of the brain) is composed of two cerebral hemispheres. The right hemisphere has been called the right brain, and the left hemisphere has been called the left brain. Anatomically, the two hemispheres appear to be quite similar, but there is abundant evidence that their functions are by no means identical (Gleitman, 1986). Movements of the left side of the body are under the control of the right hemisphere; movements of the right side of the body are controlled by the left hemisphere.
The left hemisphere of the brain ordinarily controls language and speech functions. It appears the left hemisphere is also more centrally involved in rational thought processes, logic, deduction, and mathematical skills. In contrast, the right hemisphere may be more centrally involved in creativity, musical abilities, intuition, and feelings. (It should be noted that research on the location of different functions is somewhat speculative and, further, that there is considerable overlap in functions across the two hemispheres.)
The self-talk approach, described in Chapter 8, demonstrates that humans, by thinking rationally, can learn to better control their emotions and their actions, and obtain better control of their lives. However, Gawain (1986) theorizes that it is also important for humans to develop and use their intuition. “A strong body/personality structure is not created by eating certain foods, doing certain exercises, or following anybody’s rules or good ideas. It is created by trusting your intuition and learning to follow its direction” (p. 18).
An important step toward identifying and following your intuition is simply taking time (perhaps several times a day) to relax and listen to your “gut feelings.” The inner voice of intuition will present itself in a variety of ways, including images, feelings, and words. When you have an important decision to make, your true feelings can more easily be identified if you are relaxed. When you are relaxed (perhaps through using meditation or some other relaxation technique), your intuition will inform you which alternative is in your best interest. Frequently, your intuition will inform you of creative alternatives that you were previously unaware of.
Human intuition is similar (and perhaps identical) to the instinct in geese that guides them to fly south in fall and north in spring. It is similar to the instinct in dogs that makes them wary upon seeing a bear in the wild—even when they have never seen a bear before.
Your intuition can assist you in making such major decisions as whether to stay in college, choosing a career, whether to end a romantic relationship, what kind of automobile to purchase, and what hobbies to pursue. Your intuition can also lead you to be a more creative, productive, contented, and fulfilled person.
11-9Understand the Issue of Substance Abuse
11-9aChemical Substance Use and Abuse
The remainder of this chapter will focus on a critical issue affecting, in one way or another, nearly every person in our society—chemical substance use and abuse. Nearly everyone has one or more relatives or friends who are abusing alcohol or some other drug. Some of the readers of this text may be personally struggling with this issue.
We begin our discussion with some examples. There was going to be a big party at Evelyn’s on Saturday night. Georgia, a high school junior, couldn’t wait to go. Everybody was going to be there. Evelyn said she had some great weed. Georgia didn’t like to smoke all that much. However, people would think there was something wrong with her if she didn’t, and that was the last thing she wanted.
Marty, age 15, liked to drink a couple of six-packs on the weekend. After all, his father did, and Marty was almost an adult.
Virgil, age 18, liked to get high because then he could forget about all his problems. He wouldn’t have to think about his alcoholic mother and all the problems she and his father were having. He wouldn’t have to worry about all the pressures he had in school. He wouldn’t even have to think about how his girlfriend recently dumped him. He just couldn’t wait until the next chance he had to get high.
Drugs have become part of our daily lives. We use drugs to relax, to increase our pleasure, to feel less inhibited, to get rid of unwanted emotions, to keep awake, and to fall asleep. Practically all Americans use drugs of one kind or another. People have coffee in the morning, soda (which has caffeine) during the day, cocktails before dinner, and aspirin to relieve pain.
When the Pilgrims set sail for America, they loaded on their ships 14 tons of water—plus 10,000 gallons of wine and 42 tons of beer (Robertson, 1980). Ever since, Americans have been widely using and abusing drugs.
Pharmacologically, a drug is any substance that chemically alters the function or structure of a living organism. Such a definition includes food, insecticides, air pollutants, water pollutants, acids, vitamins, toxic chemicals, soaps, and soft drinks. Obviously, this definition is too broad to be useful. For our purposes, a definition based on context is more useful. In medicine, for example, a drug is any substance that is manufactured specifically to relieve pain or to treat and prevent diseases and other medical conditions.
Here drugs will be addressed within the context most useful for social workers. We will focus on drugs that can dramatically affect human behavior and have serious consequences on people’s lives. For our purposes, then, a drug is any habit-forming substance that directly affects the brain and the nervous system; it is a chemical substance that affects moods, perceptions, bodily functions, or consciousness and that has the potential for misuse as it may be harmful to the user.
Drug abuse is the regular or excessive use of a drug when, as defined by a group, the consequences endanger relationships with other people, are detrimental to a person’s health, or jeopardize society itself. All of the drugs mentioned earlier are types of chemicals. Another way of referring to drug abuse is chemical substance abuse. Drug or chemical substance intake becomes abusive when an individual’s mind and/or body are affected in negative or harmful ways.
Both legal drugs, such as alcohol and tobacco, and prescription drugs are frequently abused. Among the most abused prescription drugs are sedatives, tranquilizers, painkillers, and stimulants. Many prescribed drugs have the potential to be psychologically and physiologically addicting. Drug companies spend millions in advertising to convince customers that they are too tense and too irritable, take too long to fall asleep, should lose weight, and so on. These companies then assert that their medications will relieve these problems. Unfortunately, many customers accept this easy symptom-relief approach and end up dependent on pills, rather than making the necessary changes in their lives to be healthy. Such changes include exercise, stress management techniques, positive thinking, and a healthy diet.
Illegal drugs such as cocaine and heroin are also frequently abused. People use them to distort their own realities. They can be used to attain unrealistic “highs” or to escape unpleasant life situations. However, as we will see, heavy drug use can often result in serious physical deterioration and slave-like psychological and physical dependence.
This section will describe a variety of over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs and will examine various issues of drug use and treatment. Finally, the relationship between knowledge about drug use and assessment in social work practice will be proposed.
11-9bSpecific Drugs: What They Are and What They Do
Knowing what a specific drug is and what it does to a person is important both in treatment and in considering its use and abuse. Specific drugs discussed here include depressants, stimulants, narcotics, hallucinogens, marijuana, tobacco, and anabolic steroids. Highlight 11.4 summarizes information about these drugs.
Highlight 11.4
Drugs of Abuse: Facts and Effects
|
|
Dependence Potential |
|
||||||
|
Drug |
Physical |
Psychological |
Tolerance |
Duration of Effects (hours) |
Usual Methods of Administration |
Possible Effects |
Effects of Overdose |
Withdrawal Symptoms |
|
Narcotics |
|
|||||||
|
Opium Morphine Heroin |
High High High |
High High High |
Yes Yes Yes |
3 to 6 3 to 6 3 to 6 |
Oral, smoked Injected, smoked Injected, sniffed |
Euphoria, drowsiness, respiratory depression, constricted pupils, nausea |
Slow and shallow breathing, clammy skin, convulsions, coma, possible death |
Watery eyes, runny nose, yawning, loss of appetite, irritability, tremors, panic, chills and sweating, cramps, nausea |
|
Depressants |
||||||||
|
Alcohol Barbiturates Tranquilizers Quaalude |
High High Moderate High |
High High Moderate High |
Yes Yes Yes Yes |
1 to 12 1 to 16 4 to 8 4 to 8 |
Oral Oral, injected Oral Oral |
Slurred speech, disorientation, drunken behavior, loss of coordination, impaired reactions |
Shallow respiration, cold and clammy skin, dilated pupils, weak and rapid pulse, coma, possible death |
Anxiety, insomnia, tremors, delirium, convulsions, possible death |
|
Stimulants |
|
|||||||
|
Caffeine |
High |
High |
Yes |
2 to 4 |
Oral |
Increased alertness, excitation, euphoria, dilated pupils, increased pulse rate and blood pressure, insomnia, loss of appetite |
Agitation, increase in pulse rate and blood pressure, loss of appetite, insomnia |
|
|
Cocaine Crack Amphetamines |
Possible Possible Possible |
High High High |
Yes Yes Yes |
2 2 2 to 4 |
Injected, sniffed Smoked Oral, injected |
|
Agitation, increase in body temperature, hallucinations, convulsions, tremors, possible death |
Apathy, long periods of sleep, irritability, depression, disorientation |
|
Butyl nitrate Amyl nitrate |
Possible Possible |
Unknown Unknown |
Probable Probable |
Up to 5 Up to 5 |
Inhaled Inhaled |
Excitement, euphoria, giddiness, loss of inhibitions, aggressiveness, delusions, depression, drowsiness, headache, nausea |
Loss of memory, confusion, unsteady gait, erratic heartbeat and pulse, possible death |
Insomnia, decreased appetite, depression, irritability, headache |
|
Hallucinogens |
|
|||||||
|
LSD |
None |
Degree |
Yes |
Variable |
Oral |
Illusions and hallucinations, poor perception of time psychosis, and distance |
Longer and more intense “trip” episodes, possible death |
Unknown |
|
Mescaline and Peyote |
|
Unknown |
|
Oral, injected |
|
|||
|
Psilocybin psilocin |
|
Oral |
|
|||||
|
PCP |
|
Oral, injected |
|
|||||
|
MDMA (Ecstasy) |
|
Oral, injected, smoked |
|
|||||
|
Cannabis |
|
|||||||
|
Marijuana Hashish |
Degree unknown |
Moderate |
Yes |
2 to 4 |
Oral, smoked |
Euphoria, relaxed inhibitions, increased appetite, disoriented behavior, increased heart and pulse rate |
Fatigue, paranoia, possible psychosis, time disorientation, slowed movements |
Insomnia, hyperactivity, decreased appetite |
|
Nicotine (Tobacco) |
High |
High |
Yes |
2 to 4 |
Smoked, chewed |
Increased alertness, excitation, euphoria, dilated pupils, increased pulse rate and blood pressure, insomnia, loss of appetite |
Agitation increase in pulse rate and blood pressure, loss, of appetite, insomnia |
Apathy, long periods of sleep, irritability, depression |
|
Anabolic steroids |
None |
High |
Unknown |
Unknown |
Oral |
Moodiness, depression, irritability |
Virilization, edema, testicular atrophy, gynecomastia, acne, aggressive behavior |
Possible depression |
Depressant Drugs
Depressant drugs are those that slow down bodily functioning and activity. Alcohol, barbiturates, tranquilizers, and Quaalude all fall within this category.
Alcohol
Alcohol is a colorless liquid found in beer, wine, brandy, whiskey, vodka, rum, and other intoxicating beverages. The type of alcohol found in beverages is ethyl alcohol; it is also called grain alcohol because most of it is made from fermenting grain.
Who Drinks?
The American adult consumes an average of 21.7 gallons of beer, 2.0 gallons of wine, and 1.3 gallons of distilled spirits a year (Kornblum & Julian, 2012). The vast majority of teenagers and adults in our society drink.
Several factors are related to whether an individual will drink and, if so, how much. These variables include biological factors, socioeconomic factors, gender, age, religion, urban/rural residence, and cultural influences (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
· Biological factors: Close relatives of an alcoholic are four times more likely than nonrelatives to become alcoholics themselves. This tendency holds true even for children who were adopted away from their biological families at birth and raised in a nonalcoholic family. Such findings clearly suggest that drinking and alcoholism are due in part to biological factors. Some Asian populations have highly negative reactions to alcohol, which tends to diminish their risk of becoming alcoholics. On the other hand, some ethnic groups (such as Native Americans) have a lower tolerance for alcohol than other groups do, which places them at a greater risk for alcoholism.
· Socioeconomic factors: Drinking is more frequent among younger men who are positioned at higher socioeconomic levels, and less frequent among older women at lower levels.
· Gender: Men are more likely to use and abuse alcohol than are women. Still, recent decades have seen a dramatic increase in alcoholism among adult women. Why? One explanation is that cultural taboos against heavy drinking among women have weakened. Another explanation is that increased drinking is related to the changing roles of women in our society.
· Age: Older people are less likely to drink than younger people, even if they were drinkers in their youth. Heavy drinking is most common at ages 21 to 30 for men and ages 31 to 50 for women.
· Religion: Nonchurchgoers drink more than regular churchgoers. Heavy drinking is more common among Episcopalians and Catholics, whereas conservative and fundamentalist Protestants are more often nondrinkers or light drinkers. Fewer Jews are heavy drinkers.
· Urban/rural residence: Urban residents are more likely to drink than rural residents.
In the 1980s and 1990s, the federal government put considerable financial pressure on states to raise the drinking age to 21; if a state did not raise the age, federal highway funds were withheld. All states have now raised the drinking age to 21. Many secondary schools, colleges, and universities have initiated alcohol awareness programs. Many businesses and employers have developed Employee Assistance Programs designed to provide treatment services to alcoholics and problem drinkers. Many states have passed stricter drunk-driving laws, and police departments and the courts are more vigorously enforcing such laws. Organizations such as Mothers Against Drunk Driving and Students Against Drunk Driving have been fairly successful in creating greater public awareness of the hazards of drinking and driving. A cultural norm is emerging in many segments that it is stylish not to have too much to drink. Despite these promising trends, rates of alcohol use and abuse in the United States remain extremely high.
What Alcohol Does
Many drinkers believe alcohol is a stimulant, because it relaxes tensions, lessens sexual and aggressive inhibitions, and seems to facilitate interpersonal relationships. However, it acts as a depressant to the central nervous system, reducing functional activity of this system. Its chemical composition and effects are very similar to those of ether (an anesthetic used in medicine to induce unconsciousness).
Alcohol slows down mental activity, reasoning ability, speech ability, and muscle reactions. It distorts perceptions, slurs speech, lessens coordination, and slows down memory functioning and respiration. In increasing quantities, it leads to stupor, sleep, coma, and finally death. A hangover (the aftereffects of too much alcohol) includes headache, thirst, muscle aches, stomach discomfort, diarrhea, and nausea. Alcohol can seriously affect how one drives an automobile. Behavior resulting from excessive alcohol intake can also have negative effects on family, friend, and work relationships.
The effects of alcohol vary with the percentage of alcohol in the bloodstream as it passes through the brain. Generally, the effects are observable when the concentration of alcohol in the blood reaches one-tenth of a percent. Five drinks (a drink is defined as 1 ounce of 86-proof alcohol or 12 ounces of beer or 3 ounces of wine) in 2 hours for a 120-pound person will result in a blood alcohol concentration of one-tenth of a percent, which exceeds the legal criterion in all states for being intoxicated.
Alcohol also has long-term effects on a person’s health. Alcoholics have a life expectancy that is 10 to 12 years less than that of nonalcoholics (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015). The lifespan is shorter for several reasons. One is that alcohol, over an extended period of time, gradually destroys liver cells and replaces the cells with scar tissue. When the scar tissue is extensive, a medical condition occurs called cirrhosis. Continued drinking by people impacted by cirrhosis often results in death. Also, although it has no nutritional value, alcohol contains a high number of calories. As a result, heavy drinkers have a reduced appetite for nutritious food and thus frequently suffer from vitamin deficiencies and are more susceptible to infectious diseases. Heavy drinking also causes kidney problems, contributes to a variety of heart ailments, is a factor in diabetes, and appears to contribute to cancer. In addition, heavy drinking is associated with thousands of suicides annually (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
However, for some as yet unknown reason, the life expectancy for light-to-moderate drinkers exceeds that for nondrinkers. Perhaps an occasional drink helps people to relax and thereby reduces the likelihood of developing life-threatening stress-related illnesses.
Alcohol also can seriously affect sexual response. The effects of alcohol vary considerably. A small amount of alcohol may reduce inhibitions and anxiety, thereby improving responsiveness. A large amount of alcohol, however, acts as a depressant and reduces sexual arousal, thereby causing sexual dysfunction (Hyde & DeLamater, 2014). Male alcoholics who are exposed to repeated high doses of alcohol frequently have sexual dysfunctions, including erectile dysfunction and loss of sexual desire. Women who have consumed small amounts of alcohol (compared with controls who have consumed none) report greater sexual arousal and more pleasurable orgasms, although their orgasms are slightly delayed. However, when a large amount of alcohol is consumed (and the state of being intoxicated is approached), an orgasm takes significantly longer to occur, and women report that the orgasm is less intense. Although a high proportion of recovering alcoholics still experience some form of sexual dysfunction, the majority of alcohol-related sexual problems will disappear after a few months of abstinence.
Combining alcohol with other drugs can have disastrous, and sometimes fatal, effects. Two drugs taken together may have a synergistic interaction—that is, they interact to produce an effect much greater than either would cause alone. For example, sedatives such as barbiturates (often found in sleeping pills) or Quaaludes taken with alcohol can so depress the central nervous system that a coma or even death may result.
Other drugs tend to create an antagonistic response to alcohol—one drug negates the effects of the other. Many doctors now caution patients not to drink while taking certain prescribed drugs because the alcohol will reduce, and even totally negate, the beneficial effects of those drugs.
Whether drugs will interact synergistically or antagonistically depends on a wide range of factors: the properties of the drugs, the amounts taken, the amount of sleep of the user, the kind and amount of food that has been eaten, and the user’s overall health and tolerance. The interactive effects may be minimal one day and extensive the next.
When used by pregnant women, alcohol may gravely affect the unborn child by causing mental retardation, deformities, stunting of growth, and other abnormalities. This effect has been termed fetal alcohol syndrome.
Withdrawal from alcohol, once the body is physically addicted, may lead to the DTs (delirium tremens) and other unpleasant reactions. The DTs include rapid heartbeat, uncontrollable trembling, severe nausea, and profuse sweating.
Barbiturates
Barbiturates, another type of depressant, are derived from barbituric acid, and depress the central nervous system. Barbiturates were first synthesized in the early 1900s, and there are now more than 2,500 different barbiturates. They are commonly used to relieve insomnia and anxiety. Some are prescribed as sleeping pills, and others are used during the daytime by tense and anxious persons. They are also used to treat epilepsy and high blood pressure, and to relax patients before or after surgery. Barbiturates are illegal unless obtained by a physician’s prescription.
Taken in sufficient doses, barbiturates have effects similar to alcohol. Users experience relief from inhibitions, have a feeling of euphoria, feel “high” or in good humor, and are passively content. However, these moods can change rapidly to gloom, agitation, and aggressiveness. Physiological effects include slurred speech, disorientation, staggering, appearance of being confused, drowsiness, and reduced coordination.
Prolonged heavy use of barbiturates can cause physical dependence, with withdrawal symptoms similar to those of heroin addiction. Withdrawal is accompanied by body tremors, cramps, anxiety, fever, nausea, profuse sweating, and hallucinations. Many authorities believe barbiturate addiction is more dangerous than heroin addiction, and it is considered to be more resistant to treatment than heroin addiction. Abrupt withdrawal ( cold turkey, the sudden and complete halting of drug use) can cause fatal convulsions.
Barbiturate overdose may cause convulsions, coma, poisoning, and sometimes death. Barbiturates are particularly dangerous when taken with alcohol, because alcohol acts synergistically to magnify the potency of the barbiturates. Accidental deaths due to excessive doses are frequent. Barbiturates are also the number one drug used for suicide. A number of famous people have fatally overdosed on barbiturates.
Barbiturates are generally taken orally, although some users inject them intravenously. Use of barbiturates, like alcohol, may also lead to traffic fatalities. See Highlight 11.5, Drug-Related Deaths of Famous People.
Highlight 11.5
Drug-Related Deaths of Famous People
There are hundreds of famous people whose deaths were drug related. The following are a few examples. Their ages at death are in parentheses (X).
· John Belushi (33), actor and comedian; heroin and cocaine overdose
· Len Bias (22), basketball star; died of cocaine overdose before ever playing in the NBA
· Lenny Bruce (40), comedian; morphine overdose
· Richard Burton (59), actor; alcohol-related causes
· Truman Capote (59), writer; liver disease complicated by phlebitis and multiple drug intoxication
· Kurt Cobain (27), musician; heroin overdose and a shotgun wound in head
· Tommy Dorsey (51), jazz musician and band leader; choked to death while sleeping with the aid of drugs
· Chris Farley (33), comedian; cocaine and morphine overdose
· W C. Fields (67), performer and actor; complications of alcoholism
· Sigmund Freud (83), psychoanalyst; long-term cocaine use; physician-assisted morphine overdose
· Judy Garland (47), singer and actress; disputed drug overdose as cause of death
· Andy Gibb (30), singer; cardiac damage strongly exacerbated by cocaine and alcohol abuse
· Bobby Hatfield (63), singer and musician; heart attack triggered by cocaine overdose
· Billie Holiday (44), jazz singer; cirrhosis of the liver attributed to longtime alcohol and heroin abuse
· Whitney Houston (48), pop singer; overdose of cocaine, alcohol, and other drugs
· Howard Hughes (70), aviator, engineer, industrialist, movie producer; liver failure—autopsy showed lethal amount of codeine and Valium in body
· Michael Jackson (41), pop singer; personal physician gave lethal dose of Propofol
· Janis Joplin (27), singer and musician; heroin overdose
· Alan Ladd (50), actor; acute overdose of alcohol and barbiturates (probable suicide)
· Heath Ledger (28), actor; combined drug intoxication of various prescription drugs, including oxycodone
· Billy Martin (61), baseball player and manager; alcohol-related auto accident
· Marilyn Monroe (36), actress; overdose of barbiturate-based sleeping pills
· Prince (57), singer, song writer, actor; overdose of opioids
· River Phoenix (23), actor; overdose of heroin and cocaine
· Elvis Presley (42), singer; heart attack brought on by overdose of barbiturates
· Freddie Prinze (22), comedian, actor; self-inflicted gunshot wound while under the influence of Quaaludes
· Anna Nicole Smith (39), actress, reality show star; lethal combination of chloral hydrate and various benzodiazepines
· Sid Vicious (21), musician; heroin overdose, disputed suicide
· Keith Whitley (33), country singer; alcohol poisoning
· Hank Williams (29), country singer; drugs and probably alcohol
· Amy Winehouse (28), singer; alcohol poisoning
· Natalie Wood (43), actress; drowned while intoxicated
Tranquilizers
Yet another type of depressant is the group of drugs classified as tranquilizers. Common brand names are Librium, Miltown, Serax, Tranxene, and Valium. Tranquilizers reduce anxiety, relax muscles, and are sedatives. Users have moderate potential of becoming physically and psychologically dependent. The drugs are usually taken orally, and the effects last for four to eight hours. Side effects include slurred speech, disorientation, and behavior resembling being intoxicated. Overdoses are possible, with the effects including cold and clammy skin, shallow respiration, dilated pupils, weak and rapid pulse, coma, and possibly death. Withdrawal symptoms are similar to those from alcohol and barbiturates and include anxiety, tremors, convulsions, delirium, and possibly death. Highlight 11.6 discusses depressants that are used as so-called date-rape drugs.
Highlight 11.6
Date-Rape Drugs
In the mid-1990s, Rohypnol became known as the date-rape drug. A number of women were sexually assaulted after the drug was slipped into their drinks (both alcoholic and nonalcoholic). Rohypnol often causes blackouts, with complete loss of memory. Female victims who were slipped the drug and then raped often cannot remember any details of the crime.
Rohypnol is a sedative that is related to Valium, but 10 times stronger. Rohypnol is legally available in more than 60 countries for severe insomnia. It is illegal in the United States. Much of the Rohypnol in the United States is smuggled in from Mexico and Colombia. It should be noted that Rohypnol is also addictive, and there is a potential for lethal overdosing.
Rohypnol is popular with teens and young adults who like to combine it with alcohol for a quick punch-drunk hit. Another reason for its popularity is that it’s relatively inexpensive—often being purchased on the street for $1 to $5 per pill. In some jurisdictions, drivers are now tested for Rohypnol when they appear drunk but register a low alcohol level. Rohypnol can be lethal when mixed with alcohol and/or other depressants.
Because of the ease, through which Rohypnol can be slipped into a drink, rape crisis centers are urging women to never take their eyes off their drinks. In 1997, the marketer of Rohypnol, Hoffman-LaRoche, announced it intended to sell only a new version of Rohypnol—one that would cause any liquid that it is put into to turn blue. Even with this change, however, people (particularly women) need to beware—other sedatives have similar effects. In addition, people who intend to commit a sexual assault facilitated by Rohypnol are now offering blue tropical drinks and punches to their intended victim so the blue dye can be disguised.
Gamma hydroxybutyrate (GHB) is another drug that is increasingly being used as a date-rape drug. GHB is a central nervous system depressant that is approved as an anesthetic in some countries. It can be readily made at home from a mixture of chemicals normally used for cleaning, such as lye. Just one gram of this liquid home brew provides an intoxicating experience equivalent to 26 ounces of whisky. Similar to Rohypnol, GHB is put into the drink of the intended victim.
Alcohol is also classified as a date-rape drug.
Well known entertainer, Bill Cosby, has been accused of sexually assaulting over 50 women by using date-rape drugs. (He maintains his innocence.)
Quaalude
Methaqualone (better known by its patent name Quaalude) has effects similar to barbiturates and alcohol, although it is chemically different. It has a reputation as a love drug, as users believe it makes them more eager for sex and enhances sexual pleasure. These effects are probably due to the fact that it lessens inhibitions. Quaalude also reduces anxiety and gives a feeling of euphoria.
Users can become both physically and psychologically dependent on Quaaludes. Overdose can result in convulsions, coma, delirium, and even death—most deaths occur when the drug is taken together with alcohol, which vastly magnifies the drug’s effects. Withdrawal symptoms are severe and unpleasant. Abuse of the drug may also cause hangovers, fatigue, liver damage, and temporary paralysis of the limbs.
Stimulants
Stimulants are substances that produce a temporary increase in a person’s activity level or efficiency. They include caffeine, amphetamines, cocaine, crack, amyl nitrate, and butyl nitrate.
Caffeine
Excessive amounts of caffeine cause insomnia, restlessness, and gastrointestinal irritation. Surprisingly, excessive doses can even cause death.
Because caffeine has the status of a “nondrug” in our society, users are not labeled criminals, there is no black market for it, and no subculture is formed to give support in obtaining and using the drug. Because caffeine is legal, its price is low compared to that of other drugs. Users are not tempted to resort to crime to support their habit. Some authorities assert that our approach to caffeine should serve as a model for the way we react to other illegal drugs (such as marijuana) that they feel are no more harmful than caffeine (Kornblum & Julian, 2012).
Amphetamines
Another type of stimulant, amphetamines, are often called “uppers” because of their stimulating effect. When prescribed by a physician, they are legal. Some truck drivers have obtained prescriptions in order to stay awake and more alert while making a long haul. Dieters have received prescriptions to help them lose weight, and they often find that the pills tend to give them more self-confidence and buoyance. Others who have used amphetamines to increase alertness and performance for relatively short periods of time include college students, athletes, astronauts, and executives. Additional nicknames for this drug are speed, ups, pep pills, black beauties, and bennies.
Ethical Question 11.4
1. Is it unethical to drink excessively and to abuse other drugs?
Amphetamines are usually taken orally in tablet, powder, or capsule form. They can also be sniffed or injected. “Speeding” (injecting the drug into a vein) produces the most powerful effects and can also cause the greatest harm. An overdose may cause a coma, with possible brain damage and, in rare cases, death. Speeders may also develop hepatitis, abscesses, convulsions, hallucinations, delusions, and severe emotional disturbances. Another danger is that, when sold on the street, the substance may contain impurities that are health hazards.
An amphetamine high is often followed by mental depression and fatigue. Continued amphetamine use leads to psychological dependence. It is unclear whether amphetamines are physically addictive, as the withdrawal symptoms are uncharacteristic of withdrawal from other drugs. Amphetamine withdrawal symptoms include sleep disturbances, apathy, decreased activity, disorientation, irritability, exhaustion, and depression. Some authorities believe such withdrawal symptoms indicate that amphetamines may be physically addicting.
One of the legal uses of certain amphetamines is in the treatment of hyperactivity in children. Hyperactivity (also called hyperkinesis) is characterized by a short attention span, extensive motor activity, restlessness, and mood shifts. Little is known about the causes of this condition. As children become older, even without treatment, the symptoms tend to disappear. Interestingly, some amphetamines (Ritalin is a popular one) have a calming and soothing effect on hyperactive children—the exact opposite effect occurs when Ritalin is taken by adults. It should be noted that treating uncontrollable children with amphetamines has sometimes been abused. Some of the children for whom Ritalin was prescribed were not really hyperactive. They were normal children who simply refused to submit to what their teachers and parents considered appropriate childhood behavior. As a result, these children were labeled as troublemakers and were introduced to the world of taking a mood-altering drug on a daily basis.
One amphetamine that has had increasing illegal use in recent years is methamphetamine hydrochloride, known on the street as “meth” or “ice.” In liquid form, it is often referred to as “speed.” Under experimental conditions, cocaine users often have difficulty distinguishing cocaine from methamphetamine hydrochloride. Use of this drug has spread, as the “high” lasts longer than that from cocaine and the drug can be manufactured relatively easily in laboratories from products that are sold legally in the United States. As a “last resort,” methamphetamine hydrochloride (Desoxyn) is legally used to treat obesity as one component of a weight-reduction regimen. However, this drug has a serious side effect when used for weight reduction: the user’s appetite returns with greater intensity after withdrawal from the drug.
Cocaine and Crack
Cocaine is obtained from the leaves of the South American coca plant. Although legally classified as a narcotic, it is in fact not related to the opiates from which narcotic drugs are derived. It is a powerful stimulant and antifatigue agent.
In the United States, cocaine is generally sniffed and then absorbed through the nasal membranes. The most common method is “snorting,” sniffing up through a straw or a rolled-up banknote. It may also be injected intravenously, and in South America the natives chew the coca leaf. It may be added in small quantities to a cigarette and smoked. Cocaine has been used medically in the past as a local anesthetic, but other drugs have largely replaced it for this purpose.
Cocaine constricts the blood vessels and tissues, and thereby leads to increased strength and endurance. It also is thought by users to increase creative and intellectual powers. Other effects include a feeling of euphoria, excitement, restlessness, and a lessened sense of fatigue.
Larger doses, or extended use, may result in hallucinations and delusions. A peculiar effect of cocaine abuse is “formication,” the illusion that ants, snakes, or bugs are crawling on or into the skin. Some abusers have such intense illusions that they literally scratch, slap, and wound themselves trying to kill these imaginary creatures.
Someone snorting cocaine.
Lisa F. Young/ Shutterstock.com
Physical effects of cocaine include increased blood pressure and pulse rate, insomnia, and loss of appetite. Heavy users may experience weight loss or malnutrition due to appetite suppression. Physical dependence on cocaine is considered to be a low-to-medium risk. However, the drug appears to be psychologically habituating. Termination of use usually results in intense depression and despair, which drives the person back to taking the drug. Additional effects of withdrawal include apathy, long periods of sleep, extreme fatigue, irritability, and disorientation. Serious tissue damage to the nose can occur when large quantities of cocaine are sniffed over a prolonged period of time. Regular use may result in habitual sniffing and sometimes leads to an anorexic condition. High doses can lead to agitation, increased body temperature, and convulsions. A few people who overdose may die if their breathing and heart functions become too depressed.
Crack, also called “rock,” is obtained by separating the adulterants from the cocaine by mixing it with water and ammonium hydroxide. The water is then removed from the cocaine base by means of a fast-drying solvent, usually ether. The resultant mixture resembles large crystals, similar to rock sugar. Crack is highly addictive. Some authorities claim that one use is enough to lead to addiction. Users generally claim that after they have finished one dose, they crave for another.
Crack is generally smoked, either in a specially made glass pipe or mixed with tobacco or marijuana in a cigarette. The effects are similar to those of cocaine, but the “rush” is more immediate, and the drug gives an intensified high.
An overdose is more common when crack is injected than when it is smoked. Withdrawal effects include an irresistible compulsion to have the drug, as well as apathy, long periods of sleep, irritability, extreme fatigue, depression, and disorientation.
Communal use of needles spreads AIDS. Cocaine and crack can have serious effects on the heart, straining it with high blood pressure, with interrupted heart rhythm, and with raised pulse rates. Cocaine and crack may also damage the liver. Severe convulsions can cause brain damage, emotional problems, and sometimes death. Smoking crack may also damage the lungs. The effects on babies who are born to crack users are described in Highlight 11.7.
Highlight 11.7
Babies Who Are Cocaine Exposed
A baby who has been exposed to cocaine use during pregnancy.
Chuck Nacke/Alamy Stock Photo
In the 1980s, a flurry of media reports suggested a link between women’s cocaine use during pregnancy and a range of damaging effects on babies. Some media articles stated these babies would have permanent brain damage, suggesting they would have severe cognitive disabilities for the remainder of their lives. A Washington Post column by Charles Krauthammer (7/30/89), for example, stated, “The inner-city crack epidemic is now giving birth to the newest horror: a bio-underclass, a generation of physically damaged cocaine babies whose biological inferiority is stamped at birth.”
Now, however, researchers who have followed these children who were exposed to cocaine before birth have concluded that the long-term effects of such exposure on children’s brain development and behavior appear to be relatively small. Cocaine is undoubtedly bad for the fetus. But experts say its effects are less severe than those of alcohol and are comparable to those of tobacco. (Sometimes the media seizes on supposed medical phenomenon and hypes it beyond recognition, distorting facts irresponsibly or simply getting the “facts” wrong.) It appears the lack of good prenatal care, use of tobacco and alcohol, and poverty are more serious factors in poor fetal development among pregnant cocaine users than cocaine itself.
Source: http://www.fair.org/index.php?page=3702.
Amyl Nitrate and Butyl Nitrate
Amyl nitrate (poppers) is prescribed for patients who are at risk of certain forms of heart failure. It is a volatile liquid that is sold in capsules or small bottles. When the container is opened, the chemical begins to evaporate (similar to gasoline). If the vapor is sniffed, the user’s blood vessels are immediately dilated and the heart rate increases. These physical changes create feelings of mental excitation (head rush) and physical excitation (body rush). The drug is supposedly sold only by prescription, but (as with many other drugs) the illicit drug market distributes it.
Butyl nitrate is legally available in some states without a prescription and has an effect similar to amyl nitrate’s. Trade names under which it is sold are Rush and Locker Room. Similar to amyl nitrate, butyl nitrate vapor is sniffed. It is available at some sexual aid and novelty stores.
Both of these drugs have been used as aphrodisiacs and as stimulants while dancing. The drugs have some short-term, unpleasant side effects that may include fainting, headaches, and dizziness. A few deaths have been reported due to overdoses. Both drugs are classified as stimulants.
Narcotics
The most commonly used narcotic drugs in the United States are the opiates, such as opium, heroin, and morphine. The term narcotic means sleep-inducing. In actuality, drugs classified as narcotics are more accurately called analgesics, or painkillers. The principal effect produced by narcotic drugs is a feeling of euphoria.
The opiates are all derived from the opium poppy, which grows in many parts of the world: Turkey, Southeast Asia, and Colombia have, in the recent past, been major sources of the opiates. The drug opium is the dried form of a milky substance that oozes from the seed pods after the petals fall from the flowers. It has been used for centuries.
Morphine is the main active ingredient of opium. It was first identified early in the 1800s and has been used extensively as a painkiller. Heroin was first synthesized from morphine in 1874. It was once thought to be a cure for morphine addiction, but later was also found to be addictive. Heroin is a more potent drug than morphine.
Opium is usually smoked, although it can be taken orally. Morphine and heroin are either snorted or injected into a muscle or into a vein (called “mainlining”), which maximizes the drugs’ effects.
Opiates affect the central nervous system and produce feelings of tranquility, drowsiness, or euphoria. They produce a sense of well-being that makes pain, anxiety, or depression seem unimportant. Blaze-Gosden (1987) notes that opiates
have been described as giving an orgasmlike rush or flash that lasts briefly but memorably. At the peak of the euphoria, the user has a feeling of exaggerated physical and mental comfort and well-being, a heightened feeling of buoyancy and bodily health, and a heightened feeling of being competent, in control, capable of any achievement, and being able to cope. (p. 95)
Overdoses can cause convulsions and coma and, in rare cases, death by respiratory failure. All opiates are now recognized as highly addictive. Opioid abuse is a serious public health issue in the United States and other countries. The abuse of opioids has reached epidemic proportions in recent years.
Opiate addiction occurs when the user takes the drug regularly for a period of time. Whether addiction will occur depends on the opiate drag taken, the strength of the dosage, the regularity of use, the characteristics of the user, and the length of time taken—sometimes as short as a few weeks. Users rapidly develop a tolerance, and may eventually need a dose that is up to 100 times stronger than a dose that would have been fatal during the initiation to the drug (Abadinsky, 2011).
The withdrawal process is very unpleasant. Symptoms include chills, cramps, sweating, nervousness, anxiety, running eyes and nose, dilated pupils, muscle aches, increased blood pressure, severe cramps, sometimes extreme nausea, and fever. Most addicts are obsessed with securing a fix to avoid these severe withdrawal symptoms.
Addiction to opiates is extremely difficult to break, partly because an intense craving for the drug may recur periodically for several months afterward.
Heroin is the most widely abused opiate. In addition to the above-mentioned effects, heroin slows the functioning parts of the brain. The user’s appetite and sex drive tend to be dulled. After an initial feeling of euphoria, the user generally becomes lethargic and stuporous.
When heroin was first discovered in the late 1880s, it was initially used as a painkiller, as a substitute for morphine, and as a drug taken by many to experience euphoria. A fair number of people became addicted, and in the early 1900s, laws were passed to prohibit its sale, possession, and distribution.
Heroin abuse continues to be regarded by some Americans as our most serious drug problem.
Prostitution among female addicts is also common.
Unsanitary injections of heroin may cause hepatitis and other infections. Communal use of needles can spread AIDS. Also, the high cost of maintaining a heroin habit—often more than $100 daily—may create huge financial problems for the user.
Because the price of illicit narcotic drugs is so high, organized crime has made huge profits in the smuggling and distribution of these drugs. Often, such drugs are diluted with dangerous impurities, which pose serious health hazards for the users. And unfortunately, addicts often participate in illegal activities in order to pay for their daily supply and avoid the withdrawal symptoms. A medication called Naloxone can reverse the effects of an overdose of heroin and some other types of painkillers. Naloxone is given by shot or nasal spray. First responders (such as police) often carry it—and have saved a number of lives.
A user injects heroin.
threerocksimages/ Shutterstock.com
Hallucinogens
Hallucinogens were popular as psychedelic drugs in the late 1960s. These drugs distort the user’s perceptions, creating hallucinations consisting of sensory impressions of sights and sounds that do not exist. The six hallucinogens most commonly used in this country are mescaline (peyote), psilocybin, psilocin, LSD, PCP, and ecstasy. All are taken orally—in capsule form, on a sugar cube, or licked from the back of a stamp.
Peyote is derived from a cactus plant. Mescaline is the synthetic form of peyote. Psilocybin and psilocin are found in approximately 90 different species of mushrooms. They are sometimes called “magic mushrooms.” Both peyote and psilocybin have had a long history of use by certain Native American tribes. Members of the Native American Church, a religious organization, have won the legal right to use peyote on ceremonial occasions (Robertson, 1980).
One of the most popular hallucinogens is LSD (lysergic acid diethylamide). LSD is a synthetic material derived from a fungus (ergot) that grows on rye and other plants. It is one of the most potent drugs known; a single ounce will make up to 300,000 doses.
The effects of LSD vary a great deal, depending on the expectations and psychological state of the user and the context in which it is taken. A given person may experience differing reactions on different occasions. The effects that may be experienced include the apparent “seeing” of sounds; “hearing” of color; colors seeming unusually bright and shifting kaleidoscopically; exaggerations of color and sound; and objects appearing to expand and contract. Users become highly suggestible and easily manipulated.
Bizarre hallucinations are also common. The experience may be peaceful or may result in panic. Some users have developed severe emotional disturbances that resulted in long-term hospitalization. Usually a “trip” will last 6 to 16 hours. Physical reactions include increased heartbeat, goose bumps, dilated pupils, hyperactivity, tremors, and increased sweating. Aftereffects include acute anxiety and depression. Flashbacks sometimes occur after the actual drug experience. Flashbacks may happen at any time and place, with no advance warning. If the user is driving a car when a flashback occurs, a life-threatening condition is present for the user and for others in the vicinity.
There is no evidence of physical or psychological dependence on LSD. Users do develop tolerance to the drug very rapidly as the effects can only be achieved in the future by larger doses. Cessation of use, even for a few days, will restore sensitivity to the drug, enabling the user to take smaller quantities to experience the effects.
Phencyclidine (better known as PCP or angel dust) was developed in the 1950s as an anesthetic. This medical use was soon terminated because patients displayed symptoms of severe emotional disturbance after receiving the drug. PCP is used legally today to tranquilize elephants and monkeys, as they apparently do not experience the adverse side effects.
PCP is primarily used by young people who are often unaware of its hazards. It is usually smoked, often after being sprinkled on a marijuana joint. It may also be sniffed, swallowed, or injected.
PCP is a very dangerous drug. It distorts the senses, disrupts balance, and leads to an inability to think clearly. Effects produced are similar to those of hallucinogens. Larger amounts of PCP may cause a person to become paranoid, lead to aggressive behavior, and may cause the user to display temporary symptoms of severe emotional disturbance. Continued use can lead to prolonged emotional disturbance. Overdose can result in coma or even death. Research has not yet concluded whether PCP induces physical and/or psychological dependence. The drug has the potential to be used (and abused) extensively, as it is relatively easy to prepare in a home laboratory from ingredients and recipes that are widely available. An additional danger of PCP is that even one-time users sometimes have flashbacks in which the hallucinations are reexperienced, even long after use has ceased.
The effects and dangers of mescaline, psilocybin, and psilocin are similar to those of LSD and PCP. The latter two, however, are the most potent of these hallucinogens.
Ecstasy was developed and patented in the early 1900s as a chemical forerunner in the synthesis of pharmaceuticals. Chemically, ecstasy is similar to a stimulant (amphetamine) and to a hallucinogen (mescaline), as it can produce both stimulant and psychedelic effects. Effects last for approximately three to six hours, although confusion, depression, sleep problems, anxiety, and paranoia have been reported to occur even weeks after the drug is taken. Ecstasy is sometimes used by young adults at all-night dance parties, such as “raves.” The stimulant effects of ecstasy enable users to dance for extended periods.
Ecstasy use in high doses can be extremely dangerous. It can lead to dehydration, hypertension, and heart or kidney failure. It can cause a marked increase in body temperature. Chronic use of ecstasy can produce long-lasting, perhaps permanent damage to the neurons that release serotonin, and consequent memory impairment.
Tobacco
The use of tobacco has now become recognized as one of the most damaging drug habits in the United States. Smoking can cause emphysema, cancer of the mouth, ulcers, and lung cancer, and it reduces life expectancy. It significantly increases the risk of strokes and heart disease, particularly in women who use birth control pills. Smoking by a pregnant woman can lead to miscarriage, premature birth, and underweight birth. Yet despite these widely publicized hazards, about 20 percent of the adult population continues to smoke (Abadinsky, 2011).
Tobacco is the number one killer drug. It contributes to far more deaths than all other drugs combined (Kornblum & Julian, 2012). Tobacco is estimated to contribute to more than 400,000 deaths per year in the United States. This is more than double the number of deaths attributed to alcohol abuse and hundreds of times the number of deaths due to cocaine. Most of the tobacco-related deaths are the results of diseases such as heart disease and lung cancer. However, more than 2,000 deaths per year result from fires caused by careless smoking (Kornblum & Julian, 2012). There is also substantial evidence that “passive smoking” (breathing the smoke from others’ cigarettes, cigars, or pipes) is also hazardous to health. One source of evidence for this is that young children whose parents smoke have a higher incidence of pneumonia and other respiratory disorders than young children whose parents do not smoke (Kornblum & Julian, 2012).
In 1988, the surgeon general of the United States, C. Everett Koop, declared that tobacco is as addictive as heroin or cocaine (Rosellini, 1988). Koop noted that people addicted to tobacco are drug addicts. The attitudes of Americans toward tobacco use are gradually becoming more negative. In the past two decades, a movement has developed that is increasingly viewing tobacco as a dangerous drug, and non-smokers are increasingly considering smokers to be pariahs. Some authorities now predict that cigarettes will someday be outlawed in many countries.
Tobacco is highly habit-forming. Nicotine is the primary drag in tobacco. Nicotine has remarkable capacities—it can act as a depressant, a stimulant, or a tranquilizer. Smokers quickly develop a tolerance for nicotine and often gradually increase consumption to one or two packs or more a day.
Special clinics and a variety of other educational and therapeutic programs help people quit smoking. Users undergoing withdrawal become restless, irritable, depressed, and have an intense craving to smoke. Studies show that only a minority of smokers who make determined efforts to quit actually succeed (Kornblum & Julian, 2012).
At the same time that the government is widely publicizing the hazards of drugs, the Department of Agriculture is subsidizing tobacco farmers. While educational programs urge people not to smoke, tobacco companies are permitted to advertise that cigarette smoking is “cool” and “sexy,” connoting rugged manliness in men and social sophistication in women.
In the biggest civil settlement in U.S. history, tobacco companies agreed in 1998 to pay more than $240 billion to the 50 states to settle claims against the industry for health-care costs blamed on tobacco-related illnesses. The payments to the states, which began in 2000, will be distributed over 25 years. A portion of the funds will go to a foundation to study how to reduce teen smoking. A major objective of the deal is to discourage children from smoking by imposing restrictions on advertising and sharp limits on the ways cigarettes are marketed.
Marijuana
Marijuana, or “grass” or “pot,” comes from a variety of the hemp plant, Cannabis sativa. This hemp plant grows throughout the world, and its fibers are legally used to produce rope, twine, paper, and clothing.
The main use of the plant now, however, centers on its dried leaves—marijuana—and on its dried resin—hashish. Both may be taken orally, but are usually smoked. Hashish is several times more potent than marijuana.
The effects of marijuana (and hashish) vary, as with any other drug, according to the mood and personality of the user, circumstances, and the quality of the drug. The effects are rather complicated and may induce a variety of emotions.
Many of the effects are produced because marijuana has sedative properties and creates in the user a sense of relaxed well-being and freedom from inhibition. There may also be mild hallucinations that create a dreamy state in which the user may experience fantasies. Smokers become highly suggestible and may engage in actions (such as sexual activities) in which they would not otherwise be involved. The drug may induce feelings of joyousness, hilarity, and sociability. It may lead to talkativeness, disconnected ideas, a feeling of floating, and laughter. It may also intensify sensory stimulation, create feelings of enhanced awareness and creativity, and increase self-confidence. A person may gradually experience some of these emotions, followed by others.
The threat of physical dependence is rated low, while the threat of psychological dependence is rated as moderate. Withdrawal, however, may be very unpleasant for the user, who may suffer from insomnia, hyperactivity, and loss of appetite.
The short-term physical effects of marijuana are minor: a reddening of the eyes, dryness of the throat and the mouth, and a slight rise in heart rate. There is some evidence that continued use by young teenagers can result in these users becoming apathetic, noncompetitive, and uninterested in school and other activities.
Frequent users may have impairments of short-term memory and concentration, and of judgment and coordination. They may find it difficult to read, to understand what they read, and to follow moving objects with their eyes. Users may feel confident that their coordination, reactions, and perceptions are quite normal while they are still experiencing the effects of the drug; under these conditions, such activities as driving a vehicle may have tragic consequences for them and for others.
An overdose of the active ingredients of cannabis can lead to panic, fear, confusion, suspiciousness, fatigue, and sometimes aggressive acts. One of the most frequently voiced concerns about marijuana is that it will be a stepping-stone to using other drugs. About 60 percent of marijuana users progress to using other drugs (Kornblum & Julian, 2009). However, other factors, such as peer pressure, are probably more crucial determinants of what mind-altering drugs people will progress to. In addition, those who experiment with one drug are more likely to experiment with another.
The attempt to restrict the use of marijuana through legislation has been described as a “second prohibition,” which has had results similar to those of the first, because a large number of people are using the drug and disregarding the law. The unfortunate effect of laws that outlaw the use of marijuana is that they criminalize the private acts of many people who are otherwise law-abiding. Such laws also foster the development of organized crime and the illicit drug market.
For years, debates have raged about the hazards of long-term marijuana use. Some studies claim it causes brain damage, chromosome damage, irritation of the bronchial tract and lungs, and a reduction in male hormone levels. These findings have not been confirmed by other studies, and so the controversy rages on.
One of the reversible, short-term health effects of marijuana use is impairment of motor coordination, which adversely affects driving or machine-operating skills. The drug also impairs short-term memory, slows learning abilities, and may cause periods of confusion and anxiety. Smoking marijuana may affect the lungs and respiratory system in much the same way that tobacco smoke does, and may be a factor in causing bronchitis and precancerous changes.
Marijuana may be useful in treating glaucoma, asthma, certain seizure disorders and spastic conditions, and in controlling severe nausea caused by cancer chemotherapy. In 1996, voters in California and Arizona approved the medical use of marijuana—for example, for treating symptoms of AIDS, cancer, and other diseases.
In 2001, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled that federal law definitely classifies the use of marijuana as illegal, and that marijuana has no medical benefits worthy of an exception. The high court did not strike down state laws allowing medical use of marijuana, but it left those distributing the drug for that purpose open to prosecution. In 2005, the Court upheld the power of Congress to legislate to prohibit the possession and use of marijuana for medical purposes, even in the states that permit it. Again, this ruling does not invalidate laws in the states that have approved medical marijuana, but it does deflate these states’ power to protect users and doctors who prescribe the drug. The controversy over the medical use of marijuana continues to be an issue.
At the time of the revision of this text, 28 states and the District of Columbia have enacted laws to legalize medical marijuana. In recent years Colorado, Washington, Alaska, California, Massachusetts, Nevada, and Oregon have legalized the sale of marijuana.
Ethical Questions 11.5
1. Do you know someone who is abusing one or more drugs? If yes, what might you do or say to help this person?
Anabolic Steroids
Anabolic steroids are synthetic male hormones, derivatives of testosterone. Although steroids have been banned for use by athletes in organized sports competition, steroids are still being used by some athletes, bodybuilders, and teenagers who want to look more muscular and brawny.
From early childhood, many boys have been socialized to believe that the ideal man looks something like Mr. Universe. Many adolescents who use steroids want to be sports champions. Some young male bodybuilders who use steroids to promote tissue growth and to endure arduous workouts routinely flood their bodies with 100 times the testosterone they produce naturally (Abadinsky, 2011). Most steroid users are middle class and white.
Steroid-enhanced physiques are a hazardous prize. Steroids can cause temporary acne and balding, upset hormonal production, and damage the heart and kidneys. Doctors suspect they may contribute to liver cancer and atherosclerosis (Toufexis, 1989). In teens, the drugs can stunt growth by accelerating bone maturation. Male steroid users have also experienced a shrinking of the testicles, impotence, a yellowing of the skin and eyes, and the development of female-type breasts. In young boys, steroids can have the effect of painfully enlarging the sex organs. In female users, the voice deepens permanently, breasts shrink, periods become irregular, the clitoris swells in size, and hair is lost from the head but grows on the face and body.
Steroid users are prone to moodiness, depression, and irritability. Users are apt to experience difficulty in tolerating stress. After prolonged use, some formerly easygoing males experience raging hostility, which may be displayed in a variety of ways—ranging from being obnoxious to continually provoking physical fights. Some users become so depressed that they commit suicide.
Steroid users generally experience considerable difficulty in terminating steroids after prolonged use. One reason is that bulging biceps and ham-hock thighs soon fade when steroid use is discontinued. Concurrent with the decline in muscle mass is the psychological feeling of being less powerful and less manly. Most users who try to quit wind up back on the drug. A self-image that relies on a steroid-enhanced physique is difficult to change. (See Highlight 11.8 on the use of performance-enhancing drugs in baseball.)
Highlight 11.8
Use of Performance-Enhancing Drugs in Baseball
On March 30, 2006, baseball commissioner Bud Selig asked former senator George Mitchell to investigate steroid use in baseball. On December 13, 2007, Mitchell released his report. The report found steroid use to be rampant among former and current players.
Eighty-six former and current players were named in the report. (It is thought that there are many other users among baseball players who have not yet been identified.) Steroids have been on baseball’s banned substance list since 1991; however, testing of Major League players did not begin until 2003.
Seven Most Valuable Player Award winners were named in the report, along with 31 All-Stars—at least one for every position. Some of the biggest names in baseball are alleged to have been users, including Barry Bonds, Roger Clemens, Mark McGwire, David Justice, Jason Giambi, Gary Sheffield, Miguel Tejada, Lenny Dykstra, Rafael Palmeiro, Andy Pettitte, Chuck Knoblauch, and Alex Rodriguez. (Some of these players have denied, under oath, that they used steroids.)
To avoid testing positive for steroids, many athletes looking for an edge have now turned to human growth hormone (HGH) to build muscle. It is difficult to detect, and the best test available has a window of detection of only 48–72 hours. Like steroids, HGH is a performance-enhancing drug (PED).
In 2013, there was an investigation by Major League Baseball of Biogenesis of America, a clinic in Florida. Evidence was obtained that this health clinic provided performance-enhancing drugs to a number of baseball players. In the summer of 2013, Ryan Braun was suspended for 65 games, and Alex Rodriguez was suspended for the entire 2014 season for using PEDs. Twelve other players were given 50-game suspensions.
Every year since 2014 there have been additional major league baseball players suspended for using performance-enhancing drugs. There have also been a number of basketball players in the National Basketball Association, and a number of Football players in the National Football League, who have been suspended for using the performance-enhancing drugs.
11-9cDependence on Alcohol and Other Drugs
Habit-forming drugs can lead to dependence, which is a tendency or craving for the repeated use or compulsive use (not necessarily abuse) of a chemical. This dependence may be physical, psychological, or both. When physical dependence occurs, the user will generally experience bodily withdrawal symptoms when drug use is discontinued. Withdrawal may take many forms and range in severity from slight trembling to fatal convulsions.
When psychological dependence occurs, the user feels psychological discomfort if use is terminated. Dependent users tend to believe that they will use the chemical for the rest of their lives as a regular part of social or recreational activities. They question whether the desired emotional state can be achieved without the use of the chemical, and they have a preoccupation with thinking and talking about the chemical and activities associated with using it.
Users also generally develop a tolerance for some drugs, which means they have to take increasing amounts over time to achieve a given level of effect. Tolerance depends partly on the type of drug, because some drugs (such as aspirin) do not create tolerance.
Why Do People Use and Abuse Alcohol and Other Drugs?
The effects of using drugs are numerous, ranging from feeling light-headed to death through overdosing. Drag abuse may lead to deterioration in health, relationship problems, automobile accidents, child abuse, spouse abuse, loss of job, low self-esteem, loss of social status, financial disaster, divorce, and arrests and convictions.
A distinction needs to be made between responsible drug use and drug abuse. Many drugs do have beneficial effects when used responsibly; aspirin relieves pain, alcohol helps people relax, tranquilizers reduce anxiety, antidepressant drugs reduce depression, amphetamines increase alertness, morphine is a painkiller, and marijuana is useful in treating glaucoma. Irresponsible drug use is abuse, which was defined earlier in this chapter.
Why do people abuse drugs? The reasons are numerous. Drug companies widely advertise the beneficial effects of their products. The media (such as television and movies) glamorize the mind-altering effects. Many popular songs highlight drinking. Bars and cocktail lounges have become centers for socializing, and they promote drinking. Through such channels, Americans have become socialized to accept drug usage as a part of daily living. Socialization patterns lead many people to use drugs, and for some the use is a stepping-stone to abuse.
Attitudes toward drug use also encourage abuse. For example, some college students believe they should get blitzed or stoned after a tough exam. Ryne Duren (1985), former pitcher for the New York Yankees, asked this question: “I started becoming an alcoholic at age four, even though I had my first drink at age nine—how can this be?” Duren went on to explain that at a very young age he became socialized to believe that a real man was “someone who could drink others under the table,” and that the way to have fun was to get high on alcohol.
People abuse drugs for a variety of reasons. Some people build up a tolerance to a drug and then increase the dosage to obtain a high. Physical and psychological dependence usually leads to abuse. People with intense unwanted emotions (such as loneliness, anxiety, feelings of inadequacy, guilt, depression, insecurity, and resentment) may turn to drugs. For many abusers, their drug of choice becomes their best friend because they tend to personalize it and value it more highly than they value their friends. The drug is something that they can always count on to relieve pain or give them the kind of high they desire. Many abusers become so highly attached to their drug that they choose to continue using it even though it leads to deterioration of health, divorce, discharges from jobs, automobile accidents, alienation from children, loss of friends, depletion of financial resources, and court appearances. Drug abusers usually feel they need their drug as a crutch to make it through the day.
Abusers develop an intimate relationship with their drug of choice. Even though this relationship is unhealthy, the drug plays a primary role in the abuser’s life, dictates a certain lifestyle, fills a psychological need, and more often than not takes precedence over family, friends, and work. Most abusers deny their drug usage is creating problems for them, because they know that admitting they have a drug problem means they will have to end their relationship with their best friend, and they deeply believe they need their drug to handle their daily concerns and pressures. Drug abusers are apt to use a number of defense mechanisms in order to continue using drugs. They rationalize adverse consequences of drug abuse (such as the loss of a job) by twisting or distorting reality to explain the consequences of their behavior while under the influence. They minimize the adverse consequences of their drug use. They use projection to place the blame for their problems on others; for example, “If you had a wife like mine, you’d drink too.”
Theories about Drug Use
A variety of theories have been offered as to why people use drugs. Biological theories assert that physiological changes produced by the drugs eventually generate an irresistible craving for the drug. Some biological theories also postulate that some people are predisposed by their genetic structure to abuse certain types of drugs. For example, some authorities believe that genes play a role in predisposing some people to alcoholism. Behavioral theories hold that people use drugs because they find them pleasurable and continue to use them because doing so prevents withdrawal distress. Interactionist theories maintain that drug use is learned from interaction with others in our culture. For example, people drink alcohol because drinking is widely accepted. Interactionist theories assert that those who use illegal drugs such as marijuana or cocaine have contact with a drug subculture that encourages them to experiment with illegal drugs.
11-9dInteraction in Family Systems: A Theoretical Approach to Drug Abuse
Wegscheider (1981) maintains that chemical dependency is a family disease that involves and affects each family member. Although she focuses on the families of alcoholics, much of what she says may also apply to the families of other types of chemical substance abusers.
She cites several rules that tend to characterize the families of drug abusers. First, the dependent person’s alcohol use becomes “the most important thing in the family’s life” (Wegscheider, 1981, p. 81). The abuser’s top priority is getting enough alcohol, and the family’s top priorities are the abuser, the abuser’s behavior, and keeping the abuser away from alcohol. The goals of the abuser and of the rest of the family are at completely opposite poles.
A second rule in an alcoholic family is that alcohol is not the cause of the problem. Denial is paramount. A third family rule maintains that the dependent person is not responsible for his or her behavior and that the alcohol causes the behavior. There is always someone or something else to blame. Another rule dictates that no one should rock the boat, no matter what. Family members strive to protect the family’s status quo, even when the family is miserable. Yet other rules concern forbidding discussion of the family problem either within or outside of the family, and consistently avoiding stating one’s true feelings. Wegscheider (1981) maintains that these rules protect the dependent person from taking responsibility for his or her behavior, and that the rules serve to maintain the drinking problem.
Wegscheider (1981) goes on to identify several roles that family members typically play. In addition to the chemically dependent person, there is the chief enabler, the family hero, the scapegoat, the lost child, and the mascot.
The chief enabler’s main purpose is to assume the primary responsibility for family functioning. The abuser typically continues to lose control and relinquishes responsibility. The chief enabler takes on more and more responsibility and begins making more and more of the family’s decisions. A chief enabler is often the parent or spouse of the chemically dependent person.
Conditions often continue to deteriorate as the chemically dependent person loses control. A positive influence is needed to offset the negative. The family hero fulfills this role. The family hero is often the person who does well at everything he or she tries. The hero works hard at making the family look as though it is functioning better than it is. In this way, the family hero provides the family with self-worth.
Another role typically played by someone in the family is that of scapegoat. Although the alcohol abuse is the real problem, a family rule mandates that this fact must be denied. Therefore, the blame must be placed elsewhere. Frequently, another family member is blamed for the problem. The scapegoat often behaves in negative ways that draw attention to him or her (e.g., the person gets caught stealing, runs away, or becomes extremely withdrawn). The scapegoat’s role is to distract attention away from the chemically dependent person and onto something else. This role helps the family avoid addressing the problem of chemical dependency.
Often, someone plays the role of lost child. This is a person who seems relatively uninvolved with the rest of the family and never causes any trouble. The lost child’s purpose is to provide relief from some of the pain the family is suffering. At least there is someone in the family who neither requires much attention nor causes any stress. The lost child is simply there.
Finally, chemically dependent families often have someone playing the role of mascot. The mascot is someone who has a good sense of humor and appears not to take anything seriously. Despite how much the mascot might be suffering inside, he or she provides a little fun for the family.
In summary, chemical dependency is a problem affecting the entire family. Each family member suffers from the chemical dependency, yet each assumes a role in order to maintain the family’s status quo and help the family survive. Family members are driven to maintain these roles no matter what happens. The roles eventually become associated with survival.
11-9eThe Application of Theory to Client Situations: Treatment for the Chemically Dependent Person and His or Her Family
One of the first tasks in treatment is for the chemically dependent person to take responsibility for his or her own behavior. The abuser must acknowledge that he or she has a problem before beginning to solve it. Several concepts are critical in working with the family (Wegscheider, 1981). Family members must first come to realize the extent of the problem. They need to identify the chemical abuse as their major problem. Additionally, they need to learn about and evaluate their family dynamics. They need to evaluate their own behavior and break out of the roles that have been maintaining the chemical abuse. The chief enabler, in particular, must stop making excuses and assuming the chemically dependent person’s responsibilities. If the chemically dependent person is sick from a hangover and cannot make it to school or work the next day, it must be that person’s responsibility, not a parent’s or spouse’s, to call in sick.
Family members eventually learn to confront the chemically dependent person and give him or her honest information about his or her behavior. For instance, they are encouraged to tell the dependent exactly how he or she behaved while having a blackout. If the dependent person hit another family member while drunk, this fact needs to be confronted. The confrontation should occur not in an emotional manner but rather in a factual one.
The family also needs to learn about the progression of the disease. We’ve already discussed some characteristics of drug dependence. There is a typical progression of an alcoholic’s feelings and behavior. At first, only occasional relief drinking occurs. Drinking becomes more constant. The dependent person then begins to drink in secret and to feel guilty about drinking. Memory blackouts begin to occur and gradually increase in frequency. The dependent person feels worse and worse about his or her drinking behavior, but seems to have less and less control over it. Finally, the drinking begins to seriously affect the person’s work, family, and social relationships. A job may be lost or all school classes flunked. Perhaps family members leave or throw the dependent person out. The dependent person’s thinking becomes more and more impaired.
Eventually, the dependent person hits rock bottom. Nothing seems to be left but despair and failure, and the dependent person admits complete defeat. It is at this point that the dependent person may make one of two choices. He or she will either continue on the downward spiral to a probable death related to alcohol or may desperately struggle. Typically, during this period, the dependent one will make some progress only to slip back again. Vicious cycles of drinking and stopping are often apparent.
Finally, the dependent person may express an honest desire for help. A dependent person on the path to recovery will stop drinking. Meeting with other people who are also alcoholics or addicts is very helpful. Support from others is especially critical at this time in the process of recovery.
Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) is a self-help organization that has provided the support, information, and guidance necessary for many dependent people to continue on in their recovery. The nationwide group is made up of recovering alcoholics. The organization’s success seems to rest on several principles. First, other people who really understand are available to give the recovering dependent person friendship and warmth. Each new member is given a sponsor who can be called for support at any time during the day or night. Whenever the dependent person feels depressed or tempted, there is always the sponsor to turn to.
AA provides the recovering alcoholic with a new social group and activities. The recovering alcoholic can no longer participate in the drinking activity. Old friends with well-established drinking patterns usually become difficult to associate with; often social pressure is applied to drink again. AA provides a respite from such pressure and the opportunity to meet new people, if such an opportunity is needed. For more on AA, see Highlight 11.9.
An AA Meeting
Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) is a remarkable human organization. Its chapters now cover every part of the United States and most of the world. There is more caring and concern among the members for one another than in most other organizations. Group members work together to save each other’s lives and to restore their self-respect and sense of worth. AA has helped more people overcome their drinking problems than all other therapies and methods combined.
AA is supported entirely by voluntary donations from the members at meetings. There are no dues or fees. Each chapter is autonomous, and free of any outside control by the AA headquarters in New York City or by any other body. There is no hierarchy in the chapters. The only office is that of the group secretary. This person chooses a chairperson for each meeting, makes the arrangements for meetings, and sees that the building is open, the chairs are set up, and the tea and coffee put on. The group secretary holds office for only a limited time period; after a month or two the secretary’s responsibilities are transferred to another member.
The only requirement for membership in AA is a desire to stop drinking. All other variables (such as economic status, social status, race, religion) do not count. Members can even attend meetings while drunk, as long as they do not disturb the meeting.
AA meetings are held in a variety of physical locations—churches, temples, private homes, business offices, schools, libraries, or banquet rooms of restaurants. The physical location is unimportant.
When a newcomer first arrives, he or she will usually find people setting up chairs, placing ashtrays, putting free literature on a table, and making coffee. Other members will be socializing in small groups. Someone is apt to introduce himself or herself and other members to the newcomer. If someone is shy about attending the first meeting alone, he or she can call AA and someone will take the person to the meeting and introduce him or her to the other members.
When the meeting starts, everyone sits down around tables or in rows of chairs. The secretary and/or chairperson, and one or more speakers, sit at the head of the table or on a platform if the meeting is in a hall.
The chairperson opens with a moment of silence, which is followed by a group recitation of a nondenominational prayer. The chairperson then reads or gives a brief description of Alcoholics Anonymous and may read or refer to a section of the book Alcoholics Anonymous (a book that describes the principles of AA and gives a number of case examples).
Then the chairperson usually asks if anyone is attending for the first, second, or third time. The new people are asked to introduce themselves according to the following: “Hello, my name is [first name], and this is my first [second, third] meeting.” Those who do not want to introduce themselves are not pressured to do so. New members are the lifeblood of AA, and are the most important people at the meeting in the members’ eyes. (All the longer-term members remember their first meeting and how frightened and inhibited they felt.)
If the group is small, the chairperson usually then asks the longer-term members to introduce themselves and say a few words. If the group is large, the chairperson asks volunteers among the longer-term members to introduce themselves by saying a few words. Each member usually begins by saying, “My name is [first name]; I am an alcoholic,” and then discloses a few thoughts or feelings. (The members do not have to say they are alcoholic, unless they choose to do so. Each member sooner or later generally chooses to say this, to remind himself or herself that he or she is an addictive drinker who is recovering and that alcoholism is a lifelong disease that must be battled daily.) Those who introduce themselves usually say whatever they feel will be most helpful to the newcomers. They may talk about their first meeting, or their first week without drinking, or something designed to make the newcomers more comfortable. Common advice for the newcomers is to get the phone numbers of other members after the meeting so that they can call a member when they feel a strong urge to drink. AA considers such help as vital in recovering. The organization, believes members can remain sober only through receiving the help of people who care about them and who understand what they are struggling with.
AA members want newcomers to call when they have the urge to drink, at any time day or night. The members sincerely believe that by helping others they are helping themselves to stay sober and grow. Members indicate that such calling is the newcomer’s ace in the hole against the first drink, if everything else fails. They also inform newcomers that it is good to call others when lonely, just to chat.
In his own words, a newcomer explains how AA began to help him:
Here’s what happened to me. When I finally hit bottom and called AA for help, a U.S. Air Force officer came to tell me about AA. For the first time in my life, I was talking to someone who obviously really understood my problem, as four psychiatrists had not, and he took me to my first meeting, sober but none too steady. It was amazing. I went home afterward and didn’t have a drink. I went again the next night, still dry, and the miracle happened a second time. The third morning my wife went off to work, my boys to school, and I was alone. Suddenly I wanted a drink more than I had ever wanted one in my life. I tried walking for a while. No good. The feeling was getting worse. I tried reading. Couldn’t concentrate. Then I became really desperate, and although I wasn’t used to calling strangers for help, I called Fred, an AAer who had said that he was retired and would welcome a call at any time. We talked a bit; he could see that talking on the phone wasn’t going to be enough. He said, “Look, I’ve got an idea. Let me make a phone call, and I’ll call you back in ten minutes. Can you hold on that long?” I said I could. He called back in eight, asking me to come over to his house. We talked endlessly, went out for a sandwich together, and finally my craving for a drink went away. We went to a meeting. Next morning I was fine again and now I had gone four days without a drink.
After such discussion, speakers may describe their life of drinking, how drinking almost destroyed their life, how they were introduced to AA, their struggles to remain sober one day at a time, how AA has helped them, and what their life is like now.
At the end of a meeting, the chairperson may ask the newcomers if they wish to say anything. If they do not wish to say much, that is okay. No one is pressured to self-disclose what they do not want to reveal.
Meetings usually end after the chairperson makes announcements. (The collection basket for donations is also passed around. New members are not expected, and frequently not allowed, to donate any money until after the third meeting. If someone cannot afford to make a donation, none is expected.) The group then stands, usually holding hands, and repeats in unison the Lord’s Prayer. Those who do not want to join in this prayer are not pressured to do so. After a meeting, the members socialize. This is a time for newcomers to meet new friends and to get phone numbers.
AA is a cross section of people from all walks of life. Anonymity is emphasized. It is the duty of every member to respect the anonymity of every person who attends. Concern for anonymity is a major reason for two kinds of meetings in AA, open and closed. Anyone is welcome at open meetings. Only people with drinking problems are allowed at closed meetings. Therefore, if a person feels uncomfortable going to an open meeting and has a drinking problem, then closed meetings are an alternative.
Members do not have to believe in God to get help from AA. Many members have lost, or never had, a faith in God. AA does, however, assert that faith in some higher power is a tremendous help in recovery because such a belief offers a source of limitless power, hope, and support whenever one feels one has come to the end of one’s resources.
How does AA help? New members, after years of feelings of rejection, loneliness, misunderstanding, guilt, and embarrassment, find they are not alone. They feel understood by others who are in similar predicaments. Instead of being rejected, they are welcomed. They see that others who had serious drinking problems are now sober, apparently happy that way, and are in the process of recovering. It gives them hope that they do not need alcohol to get through the day and that they can learn to enjoy life without alcohol. They find that others sincerely care about them, want to help them, and have the knowledge to do so.
At meetings, they see every sort of personal problem brought up and discussed openly, with suggestions for solutions being offered from others who have encountered similar problems. They can observe that group members bring up “unspeakable” problems without apparent embarrassment, and that others listen and treat them with respect and consideration. Such acceptance gradually leads newcomers to share their personal problems and to receive constructive suggestions for solutions. Such disclosure leads individuals to look more deeply into themselves and to ventilate deep personal feelings. With the support of other members, newcomers gradually learn how to counter strong desires to drink, through such processes as calling other members.
Newcomers learn that AA is the means of staying away from that first drink. AA also serves to reduce the stress that compels people to drink by providing a comfortable and relaxed environment and by having members help each other, to find ways to reduce the stresses encountered in daily living. AA meetings and members become a safe port that is always there when storms start raging. AA helps members to be programmed from negative thinking to positive thinking. The more positive a member’s thinking becomes, the more stress is relieved, the better he or she begins to feel about himself or herself, the more the compulsion to drink decreases, and the more often and more effectively the person begins to take positive actions to solve his or her problems.
AA also helps the recovering person to understand that alcoholism is a disease. This means that the alcoholic cannot cure himself or herself. He or she need no longer feel guilty about being an alcoholic. What must be done is to stop drinking. AA also encourages introspection. Members are encouraged to look inside themselves and face whatever they see. They are urged to acknowledge that they have flaws and will never be perfect. This perspective often helps people to stop fleeing from the pain of reality and hiding in alcohol or drugs. It helps them to redefine expectations for themselves and to gain control. Within this context, people often can also acknowledge their strengths. They can learn that they do have some control over their own behavior and that they can accomplish things for themselves and for others.
Organizations are also available to provide support for other family members and to give them information and suggestions. For example, AA is an organization for the families of alcoholics, and Alateen is specifically for teenagers within these families. Likewise, self-help organizations similar to AA, such as Narcotics Anonymous, exist to help other types of chemical substance abusers.
Today may treatment approaches are available to chemical substance abusers. Types of facilities and treatment include inpatient and outpatient treatment programs at community mental health centers, chemical abuse rehabilitation centers and medical hospitals, halfway houses, and chemical treatment programs such as Antabuse. When Antabuse is taken, a person who then drinks an alcoholic beverage will soon become flushed, experience a rapid pulse, and feel nauseated, often to the point of regurgitation.
Treatment programs almost always advocate that abusers abstain totally from their drug of choice in the future, because research indicates that even one use will return the abuser to drug abuse. It should also be noted that when abusers complete a treatment program they are urged to view themselves as recovering, rather than being cured, because they must continually work on abstaining in order to avoid the temptations of using.
It is important that those receiving treatment also make lifestyle changes. The social activities of users almost always revolve around using the drug of choice; to successfully abstain, recovering abusers need to form new friendships and establish drug-free social activities and interests. Making such lifestyle changes is extremely difficult. Many recovering addicts fail in making these changes and then return to using their drug of choice.
Roles assumed by social workers in treating addicts and family members include counselor, group facilitator, broker, program initiator, and educator. The role of a social worker in using motivational interviewing clients who are reluctant to admit they have a behavioral or emotional problem is described in Highlight 11.10.
Highlight 11.10
Motivational Interviewing
One of the biggest reality shocks of a “new” social worker is that many, perhaps most, clients are simply not motivated to make the necessary changes to improve their emotional and physical well-being. Examples are infinite. An alcoholic with accompanying serious health problems will often chose to continue to drink. A person who is depressed because his/her spouse recently attained a divorce will wallow in misery and not seek to make life changes that will bring happiness. A compulsive gambler who has lost a lot of money will continue gambling. A person with a stressful job will not seek to learn and practice stress management techniques. A person who is imprisoned for selling drugs may return to selling drugs again upon being released from incarceration.
A number of years ago it was thought that the best way to motivate a client who does not want to make constructive changes to improve his or her well-being was to hold an “intervention” with that person. For example, if one has a serious drinking problem it was thought that his or her counselor should gather as much evidence as possible, and enlist friends and relatives, to have a meeting with the alcoholic to confront the person with all the evidence and incidents of the negative effects of drinking; which might include health challenges, relationship issues, loss of jobs, physical and verbal altercations, and arrests for driving under the influence. Sometimes such an intervention did prove beneficial, but often it did not. For alcoholics, drinking has become their “best friend,” which they will not give up. So—how does a social worker seek to motivate a client to make changes, when that client denies that a problem exists, and refuses to make changes?
Social workers need to recognize that people go through a process when they make positive changes in their lives. This process has been conceptualized by Prochaska and DiClemente (1982) as involving the following five stages:
Brief Definition of Each Stage of Change
|
Stage |
Basic Definition |
|
1. PRECONTEMPLATION |
A person is not seeing a need for a lifestyle change. |
|
2. CONTEMPLATION |
A person is considering making a change but has not decided yet. |
|
3. PREPARATION |
A person has decided to make changes and is considering how to make them. |
|
4. ACTION |
A person is actively doing something to change. |
|
5. MAINTENANCE |
A person is working to maintain the change or new lifestyle. There may be some temptations to return to the former behavior or even small relapses. |
The aim of motivational interviewing is to help clients who are in stages 1, 2, or 3 to move toward stages 4 and 5. It should be noted that clients are apt to move back and forth between these stages. Someone at stage 1, for example, may recognize that he does in fact have a problem, and move, for a while, to stage 4 where he is actively making some constructive changes; then he may regress and return to stage 1 or 2; then move at a later date to stage 3 or 4; and so on.
Motivational interviewing is not a specific technique, but rather is a style of interacting with clients, with the objective of calmly encouraging clients to move towards stages 4 and 5. William R. Miller and Stephen Rollnick (1981) are generally recognized as the founders of motivational interviewing. They developed this approach in their work with substance abusers who had high relapse rates while being in treatment. Motivational interviewers seek to convey understanding of the challenges that clients face in recognizing they have an issue, and being supportive of the efforts that clients need to make in order to make constructive changes. Motivational interviewing is now used with a wide variety of clients, including: substance abusers, those with an eating disorder, depressed persons, those with a gambling addiction, persons with anger management issues, and those with a dysfunctional sexual addiction.
Key principles of motivational interviewing are the following:
· Express Empathy: The social worker needs to place him/herself, as much as possible, into the “shoes” of the client. The social worker needs to focus on what a client (who is resisting making positive changes) is thinking and feeling, and then convey to the client his or her understanding of what the client is thinking and feeling. When clients feel they are being understood, they are much more apt to further open up and share their inner most thoughts—which may well lead them to start to move from stages 1, 2 or 3 to stage 4. When they feel support and understanding from the social worker, clients become more comfortable with examining their ambivalence about putting forth the efforts to make constructive changes. An example of a social worker’s empathetic response to a client who has a drinking problem but is reluctant to taking action to reduce his drinking is the following, “In a sense, alcohol has become your best friend, as it helps to ease the pain of unwanted emotions that you feel; but are you aware that that there are other ways (besides drinking) that we might explore to help you make it through each day?”
· Develop Discrepancy: Clients tend to be more motivated to make constructive changes when they perceive a discrepancy between where they are, and where they want to be. A social worker can assist a client in recognizing the discrepancies between where their current behavior is at and what their short- and long-term goals are by gently asking questions. For example, with a client who has a drinking issue, the social worker can ask questions like the following:
· —
“Could you tell me some good things that drinking does for you?” After the client responds, the social worker asks, “Could you now tell me some less good things about your drinking?”
· —
“Do you remember what your life was like before you started having problems with drinking?”
· —
“Do you believe your life might improve if you stopped drinking?”
· —
“Have you thought about what your life might be like 10 years from now if you continue to drink as much as you do?”
· Roll with Resistance: The social worker expects resistance with motivational interviewing. The social worker does not fight the resistance, but seeks “to roll with it.” Statements made by a client that indicate resistance are not challenged. Instead, the worker uses the client’s momentum to further explore the client’s views. A useful technique when a client is resisting change is using a reflection. A reflection enables the worker to respond to resistance with a nonresistant response by reflecting the client’s statement in a neutral form. The following is an example with a client who drinks too much: “Let’s talk about the incident when you spent the night in jail after receiving a citation for driving under the influence.” The client responds, “What’s to talk about? The police and you have already concluded that it was all my fault.” The worker responds with the refection, “So you feel like your opinion does not matter?” instead of confronting the client with the facts contained in the police report.
Rolling with resistance prevents confrontations with clients on issues they have.
· Support Self-Efficacy: Self-efficacy is one’s belief in one’s ability to succeed in specific situations. One’s self-efficacy plays a major role in how one approaches tasks, goals, and challenges. In motivational interviewing, the social worker focuses on helping clients stay motivated to put forth the efforts to move toward stages 4 and 5. A competent social worker knows, and conveys to the client, that there is no one right way to change. The worker wants the client to develop the argument for change, and to also develop the courses of action to be taken for making changes. The more a client develops his or her own strategies for attaining change, the more the client will be committed to implementing those strategies.
One technique for assisting the client to assess his or her readiness for change is the following “Readiness to Change” Ruler: The worker shows the client the following scale and asks him or her to state the number that best reflects how ready, at the present time, he or she is to change his or her dysfunctional behavior:
On the following Scale (Show Client) from 1 to 5, What Number Best Reflects How Ready You Are at the Present Time to Change Your (The Behavior)? Circle One
|
Not Ready to Change |
Thinking of Changing |
Undecided/Uncertain |
Somewhat Ready |
Very Ready to Change |
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
It is important for the worker to identify the client’s readiness to change, as the worker needs to focus his or her attention on the same level of readiness to change that the client is at, in order to minimize resistance and gain cooperation. For example, if the client states he is “Thinking of changing his drinking behavior” the worker may make progress by gently asking, “What do you see as the benefits to reducing the number of drinks that you have?” And, after the client responds, the worker may then ask, “Could you tell me your thoughts as to why you still want to continue drinking as much as you do?” Such communication may lead the client to further explore why he continues to drink to excess, and may increase his chances to making a commitment to moving toward stage 4—taking some actions to reduce the amount of alcohol that he consumes.
· Encourages Supportive Relationships: The worker encourages the client to develop supportive relationships with friends and relatives who believe in the person’s potential to improve. Also, self-help groups (such as AA for alcoholics) are also a critical source of support. Members of self-help groups have experienced similar difficulties as the client, and are on a similar journey of recovery; they can help the client develop coping strategies for the challenges that arise.
· Finding Meaning in Life: The worker assists the client in developing a sense of meaning to living, which is important in sustaining the recovery process.
· Developing Coping Strategies: The worker assists the client in developing coping and problem-solving skills to resolve other personal and family challenges that the client is facing.
· Being an Encouraging Person: The worker conveys to the client that the client has the resources (internal strengths and social support networks) to conquer his or her issues and challenges. The worker has a nonjudgmental attitude so that the client no longer feels a need to lie, pretend, or wear a mask. The worker conveys to the client that she or he is genuinely interested in the client’s progress and conveys that the client is an important, worthwhile person. The worker conveys sincere enthusiasm in the constructive interests, ideas, and risk-taking actions of the client. The worker takes the time to spend listening and understanding the client as fully as possible. Motivating a discouraged person takes a long, long, time; discouraged clients generally have a long history of failures. The worker reinforces efforts made by the client, even when the actions taken do not bring immediate success; the important thing is that the client tries to improve his or her life. The worker is a nonjudgmental listener so that the client’s real thoughts and feelings can be expressed freely, without fear of censure.
11-9fUnderstanding and Treating Codependency
Codependent people are so trapped by a loved one’s addiction that they lose their own identity in the process of obsessively managing the day-to-day trauma created by the addict. Codependency is unhealthy behavior learned amid chaos. Some codependent people are as dysfunctional as the addict, if not more so. Living with addiction triggers excessive caretaking, suppression of one’s own needs, a feeling of low self-worth, and strained relationships. The life and identity of a codependent person becomes enmeshed with the everyday problems of living with an addict.
Many codependent people have grown up in dysfunctional families. Some are adult children of alcoholics. They marry or become romantically involved with people who abuse alcohol or some other drug. To some extent, the addict fills the needs of the codependent—needs such as caretaking, loneliness, and addiction to destructive behavior such as excessive partying and thrill seeking. Codependency can be viewed as a normal reaction to abnormal stress.
If the addict terminates the use of his or her drug of choice, the codependent’s dysfunctional behaviors generally continue, unless he or she receives treatment. There are a variety of treatment approaches for codependent people—individual psychotherapy, self-help groups (such as Al-Anon and Adult Children of Alcoholics), and codependency therapeutic groups. For many codependent people, treatment involves recognition that they have lives and identities separate from the addict; that the addict alone is responsible for his or her drug abuse; and that their lives and the addict’s will improve by terminating their caretaking and enabling behaviors. Through treatment, many codependent people regain (or gain for the first time) their own identity. Treatment is designed to banish the self-destructive habits that sabotage codependent people’s happiness.
Roles assumed by social workers in treating codependent people include counselor, educator (conveying information about addiction and codependency), facilitator (leading treatment groups), broker (linking codependent people to self-help groups and to other human service resources), and program initiator (developing programs to serve codependent people in communities where such treatment programs are scarce or nonexistent).
11-9gThe Relationship between Knowledge and Assessment
Considerable attention has been given to the issue of chemical substance abuse. This problem was selected because it is especially critical and widespread. To be able to intervene and help facilitate people’s recovery from chemical dependency, social workers need a base of knowledge. Social workers need to know some of the dynamics involved in the behavior of chemically dependent individuals and families, and they need to understand the concept of enabling. Only then can they assess a family accurately and know at what point intervention is needed. With this base of knowledge, they can apply skills to help family members stop their enabling and their maintenance of false rules. Social work skills can also be used to encourage the family to realign responsibility and relinquish it to the chemically dependent person. In summary, the examination of such a major life issue should provide social workers with a starting point on which to begin problem assessment. The intent is to provide a map or guide to begin the process of intervention.
Chapter 12
Sociological Aspects of Young and Middle Adulthood
Chapter Introduction
Jose Luis Pelaez Inc/Blend Images/Getty Images
Learning Objectives
This chapter will help prepare students to
· LO 1 Describe the following lifestyles and family forms that young adults may enter into: marriage, cohabitation, single life, parenthood, and the life of a childless couple
· LO 2 Describe three major sociological theories about human behavior: functionalism, conflict theory, and interactionism. These are macro-system theories
· LO 3 Understand three social problems that young and middle-aged adults may encounter: poverty, empty-shell marriages, and divorce. One-parent families, blended families, and mothers working outside the home will also be discussed
· LO 4 Understand material on assessing and intervening in family systems
· LO 5 Summarize material on social work with organizations, including several theories of organizational behavior
· LO 6 Describe liberal, conservative, and developmental perspectives on human service organizations
George Andrus is spending 55 hours a week getting his insurance business going and uses his leisure time working around his house. Jenny Savano recently got a divorce, is trying to raise her three children on a meager monthly public assistance grant, and is attending a vocational school to train as a secretary. Tom and Eleanor Townsend have their careers well established, their two children have grown and left home, and they enjoy traveling to such exotic places as the Greek Isles. Joan Sarauer spends much of her day caring for her husband, who is dying of emphysema. Carmen and Carlos Garcia attend church every Sunday and take leadership roles in church activities during the week. Ben Katz and Julie Immel are seniors in college and are planning their wedding.
A Perspective
There is obviously considerable variation in the major social interests of young and middle-aged adults. However, there are some fairly common themes: choosing a personal lifestyle and perhaps marrying; settling into a career; raising children and maintaining a household; participating in hobbies; becoming grandparents; adjusting to relationship changes with a spouse and children after the children leave home; and socializing with friends.
12-1Describe the following Lifestyles and Family Forms That Young Adults May Enter Into: Marriage, Cohabitation, Single Life, Parenthood, and the Life of a Childless Couple
12-1aInteraction in Family Systems: Choosing a Personal Lifestyle
Most people make decisions during their young adult years about how they want to live their adult years. Decisions about lifestyles include whether to marry or stay single; whether to have children; what kind of career to pursue; what area of the country to live in; whether to live in an apartment, duplex, or house. (As time goes on, it is important to remember that a person has a right to make changes in these decisions.) In choosing a lifestyle, what many people experience is not a matter of ideal choice, but rather a result of opportunities. In other words, financial resources, personal deficiencies, discrimination, and so on may greatly limit or modify free choice. In addition, unexpected life events—such as unplanned pregnancy, divorce, or death of a spouse—can dramatically alter a person’s lifestyle and family living arrangements. In regard to lifestyles and family forms, we will take a brief look at marriage, cohabitation, single life, parenthood, and the life of a childless couple.
12-1bMarriage
Marriage is defined as a legally and socially sanctioned union between two people, resulting in mutual obligations and rights. Throughout recorded history, regardless of the simplicity or sophistication of the society, the family has been the basic biological and social unit in which most adults and children live. In addition, all past and present societies sanction the family through the institution of marriage. Clayton (1975) suggests that one of the primary reasons for instituting the custom of marriage was to enable the two partners to enjoy sexuality as fully as possible with a minimum of anxieties and hazards. The natural sex drive of men and women needs to be satisfied, yet control needs to be exercised over the spread of sexually transmitted diseases. Children that result from sexual relationships need to be raised and cared for.
Close to 92 percent of all adults in our society will get married. More than 90 percent of all married couples will have children (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). People marry for a variety of reasons, including desire for children, economic security, social position, love, parents’ wishes, escape, pregnancy, companionship, sexual attraction, common interests, and adventure. Other reasons for marrying include societal expectations and the psychological need to feel wanted more than anyone else by someone and to be of value to another person. Highlight 12.1 presents some theories as to why people choose each other as mates. In our impersonal and materialistic society, marriage helps meet the need to belong because it helps to provide emotional support and security, affection, love, and companionship.
Highlight 12.1
Theories about Why People Choose Each Other as Mates
The reasons why people choose each other as partners are complex and vary greatly. Certainly such factors as religion, age, race, ethnic group, social class, and parental pressure influence the choice of mates. In addition, many theories suggest additional factors. Some of these theories are summarized here. No theory fully identifies all of the factors involved in mate selection, and mate selection may involve aspects of more than one theory.
· Propinquity theory asserts that being in close proximity is a major factor in mate selection. This theory suggests we are apt to select a mate with whom we are in close association, such as at school or at work, or whom we meet through neighborhood, church, or recreational activities (Rubin, 1973).
· Ideal mate theory suggests we choose a mate who has the characteristics and traits we desire in a partner. This theory is symbolized by the statement, “He’s everything I’ve ever wanted.”
· Congruence in values theory holds that our value system consciously and unconsciously guides us in selecting a mate who has similar values (Grush & Yehl, 1979).
· Homogamy theory suggests that we select a mate who has similar racial, economic, and social characteristics.
· Complementary needs theory holds that we either select a partner who has the characteristics we wish we had ourselves or someone who can help us be the kind of person we want to be.
· Compatibility theory asserts that we select a mate with whom we can enjoy a variety of activities. This is someone who will understand us, accept us, and with whom we feel comfortable in communicating because that person has a similar philosophy of life.
Ethical Dilemma
Should You Marry Someone You Are Not in Love with?
If you are a woman, assume you are four months pregnant. You once were in love with the father of your unborn child, but no longer are. He is in love with you and wants to marry you. What do you do? How would you go about arriving at a decision?
If you are a man, assume the woman you have been dating for the past few years is four months pregnant. You once were in love with her, but no longer are. She is in love with you and wants to marry you. What do you do? How would you go about arriving at a decision?
What ethical values are involved in such a decision?
Predictors of Marital Success
A number of studies have sought to identify factors associated with marital happiness and unhappiness (Kail & Cavanaugh, 2010; Kornblum & Julian, 2012; Papalia Martorell, 2015; Santrock, 2016). Some factors can help predict whether a future marriage will be happy or not. Other factors are related to whether an already existing marriage is happy or not. The findings of these studies are summarized in Highlight 12.2.
Highlight 12.2
Predictive Factors Leading to Marital Happiness/Unhappiness
|
Factors for Marital Happiness |
|
Premarital Factors · Parents’ marriage is happy · Personal happiness in childhood · Mild but firm discipline by parents · Harmonious relationship with parents · Gets along well with the opposite sex · Acquainted for more than one year before marriage · Parental approval of the marriage · Similarity of age · Satisfaction with affection of partner · Love · Common interests · Optimistic outlook on life · Emotional stability · Sympathetic attitude · Similarity of cultural backgrounds · Compatible religious beliefs · Satisfying occupation and working conditions · A love relationship growing out of companionship rather than infatuation · Self-insight and self-acceptance · Awareness of the needs of one’s partner · Coping ability · Interpersonal social skills · Positive self-identity · Holding common values Factors During Marriage · Good communication skills · Egalitarian relationship · Good relationship with in-laws · Desire for children · Similar interests · Responsible love, respect, and friendship · Sexual compatibility · Enjoying leisure time activities together · Companionship and an affectional relationship · Capacity to receive as well as give |
|
Factors for Marital Unhappiness |
|
Premarital Factors · Parents divorced · Parent or parents deceased · Incongruity of main personality traits with partner · Acquainted less than one year before marriage · Loneliness as a major reason for marriage · Escape from one’s own family as major reason for marriage · Marriage at a young age, particularly under age 20 · Predisposition to unhappiness in one or both spouses · Intense personal problems Factors During Marriage · Husband more dominant · Wife more dominant · Jealous of spouse · Feeling of superiority to spouse · Feeling of being more intelligent than spouse · Living with in-laws · Whining, acting defensively, being stubborn, and withdrawing by walking away or not talking to spouse · Domestic violence |
Benefits of Marriage
Marriage leads to the formation of a family, and the family unit is recognized as the primary unit in which children are to be produced and raised. The marriage bond thus provides for an orderly replacement of the population. The family is the primary institution for the rearing and socializing of children.
Marriage also provides an available and regulated outlet for sexual activity. Failure to regulate sexual behavior would result in clashes between individuals due to jealousy and exploitation. Every society has rules that regulate sexual behavior within family units (e.g., incest taboos).
A marriage is also an arrangement to meet the emotional needs of the partners, such as affection, companionship, approval, encouragement, and reinforcement for accomplishments. (Interestingly, Highlight 12.3 indicates that emotional needs are better satisfied over the long term by rational love than by romantic love.) If people do not have such affective needs met, emotional, intellectual, physical, and social growth will be stunted. (Our high divorce rate indicates that this ideal of achieving an emotionally satisfying relationship is not easily attained.) Married people of all ages tend to report somewhat higher rates of satisfaction about their lives than do people who are single, divorced, or widowed (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). Two alternative factors may be operating here—either a number of people do find happiness in marriage, or else happy people are more apt to be married.
Highlight 12.3
Romantic Love versus Rational Love
Achieving a gratifying, long-lasting love relationship is one of our paramount goals. The experience of feeling in love is exciting, adds meaning to living, and psychologically gives us a good feeling about ourselves. Unfortunately, few people are able to maintain a long-term love relationship. Instead, many people encounter problems with love relationships, including failing in love with someone who does not love them; falling out of love with someone after an initial stage of infatuation; being highly possessive of someone they love; and having substantial conflicts with the loved one because of differing sets of expectations about the relationship. Failures in love relationships are more often the rule than the exception.
The emotion of love, in particular, is often erroneously viewed as a feeling over which we have no control. A number of common expressions connote or imply this: “I fell in love,” “It was love at first sight,” “I just couldn’t help it,” and “He swept me off my feet.” It is more useful to think of the emotion of love as being primarily based on our self-talk (i.e., what we tell ourselves) about a person we meet.
Romantic love can be diagrammed as follows:
|
Event |
|
Meeting or becoming acquainted with a person who has some of the overt characteristics you want in a lover. |
|
↓ |
|
Self-Talk |
|
“This person is attractive, personable; has all of the qualities I admire in a lover/mate.” |
|
↓ |
|
Emotion |
|
Intense infatuation, being romantically in love; a feeling of being in ecstasy. |
Romantic love is often based on self-talk that stems from intense unsatisfied desires and frustrations, rather, than on reason, or rational thinking. Unsatisfied desires and frustrations include extreme sexual frustration, intense loneliness, parental and personal problems, and strong desires for security and protection.
A primary characteristic of romantic love is to idealize the person with whom we are infatuated; that is, we notice this person has some overt characteristics we desire in a lover and then conclude that this person has all the desired characteristics.
A second characteristic is that romantic love thrives on a certain amount of distance. The more forbidden the love, the stronger it becomes. The more social mores are threatened, the stronger the feeling. (For example, couples who live together and then later marry often report living together was more exciting and romantic.) The greater the effort necessary to be with each other (e.g., traveling long distances), the more intense the romance. The greater the frustration (e.g., loneliness or sexual needs), the more intense the romance.
The irony of romantic love is that if an ongoing relationship is achieved, the romance usually withers. Through sustained contact, the person in love gradually comes to realize what the idealized loved one is really like—simply another human being with certain strengths and limitations. When this occurs, the romantic love relationship either turns into a rational love relationship, or the relationship is found to have significant conflicts and dissatisfactions and ends in a broken romance. For people with intense unmet desires, the latter occurs more frequently.
Romantic love thus tends to be of temporary duration and based on make-believe. A person experiencing romantic love never loves the real person—only an idealized image of the person.
Rational love, in contrast, can be diagrammed in the following way:
|
Event |
|
While being aware of and comfortable about your own needs, goals, identity, and desires, you become well acquainted with someone who fulfills, to a fair extent, the characteristics you desire in a lover or spouse. |
|
↓ |
|
Self-Talk |
|
“This person has many of the qualities and attributes I seek in a lover or spouse. I admire this person’s strengths, and I am aware and accepting of his or her shortcomings.” |
|
↓ |
|
Emotion |
|
Rational Love |
The following are ingredients of a rational love relationship: You are clear and comfortable about your desires, identity, and goals in life. You know the other person well. You have accurately and objectively assessed the loved one’s strengths and shortcomings and are generally accepting of the shortcomings. Your self-talk; about this person is consistent with your short- and long-term goals. Your self-talk is realistic and rational, so that your feelings are not based on fantasy, excessive desires, or pity. You and this person are able to communicate openly and honestly, so that problems can be dealt with when they arise and so that the relationship can continue to grow and develop. Rational love also involves giving and receiving; it involves being kind, showing affection, knowing and doing what pleases the other person, communicating openly and warmly, and so on.
Because love is based on self-talk that causes feelings, it is we who create love. Theoretically, it is possible to love anyone by making changes in our self-talk. On the other hand, if we are in love with someone, we can gauge the quality of the relationship by analyzing our self-talk to determine the nature of our attraction and to determine the extent to which our self-talk is rational and in our best interests.
Source: Charles Zastrow, You Are What You Think: A Guide to Self-Realization. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1993.
Marriage also correlates with good health. Married people live longer, particularly men (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). But we cannot conclude that marriage confers health. Healthy people may be more interested in getting married, may be better marriage partners, and may attract mates more easily. Or married people may lead safer, healthier lives than single people.
Widowed and divorced men have shorter life expectancies than do single men, whose life expectancy is closest to the rate of married men (Santrock, 2016). Perhaps widowed and divorced men have shorter life expectancies because they feel they have less to live for.
The marriage relationship encourages personal growth; it provides a setting for the partners to share their innermost thoughts. In a marriage, a lot of decisions need to be made. Should the husband and wife both pursue careers? Do they want children? How will the domestic tasks be divided? How much time will be spent with relatives? Should they buy a new car or a house? Should a vacation be taken this year; if so, where? Problems in these areas can erupt into crises that, if resolved constructively, can lead to personal growth. Through successful resolution, people often learn more about themselves and are better able to handle future crises. However, if the problems remain unresolved, conflict may fester and considerable discord result.
Highlight 12.4 summarizes some useful guidelines for building and maintaining a successful marriage. (This chapter focuses on heterosexual marriages. Chapter 13 provides some material on gay and lesbian marriages.)
Highlight 12.4
Guidelines for Building and Maintaining a Happy Marriage
A successful and satisfying marriage requires ongoing work by each partner. The following are some useful guidelines, on how to achieve and maintain a successful marriage:
1. Make your spouse feel special. We fall in love because of the way we feel about ourselves when we are with that person. If we fall out of love, it is because that person no longer makes us feel good about ourselves.
2. Seek to foster the happiness, personal growth, and well-being of your spouse as much as you seek to foster your own happiness and personal, growth …
3. Seek to use the no-lose problem-solving approach (described in Highlight 8.1), rather than the win-lose technique to settle conflicts with partners. Be tolerant and accepting of trivial shortcomings and annoyances.
4. Do not try to possess, stifle, or control your partner. Also, do not seek to mold your partner into a carbon copy of your opinions, values, beliefs, or your personal likes and dislikes.
5. Be aware that everyone has up-and-down mood swings. When your partner is in a down cycle, be considerate and understanding.
6. When arguments occur—and they will—try to fight fair. Limit the discussion to the issue at hand, and keep past events and personality traits out of the fight.
7. Be affectionate, share pleasant events, and be a friend and a good listener.
8. Keep the lines of communication open. Learn to bite the bullet on minor or unimportant issues. Voice the concerns that are important to you, but in a way that does not attack, blame, or threaten the other person. Try to use I-messages (described in Highlight 12.7).
12-1cCohabitation
Cohabitation is the open living together of an unmarried couple. Most such couples live together for a relatively short time (less than two years) before they either marry or separate (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). For some, cohabitation serves as a trial marriage. For others, it offers a temporary or permanent alternative to marriage. And for many young people, it has become the modern equivalent of dating and going steady.
People who cohabitated before marriage do not have better marriages than those who did not. In fact, some research shows that couples who lived together before getting married report lower-quality marriages, a lower commitment to the institution of marriage, and a greater likelihood of divorce than do noncohabiting couples (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
Why do couples decide to live together without a marriage ceremony? The reasons are not fully clear. Many people want close intimate and sexual arrangements but are not ready for the financial and long-term commitments of a marriage. With our society being more accepting of cohabitation than in the past, some couples appear to be choosing this living arrangement. To some extent, they can have friendship, companionship, and a sexual relationship without the long-term commitment of marriage. Living with someone helps many young adults to learn more about themselves, to better understand what is involved in an intimate relationship, and to grow as a person. Cohabitating may also help some people clarify what they want in a mate and in a marriage.
Cohabitating also has its problems, some of which are similar to those encountered by newly-weds: adjusting to an intimate relationship, working out a sexual relationship, overdependency on the partner, missing what one did when living alone, and seeing friends less. Other problems are unique to cohabitation, such as explaining the relationship to parents and relatives, discomfort about the ambiguity of the future, and a desire for a long-term commitment from one’s partner.
In some recent instances, courts have decided that cohabitating couples who dissolve their nonmarital living arrangements have certain legal obligations to one another. For example, under certain circumstances, such as an oral agreement between two individuals to pool their earnings, some courts view assets acquired during the time the couple was living together as “marital property,” which then is divided (sometimes not equally) between the two individuals after the relationship is dissolved.
Ethical Question 12.1
1. If you are currently involved in a Jove relationship with someone, do you seek to make that person feel special? Does your partner seek to lead you to feel good about yourself?
Common-law marriage is an irregular form of marriage that can be legally contracted in a limited number of jurisdictions. The original concept of a common-law marriage is a marriage that is considered valid by both partners, but has not been formally registered with a state or church registry. Common-law marriages can be contracted in nine states in the United States (Colorado, Iowa, Kansas, Montana, New Hampshire, South Carolina, Texas, and Utah). The requirements for a common-law marriage to be validly contracted differ from state to state. Despite much belief to the contrary, the length of time a man and a woman live together does not by itself determine whether a common-law marriage exists. All states in the United States recognize common-law marriages lawfully contracted in those jurisdictions that permit it.
12-1dSingle Life
Some people choose to remain single; they like being alone and prefer not being with others much of the time. Others end up being single because they do not find a partner they want to marry or because they are in a relationship with a partner who chooses not to marry. Historically, there was a greater expectation that people would marry than at the present time. Now, people are freer to make decisions about whether to marry and what kind of lifestyle to seek.
Studies reviewed by Papalia and Martorell (2015) reported the following advantages of being single as listed by respondents who were not married: satisfaction of being self-sufficient, increased career opportunities, an exciting lifestyle, mobility, sexual availability, the freedom to change, opportunities to have a variety of experiences, opportunities to play a variety of roles, and opportunities to have friendships with a variety of people. Reported disadvantages of being single include wondering how single people fit into the social world of mostly married people, lack of companionship, concerns about how well friends and family accept unmarried adults, and concerns about how being single affects self-esteem.
12-1eParenthood
The birth of a baby is a major life event. (See Highlight 12.5 for information on parental gender preferences.) Caring for a baby changes lifestyles of parents and also changes the marriage. For some, having a child (who is totally dependent) is a troublesome crisis. For others, caring for a baby is viewed as a fulfillment and an enhancement of life. For many couples, parenthood has troublesome aspects while also enhancing their lives.
Highlight 12.5
Parental Gender Preferences
In most countries, boys are generally preferred to girls. Although it is the male’s sperm that determines the gender of the child, in many developing countries and countries where the status of women is low, a woman’s capacity to remain married may depend on her producing sons. In some of these countries, boys are fed better, given better medical care, and receive more schooling. The death rate for female children is significantly higher than for male children because female children are more apt to be neglected.
In the United States, couples who want only one child usually desire a boy. Those who want two generally desire one of each; and those who prefer three usually want two boys and one girl. Men, in particular, tend to have a strong preference for a boy. The reasons a couple desire a boy or a girl vary. Those couples desiring a boy generally prefer someone to carry on the family name and bring honor to the family; those who prefer a girl want someone who is easier to raise, is lovable, is fun to dress, and is able to help with the housework (Santrock, 2016).
What are some of the problem areas of parenthood? The birth of a baby signals to parents that they are now adults and no longer children; they now have responsibilities not only to themselves, but to someone who needs 24-hour care. A baby demands a huge amount of time and attention.
Women generally assume the majority of both household and child-care responsibilities. Levinson and Levinson (1996) found that the more the division of labor in a marriage changes from egalitarian to traditional, the more marital happiness declines, especially for nontraditional wives.
Thompson and Walker (1989) found that one-third of mothers view mothering as both enjoyable and meaningful, a third find it unpleasant and not meaningful, and another third report mixed experiences. Fathers tend to treasure and to be emotionally committed to their children, but they generally report less enjoyment in looking after them than mothers do.
Why do people have children? Historically, in agricultural and preindustrial societies, children were an economic asset; their labor was important in planting and harvesting crops and in tending domestic animals. Parents wanted large families to help with the work. When parents grew old, children tended to provide much of the care. Because children were an economic asset, values were gradually established that it was natural and desirable for married couples to want to have children. Motherhood became invested with a unique emotional aura.
Today, children are an economic liability rather than an economic asset. In our society, there is an expectation that Social Security and other retirement programs will care for older parents, rather than this being a responsibility of their children. Children can have negative, as well as positive, effects on lifestyles and on marital relationships. For these and other reasons, married couples in our society over the years have gradually decided to have fewer children. Now most couples usually want zero to three children. Contraception now makes such wishes a reality.
Parenthood has many rewards and many joyful moments. Some of the rewards include having someone to love and return that love, the joy of playing and interacting with a child, watching and helping a child grow and develop, and socializing with other parents.
Parenthood also has many demands and stresses, including discipline problems, increased responsibilities, financial demands, interference with previous lifestyles, cleaning up messes, trying to accomplish some task while stepping over a child, running time-consuming errands, planning a schedule around a child’s needs, listening to a crying or whining child, changing diapers, interrupted rest and sleep, fatigue, and concerns about being able to give less attention to personal appearance.
Children are less likely to lower marital satisfaction in families where the parents wanted to have children, and where the parents have outside resources for helping to care for the children. In marriages that deteriorate after parenthood, one or both partners tend to have low self-esteem, and the husbands are likely to be less sensitive (Belsky & Rovine, 1988). The partners in deteriorating marriages are also more likely to be younger and less educated, to earn less money, and to have been married for fewer years.
Even when parenting has a negative influence on marital satisfaction, it often has a positive effect on the self-concepts of the parents and on their work roles. Thus, parenting appears to contribute to the personal development of an individual.
The Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry (1973) views parenting as a developmental process and has identified the following four stages:
1. Anticipation: This stage occurs during pregnancy when the expectant parents think about how they will raise their children, how their lives will change, and the meaning of parenthood. Some expectant parents have ambivalent feelings about what lies ahead. During this stage, the expectant parents begin the process of viewing themselves as their children’s parents, instead of being their parents’ children.
2. Honeymoon: This stage occurs after the birth of the first child and lasts for a few months. Parents are often very happy about having and holding a baby. It is also a time of adjustment and learning, as attachments are formed between parents and child, and family members learn new roles in relation to one another.
3. Plateau: This stage occurs from infancy through the teenage years. Parents must make frequent adjustments as they adapt their parenting behavior to the level of the child.
4. Disengagement: This stage occurs when the child disengages (e.g., when the child marries). Because the child disengages, the parents should also change their behavior and disengage from the child. Relationships change from parent–child to adult–parent-adult.
These stages illustrate that children have a great effect on parents. The Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry (1973) also notes that parents often judge their parenting on how well their children turn out. When children fulfill their expectations, the parents usually pat themselves on the back for a job well done. The danger of this approach is that if the children fall short of meeting parental expectations (which sometimes are unrealistic), parents are apt to conclude that they have failed. Parents need to realize that the final product is not entirely under their control because children are influenced by many other factors that are external to the family.
12-1fChildless Couples
Having children is recognized legally and religiously as one of the central components of a marriage. Our society still considers that something is wrong with a couple if they decide not to have children.
However, this value is no longer as strongly held as it once was. Perhaps in the future this value will disappear in the face of overpopulation and the high cost of raising children. Papalia and Martorell (2015) notes that a middle-income family can expect to spend a quarter of a million dollars to raise a child from birth through age 17.
Fathers generally report less enjoyment in looking after children than mothers do, but fathers who enjoy parenting usually see it as one of their most important life roles.
Ken Seet/Corbis/VCG/Getty Images
Ethical Question 12.2
1. Given the high cost of raising a child, how many children do you want to have?
Married couples may decide not to have children. Some feel they do not have what it takes to be good parents. Some have heavy commitments to their careers or to their hobbies and do not want to take time away from them to raise a family. Others feel that having children would be an intrusion into their marital relationship. Still others enjoy the freedom to travel and to make spur-of-the-moment plans, and do not want their lifestyle changed. Some feel that choosing not to have children is desirable in order to avoid contributing to overpopulation.
Unwanted children are adversely affected in a variety of ways; they are more apt to be abused, have more frequent illnesses, receive poorer school grades, and have more behavior problems than children whose births are desired (Santrock, 2016). Such findings suggest that if couples do not want to have children, it is probably in their best interest and that of society for them not to do so.
12-2Describe Three Major Sociological Theories about Human Behavior: Functionalism, Conflict Theory, and Interactionism
12-2aMacro Social System Theories
Micro-system theories, on the other hand, seek to make sense of the effects of group life on individuals. Prominent theories of this type include Erikson’s theory, which was summarized in Chapter 7, and learning theory, summarized in Chapter 4.
This chapter will first describe three theories addressing macro social systems. These theories explore how macro systems function and propose explanations for how these systems influence human behavior. Macro-system theories seek to make sense of the behavior of large groups of people and the workings of entire societies. We begin by looking at the three most prominent macro-system theories in sociology: functionalism, conflict theory, and interactionism. (Note that these theories are applicable to all age groups, not only middle-aged adults.)
Advocates of these various theories often disagree with one another, and each theory has certain merits and shortcomings. The theories vary in their usefulness for analyzing any particular issue or problem individuals encounter within their social environments. Having a knowledge of a range of contemporary theories enables the social worker to select the theory or theories that are most useful in understanding a particular human behavior, problem, or issue. Often, the greatest understanding results from combining and critically thinking about a combination of these theories.
12-2bThe Functionalist Perspective
In recent years, functionalism has been one of the most influential sociological theories. The theory was originally developed by Emile Durkheim, a French sociologist, and was refined by Robert K. Merton, Talcott Parsons, and many others. The theory views society as a well-organized system in which most members agree on common values and norms. Institutions, groups, and roles fit together in a unified whole. Members of society do what is necessary to maintain a stable society because they accept its regulations and rules.
Society is viewed as a system composed of interdependent and interrelated parts. Each part makes a contribution to the operation of the entire system. The various parts are involved in a delicate balance, and a change in one part affects the other parts.
A simple way to picture this approach is to use the analogy of a human body. A well-functioning person has thousands of parts, each having a specific function. The heart pumps blood, the lungs draw oxygen into the body and expel carbon dioxide, the stomach digests food for energy, the muscles move bodily parts to perform a variety of functions, and the brain coordinates the activities of the various parts. Each of these parts is interrelated in complex ways to the others and is also dependent on them. Each performs a vital function, without which the entire system might collapse, as in the case of heart failure.
Functionalism asserts that the components of a society, similar to the parts of the human body, do not always work the way they are supposed to work. Things get out of whack. When a component of a society interferes with efforts to carry out essential social tasks, that part is said to be dysfunctional. Often, changes in society introduced to correct a particular imbalance may produce other imbalances, even when things are going well. For example, developing effective contraceptives and making them readily available is quite effective in preventing unwanted pregnancies. However, contraceptives may also be a factor leading to increased premarital and extramarital sexual relationships—which is viewed as a problem by some groups.
According to the functionalist perspective, all social systems have a tendency toward equilibrium—maintenance of a steady state or particular balance, in which the parts of the system remain in the same relationship to one another. The approach asserts that systems have a tendency to resist social change; change is seen as disruptive unless it occurs at a slow pace. Because society is composed of interconnected parts, a change in one part of the system will lead to changes in at least some of the other parts. The introduction of the automobile into our society, for example, led to drastic changes: people being able to commute long distances to work; vacation travel to distant parts of the country; the opening of many new businesses (service stations, car dealerships, etc.); and sharp increases in air pollution and traffic fatalities.
According to functionalists, social problems occur when society, or some part of it, becomes disorganized. Social disorganization occurs when a large organization or an entire society is imperfectly organized to achieve its goals and maintain its stability. When disorganization occurs, the organization loses control over its parts.
Functionalists see thousands of potential causes of social disorganization. However, underlying all these causes is rapid social change, which disrupts the balance of society. In recent years, more technological advances (such as the development of telephones, computers, television, robots, heart transplants, the Internet) have occurred in less time than at any other time in human history. These advances have led basic institutions (such as the family and the educational system) to undergo drastic changes. Technological advances have occurred at such a pace that other parts of the culture have failed to keep pace. This cultural lag between technological changes and our adaptation to them is viewed as one of the major sources of social disorganization.
Examples of such social disorganization abound. The development of nuclear weapons has the potential to destroy civilization. Advances in sanitation and medical technology have lengthened life expectancy but have also contributed to a worldwide population explosion. Advances in artificial insemination have led to surrogate motherhood, which our society has not yet decided whether to encourage or discourage. The development of technological advances in performing abortions has led to the capacity to terminate pregnancies quite safely on request, but has also led to a national controversy about the desirability of legalized abortions.
Critics of functionalism assert that it is a politically conservative philosophy, as it takes for granted the idea that society as it is (the status quo) should be preserved. As a result, basic social injustices are ignored. Critics also argue that the approach is value-laden, because one person’s disorganization is another person’s organization. For example, some people view divorce as being functional, because it is a legal way to terminate a relationship that is no longer working.
Functionalism has also been criticized as being a philosophy that works for the benefit of the privileged social classes, while perpetuating the misery of the poor and those who are being victimized by discrimination.
12-2cThe Conflict Perspective
The conflict theory views society as a struggle for power among various social groups. Conflict is thought to be inevitable and in many cases actually beneficial to society. For example, most Americans would view the struggle of the “freedom fighters” during the Revolutionary War as being highly beneficial to our society. (England, however, viewed them as ungrateful insurgents.)
The conflict perspective rests on an important assumption: members of society highly value certain things (such as power, wealth, and prestige), and most of these valued resources are in scarce supply. Because of their scarcity, conflict theory asserts that people—either individually or in groups—struggle with one another to attain them. Society is thus viewed as an arena for the struggle over scarce resources.
Struggle and conflict may take many forms: competition, disagreements, court battles, physical fights and violence, and war. If the struggles usually involved violence, then nearly everyone would be involved in violent activities, and society would be impossible. As a result, norms have emerged that determine what types of conflict are allowable for which groups. For example, participating in a labor strike or acquiring a higher education is an approved way of competing for the limited money available in our society, whereas robbery is not an acceptable way.
From the conflict perspective, social change mainly involves reordering the distribution of scarce goods among groups. Unlike functionalism, which views change as potentially destructive, the conflict approach views change as potentially beneficial. Conflict can lead to improvements, advancements, the reduction of discrimination against oppressed groups, and the emergence of new groups as dominant forces in society. Without conflict, society would become stagnant.
Functionalism and conflict theory differ in another way. Functionalists assert that most people obey the law because they believe the law is fair and just. Conflict theorists assert that social order is maintained by authority backed by the use of force. They assert that the privileged classes hold legal power and use the legal system to make others obey their will. They conclude that most people obey the law because they are afraid of being arrested, imprisoned, or even killed if they do not obey.
Functionalists assert that most people in society share the same set of values and norms. In contrast, conflict theorists assert that modern societies are composed of many different groups with divergent values, attitudes, and norms—and therefore conflicts are bound to occur. The abortion issue illustrates such a value conflict. Pro-life groups and traditional Roman Catholics believe that the human fetus at any stage after conception is a living human being, and therefore aborting a pregnancy is murder. In contrast, pro-choice advocates assert that an embryo for the first few months after conception is not yet a human being because it is unable to survive outside the womb. They also assert that if the state were to forbid a woman to obtain an abortion, the state would be violating her right to control her own life.
Not all conflicts stem from disagreements over values. Some conflicts arise in part because people share the same values. In our society, for example, wealth and power are highly valued. The wealthy spend considerable effort and resources to maintain their position, whereas the poor and oppressed groups vehemently advocate for equal rights and a more equitable distribution of income and wealth. Labor unions and owners in many businesses are in a continual battle over wages and fringe benefits. Republicans and Democrats continually struggle with one another in the hopes of gaining increased political power.
Whereas functionalism has been criticized as too conservative, conflict theory has been criticized as too radical. Critics say that if there were as much conflict as these theorists claim, society would have disintegrated long ago. Conflict theory has also been criticized as encouraging oppressed groups to revolt against the existing power structure, rather than seeking to work within the existing system to address their concerns.
Ethical Question 12.3
1. Do you believe it is better for oppressed groups to revolt against the existing power structure, rather than work within the existing system to address their concerns?
12-2dThe Interactionist Perspective
The interactionist approach focuses on individuals and the processes of everyday social interaction between them rather than on larger structures of society, such as the educational system, the economy, or religion. Interactionist theory views behavior as a product of each individual’s social relationships. Cartwright (1951) noted:
How aggressive or cooperative a person is, how much self-respect or self-confidence he has, how energetic and productive his work is, what he aspires to, what he believes to be true and good, whom he loves or hates, and what beliefs or prejudices he holds—all these characteristics are highly determined by the individual’s group memberships. In a real sense, they are products of groups and of the relationships between people. (p. 383)
The interactionist theory asserts that human beings interpret or define each other’s actions instead of merely reacting. This interpretation is mediated by the use of symbols (particularly words and language).
Interactionists study the socialization process in detail because it forms the foundation for human interaction. The approach asserts that people are the products of the culture and social relationships in which they participate. Coleman and Cressey (1984) summarize this approach:
People develop their outlook on life from participation in the symbolic universe that is their culture. They develop their conceptions of themselves, learn to talk, and even learn how to think as they interact early in life, with family and friends. But unlike the Freudians, interactionists believe that an individual’s personality continues to change throughout life in response to changing social environments.
Cooley (1902) observed that it is impossible to make objective measurements of most aspects of our self-concept—such as how brave, likable, generous, attractive, or honest we are. Instead, in order to gauge the extent to which we have these qualities, we have to rely on the subjective judgments of the people we interact with. In essence, Cooley asserted, we learn what kind of person we are by seeing and hearing how others react to us; in effect, the reactions, of others become a mirror or “looking glass” that we use to judge our own qualities.
Another important concept is that social reality is what a particular group agrees it is. Social reality is not a purely objective phenomenon.
The interactionist theory views human behavior as resulting from the interaction of a person’s unique, distinctive personality and the groups he or she participates in. Groups are a factor in shaping one’s personality, but the personality is also shaped by the person’s unique qualities.
The reality we construct is mediated through symbols. We respond to symbolic reality, not physical reality. Sullivan, Thompson, Wright, Gross, and Spady (1980) describe the importance of symbols in shaping our reality:
Symbols are the principal vehicles through which expectations are conveyed from one person to another. A symbol is any object, word, or event that stands for, represents, or takes the place of something else. Symbols have certain characteristics. First, the meaning of symbols derives from social consensus—the group’s agreement that one thing will represent something else. A flag represents love of country or patriotism; a green light means go, not stop; a frown stands for displeasure. Second, the relationship between the symbol and what it represents is arbitrary—there is no inherent connection. There is nothing about the color green that compels us to use that, rather than red, as a symbol for go; a flag is in reality a piece of cloth for which we could substitute anything, as long as we agreed that it stood for country. Finally, symbols need not be tied to physical reality. We can use symbols to represent things with no physical existence, such as justice, mercy, or God, or to stand for things that do not exist at all, such as unicorns.
A direct offshoot of the interactionist perspective is the labeling theory. This theory holds that the labels assigned to a person have a major impact on that person’s life. Labels often become self-fulfilling prophecies. If a child is continually called “stupid” by his or her parents, that child is apt to develop a low self-concept, anticipate failure in many areas (particularly academic), put forth little effort in school and in competitive interactions with others, and end up failing. If a teenage girl gets a reputation as being promiscuous, adults and peers may label her as such, with other girls then shunning her, teenage boys ridiculing her, and perhaps some boys seeking to date her for a one-night stand. If a person is labeled an ex-con for spending time in prison, that person is likely to be viewed with suspicion, have trouble finding employment, and be stigmatized as dangerous and untrustworthy, even though the person may be conscientious and hardworking. Scheff (1966) has developed a labeling theory to explain why some people develop a career of being mentally ill. He asserts that the act of labeling people as mentally ill is the major determinant for their acting as if they were mentally ill. Once they have been labeled, others interact with them as if they were mentally ill, which leads them to view themselves as being mentally ill, and they then enact this role.
The most common criticism of the interactionist theory is that it is so abstract and vaguely worded that it is nearly impossible either to prove or disprove it (Coleman & Cressey, 1984).
12-3Understand Three Social Problems That Young and Middle-Aged Adults May Encounter: Poverty, Empty-Shell Marriages, and Divorce. One-Parent Families, Blended Families, and Mothers Working outside the Home Will Also Be Discussed.
12-3aPoverty: Impacts of Social and Economic Forces
The functionalist, conflict, and interactionist perspectives are further illustrated by discussing how each of these theories explains poverty. Poverty is a problem of major macro-system consequence. It dramatically affects a majority of social welfare resource recipients.
12-3bThe Rich and the Poor
Poverty and wealth are closely related. In most countries of the world, wealth is concentrated in a small percentage of the population. Abundance for a few is created by depriving others.
There are two ways of measuring the extent of economic inequality. Income refers to the amount of money a person makes in a given period. Wealth is a person’s total assets—real estate holdings, cash, stocks, bonds, and so forth.
The distribution of wealth and income is highly unequal in our society. Similar to most countries, the United States is characterized by social stratification—that is, it has social classes, with the upper classes having by far the greatest access to the pleasures that money can buy. As Spotlight 12.1 indicates, the income disparities between the very rich and very poor are astounding. Although this chapter focuses on poverty in the United States, it is important to note that there is a growing gap between the rich and the poor throughout the world (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
Spotlight on Diversity 12.1
Personal Income Disparities Are Astounding
In some countries in the world, the average per capita income is less than $500 per year. In the United States, 47 million people (about 15% of the population) are living in poverty. (In 2016 the poverty threshold for a family of four was $24,300.)
In the fall of 1997, Kevin Garnett signed a 6-year deal for $123 million with the Minnesota Timber-wolves, a professional team in the National Basketball Association (NBA). The deal, which amounted to an average of $20.5 million per year, was (at the time) the richest long-term sports contract. Garnett was only 20 years old when he signed. He joined the NBA after high school, without ever attending (or playing basketball in) college.
In the fall of 2007, Alex Rodriguez signed a 10-year deal for $275 million with the New York Yankees baseball team. The deal of $27.5 million per year then became the richest long-term sports contract.
In a single year (June 1998 to June 1999), the personal worth of Bill Gates, the chairman of Microsoft Corporation, rose $39 billion, from $51 billion to $90 billion!
During this 1-year period, he made an astounding average of $750 million per week, which is over $100 million per day.
These growing disparities between rich and poor throughout the world have a direct bearing on the situation of the poor in the United States, as some of their job opportunities are being “outsourced” to areas where extremely poor people are willing to accept work at almost any wage. In addition, the huge gap between the “haves” and the “have-nots” is a major factor leading to political instability in some countries, and to some of the “have-nots” resorting to terrorism and violence in an effort to improve their financial circumstances.
In the words of a pastoral letter issued by a committee of Roman Catholic bishops, “The level of inequality in income and wealth in our society … must be judged morally unacceptable” (quoted in Kornblum & Julian, 2001, p. 225). Paul Samuelson (1980), an economist, provides a dramatic metaphor of the disparity between the very rich and most people in the United States:
If we made an income pyramid out of a child’s blocks, with each layer portraying $1,000 of income, the peak would be far higher than the Eiffel Tower, but almost all of us would be within a yard of the ground. (p. 34)
Given the huge wealth of the richest 20 percent, it is clear that a simple redistribution of some of the wealth from the top one-fifth to the lowest one-fifth could easily wipe out poverty. Of course, that is not politically acceptable to members of the top fifth, who have the greatest control of the government.
In contrast, millions of Americans regularly do not get enough to eat because they are poor. The brain of a child grows to 80 percent of its adult size within the first three years of life. If supplies of protein are inadequate during this period, the brain stops growing, the damage is irreversible, and the child will be permanently retarded (Robertson, 1980).
Coleman and Cressey (1990) describe the effects of having, and not having, wealth:
The poor lack the freedom and autonomy so prized in our society. They are trapped by their surroundings, living in rundown, crime-ridden neighborhoods that they cannot afford to leave. They are constantly confronted with things they desire but have little chance to own. On the other hand, wealth provides power, freedom, and the ability to direct one’s own fate. The wealthy live where they choose and do as they please, with few economic constraints. Because the poor lack education and money for travel, their horizons seldom extend beyond the confines of their neighborhood. In contrast, the world of the wealthy offers the best education, together with the opportunity to visit places that the poor haven’t even heard of.
The children of the wealthy receive the best that society has to offer, as well as the assurance that they are valuable and important individuals. Because the children of the poor lack so many of the things everyone is “supposed” to have, it is much harder for them to develop the cool confidence of the rich. In our materialistic society people are judged as much by what they have as by who they are. The poor cannot help but feel inferior and inadequate in such a context. (p. 161)
12-3cThe Problem
About 15 percent of the population in the United States is living below the poverty line (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015). The poverty line is the level of income that the federal government considers sufficient to meet basic requirements of food, shelter, and clothing. In 2016, the poverty line for a family of four in the United States was $24,300. One of the alarming elements about poverty is that many people who do not fall under the government’s poverty line still have very limited incomes and a living standard that is similar to those below the poverty line.
Poverty does not simply mean that poor people in the United States are living less well than people of average income. It means eating diets largely of beans, macaroni, and cheese, or, in severe cases, even dog and cat food. It may mean not having running water, living in substandard housing, and being exposed to rats, cockroaches, and other vermin. It means not having sufficient heat in the winter and being unable to sleep because the walls are too thin to deaden the sounds from the neighbors living next door. It means being embarrassed about the few ragged clothes that one has to wear. It means high susceptibility to emotional disturbances, alcoholism, and victimization by criminals, as well as a shorter life expectancy. It means few opportunities to advance oneself socially, economically, or educationally. It often means slum housing, unstable marriages, and little opportunity to enjoy the finer things in life—traveling, dining out, movies, plays, concerts, sports events.
The infant mortality rate among the poor is almost double the rate among the affluent (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015). The poor have less access to medical services and receive lower-quality care from healthcare professionals. The poor are exposed to higher levels of air pollution, water pollution, and unsanitary conditions. They have higher rates of malnutrition and disease. Schools in poor areas are of lower quality and have fewer resources. As a result, the poor achieve less academically and are more apt to drop out of school. They are more apt to be arrested, indicted, imprisoned, and given longer sentences. They are less likely to receive probation, parole, or suspended sentences (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
The financial and housing crises in recent years have led to an increase in the number of homeless individuals and families.
Tony Freeman/Photo Edit
Poverty also often leads to despair, low self-esteem, and stunting of physical, social, emotional, and intellectual growth. A second level of damage from poverty occurs from the feeling that lack of, financial resources is preventing one from having equal opportunities and the feeling that one is a second-class citizen. Poverty hurts deeply when it leads to viewing oneself as inferior or second-class.
We like to think that America is a land of equal opportunity and that there is considerable upward mobility for those who put forth the effort (see Highlight 12.6). The reality is the opposite of the dream. Extensive research has shown that poverty is almost inescapable. Children raised in poor families are themselves apt to live in poverty in their adult years. Most people have much the same social status as their parents had. Movement to a higher social status is unusual in practically all societies—including the United States (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
Highlight 12.6
The Ideology of Individualism
Wealth is generally inherited in this country. There are few individuals who actually move up the social status ladder. Having wealth opens many doors (through education and contacts) for children of the wealthy to make large sums of money when they become adults. For children living in poverty, there is little chance to escape when they become older.
Yet there is the myth of individualism, held by many Americans. It states that the rich are personally responsible for their success, and that the poor are to blame for their failure. The main points of this myth are as follows:
1. Each individual should work hard and strive to succeed in competition with others.
2. Those who work hard should be rewarded with success (seen as wealth, property, prestige, and power).
3. Because of widespread and equal opportunity, those who work hard will, in fact, be rewarded with success.
4. Economic failure is an individual’s own fault and reveals lack of effort and other character defects.
The poor are blamed for their circumstances in our society. Blaming the poor has led to a stigma on poverty, particularly on those who receive public assistance.
12-3dWho Are the Poor?
Before the twentieth century, a majority of the population of the United States lived in poverty. President Franklin D. Roosevelt (1937) stated, “I see one-third of a nation ill-housed, ill-clad, ill-nourished.” In 1962, one-fifth of the population lived in poverty (U.S. Census Bureau, 1982). Now about 15 percent of the people are estimated to be below the poverty line. Since 1978, the proportion of the population who are poor has increased slightly.
Poverty is concentrated among certain population categories, including one-parent families, children, older adults, large-size families, people of color, and the homeless. Attainment of less than a ninth-grade education is a good predictor of poverty. Completing high school, however, is not a guarantee that one will earn wages adequate to avoid poverty, as many of the poor have graduated from high school. A college degree is an excellent predictor of avoiding poverty, as only a small proportion of those with a college degree live in poverty (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
People who live in deteriorated urban areas constitute the largest geographical group in terms of numbers of poor people. The decaying cities of the Northeast and Midwest have particularly large deteriorated areas. Poverty is also extensive on Native American reservations and among seasonal migrant workers. Spotlight 12.2 tells a tragic story of urban poverty.
Spotlight on Diversity 12.2
Poverty Perpetuates Poverty
The following summary of Marcee Carvel’s life describes how poverty and dismal living conditions lead to despair, hopelessness, and failure.
Marcee Carvel was born and raised in New York City. Her father had trouble holding a job because he was addicted to cocaine, and her mother was an alcoholic who divorced her husband when Marcee was 3 years old. Marcee’s mother at first sought to provide a better home for Marcee and her three brothers. She worked part-time and also went on public assistance. However, her addiction to alcohol consumed most of her time and money. Neighbors reported that the children were living in abject neglect, and Protective Services removed Marcee and her brothers to foster care. Marcee was placed in a series of foster homes—a total of 17 different homes. In one of these homes her foster father sexually assaulted her, and in another a foster brother assaulted her. Being moved from foster home to foster home resulted in frequent school changes. Marcee grew distrustful of the welfare system, schoolteachers and administrators, males, and anyone else who sought to get close to her.
When she turned 18, the state no longer paid for her care in foster care. She got a small efficiency apartment that cost her several hundred dollars a month. Because she had dropped out of school at age 16, she had few marketable job skills. She worked for a while at some fast-food restaurants. The minimum wages she received were insufficient to pay her bills. Bight months after she moved into her apartment she was evicted. Unable to afford another place, she started living in the subway system of New York City. She soon lost her job at McDonald’s because of poor hygiene and an unkempt appearance.
Unable to shower and improve her appearance, she has not been able to secure another job. For the past two years she has been homeless, living on the street and in the subway. She has given up hope of improving her situation. She now occasionally shares IV needles and has been sexually assaulted periodically by men at night in the subway. She realizes she is at high risk for acquiring the AIDS virus but no longer cares very much. Death, to her, appears to be the final escape from a life filled with victimization and misery.
The concept of “marginalization” appears in the EPAS (Council on Social Work Education, 2015). A marginalized group refers to a group of people who have been relegated to the lower echelons, outer edges, or “margins” of society based on such characteristics as gender, economic status, education, culture, race, religion, ethnicity, or political affiliation. The group is seen as being of little importance by the dominant cultural group. In our society the poor are a relatively powerless group, and hence marginalized.
12-3eWhat Causes Poverty?
There are a number of possible causes of poverty, including unemployment, poor physical health, emotional problems, drug addiction, low education level, racial and sexual discrimination, budgeting problems and mismanagement of resources, and mental retardation.
This list is not exhaustive. However, it serves to show that
· (1)
poverty has many causes;
· (2)
eliminating the causes of poverty would require a wide range of social programs; and
· (3)
poverty interacts with almost all other social problems—emotional problems, alcoholism, unemployment, racial and sexual discrimination, medical problems, crime, gambling, and cognitive disabilities
. The interaction between poverty and these other social problems is complicated. These social problems are contributing causes of poverty. Yet, for some social problems, poverty is also a contributing cause of those problems (such as emotional problems, alcoholism, and unemployment). And being poor intensifies the effects (the hurt) of all social problems.
To some extent, poverty is passed on from generation to generation. This cycle of poverty is diagrammed in Figure 12.1.
Figure 12.1A Macro-System Problem: The Cycle of Poverty
In 2007, a very serious global recession began, which continued for several years. A short summary of the causes of this recession follows.
Soon, additional and related problems arose. With so many homes on the real estate market, the market value of homes dropped substantially. Lenders experienced sharp losses because many subprime borrowers did not make mortgage payments. A financial crisis ensued, with many large financial institutions experiencing financial instability themselves. This crisis extended to many foreign investors who had put money in U.S. markets, and to foreign markets. Stock markets around the world experienced meltdowns, and a worldwide recession developed. This worldwide financial crisis was exacerbated by additional factors, such as the sharp increase in the price of oil. As a result of the turmoil in stock markets, many investors lost substantial portions of their financial portfolios. People spent less. Companies had difficulties. So there were more problems—the number of homeless rose, workers were laid off or terminated, the unemployed were forced to take low-paying jobs that they were overqualified for, the unemployment rate in the United States rose to nearly 10 percent, and so on.
12-4The Culture of Poverty: Evaluation of the Theory and Its Application to Client Situations
Why is poverty passed on from one generation to another? Some authorities argue that the explanation is due to a “culture of poverty.” Oscar Lewis (1966), an anthropologist, was a chief proponent of the cultural explanation. Lewis examined poor neighborhoods in various parts of the world and concluded that the poor are poor because they have a distinct culture or lifestyle. The key elements of Lewis’s cultural explanation follow.
The culture of poverty arises after extended periods of economic deprivation in highly stratified capitalistic societies. Such deprivation is brought about by high rates of unemployment and low wages for those who are employed. Economic deprivation leads to the development of attitudes and values of despair and hopelessness. Lewis (1966) described these attitudes and values as follows: “The individual who grows up in this culture has a strong feeling of fatalism, helplessness, dependence and inferiority; a strong present-time orientation with relatively little disposition to defer gratification and plan for the future, and a high tolerance for psychological pathology of all kinds” (p. 23).
Ethical Question 12.4
1. Do you believe the poor are poor because they have a distinct culture or lifestyle?
Once developed, this culture continues to exist, even though the economic factors that created it (e.g., lack of employment opportunities) no longer exist. These attitudes, norms, and expectations of the poor serve to limit their opportunities and prevent their escape. A major reason they remain locked into their culture is that they are socially isolated. They have few contacts with groups outside their own culture and are hostile to the institutions (e.g., social services and education) that might be able to help them escape poverty. They reject such institutions because they perceive them as belonging to the dominant class. Furthermore, because they view their financial circumstances as private matters and hopeless, and because they lack political and organizational skills, they do not take collective action to try to resolve their problems.
Homeless people are often forgotten in the shadow of surrounding luxury.
Maxim Shemetov/Reuters
In an even stronger indictment, Ryan (1976) criticized the culture-of-poverty theory as a classic example of blaming the victim. Blaming the poor for their circumstances is a convenient excuse, according to Ryan, for avoiding developing the programs and policies thought necessary to eradicate poverty. The real culprit is the social system that allows poverty to exist. Ryan said bluntly that the poor are not poor because of their culture, but because they do not have enough money.
Pro and con arguments for the culture of poverty theory continue to persist. There are many reasons, both external and internal, why a person may be poor. External reasons include high rates of unemployment, racial discrimination, automation or outsourcing of jobs, lack of job training programs, sex discrimination, a shortage of programs to eradicate poverty, and inflation. Internal reasons include having a physical or mental disability, being alcoholic, having obsolete job skills, becoming a parent at an early age, dropping out of school, and being uninterested in taking available jobs.
12-4aPoverty Is Functional
Obviously, poverty causes many problems, mainly for the poor themselves, but also for the affluent. However, realizing that poverty also has some functions can help us understand why some decision makers are not actively seeking to eradicate poverty. Sullivan and his colleagues (1980, p. 390) listed 11 functions that the poor provide for the affluent:
1. They are available to do the unpleasant jobs that no one else wants to do.
2. By their activities, they subsidize the more affluent. (An example of such an activity is domestic service for low pay.)
3. Jobs are established for those people, such as social workers, who provide services to the poor.
4. The poor purchase goods, such as those of poor quality, that otherwise could not be sold.
5. They serve as examples of deviance that are frowned on by the majority and that thereby support dominant norms.
6. They provide an opportunity for others to practice their “Christian duty” of helping the less fortunate.
7. They make mobility more likely for others because they are removed from the competition for a good education and good jobs.
8. They contribute to cultural activities by providing, for example, cheap labor for the construction of monuments and works of art.
9. They create cultural forms (e.g., jazz and the blues) that are often adopted by the affluent.
10. They serve as symbolic opponents for some political groups and as constituents for others.
11. They often absorb the costs of change (e.g., by being the victims of unemployment that results from technological advances).
Also, denigrating the poor has the psychological function, for some Americans, of making them feel better about themselves.
Ethical Question 12.5
1. Is it functional for a society to have a segment of the population that is poor?
Partly because poverty is functional, our society makes only a halfhearted effort to eradicate or at least reduce it. To eliminate poverty would mean a redistribution of income from the rich to the poor. Because the rich control the political power, they have generally been opposed to proposals that would eliminate poverty, such as guaranteed annual income programs.
Our country has the resources to eliminate poverty—but not the will. We can find billions of dollars in resources within a few months to pay for a war, but we are not willing to allocate similar funds to improve living conditions for the homeless and millions of other Americans who are living in poverty.
12-4bApplication of Functionalism to Poverty
Functionalists view poverty as being due to dysfunctions in the economy. A wide range of dysfunctions have been identified, some of which will be mentioned here. Rapid industrialization has caused disruption in the economic system. For example, people who lack job skills are forced into menial work at low wages. Then when automation comes, they are discharged, without having work, money, or marketable job skills. Some products produced by industry also become outdated—such as steam engines, milk bottles, and horse-drawn carriages. When such products become obsolete, workers lose their jobs. In addition, work training centers and apprenticeship programs may continue to produce graduates whose skills are no longer in demand. For example, there no longer is a job market for people who are trained to repair adding machines and manual typewriters, and direct telephone calling is sharply reducing the number of people needed as telephone operators.
Functionalists also note that the welfare system, which is intended to solve the problem of poverty, has a number of dysfunctions. Social welfare programs are sometimes established without sufficient funds to meet the needs of potential clients. Some bureaucrats are reluctant to bend the rules to help a deserving family that is technically ineligible for assistance. Social welfare programs at times have design dysfunctions in meeting the needs of recipients. For example, in the past, mothers of young children in some states were eligible for public assistance only if the fathers were out of the home. Consequently, some unemployed men were forced to desert their families so their children could be fed and sheltered.
Other problems in the welfare system are caused by inadequate information systems that fail to inform the poor about benefits to which they are entitled (in addition to the deliberate withholding of information due to prejudice). Job training and educational programs sometimes train people for positions in which there are no employment openings.
According to functionalists, the best way to deal with poverty is to make adjustments to correct these dysfunctions.
Many functionalists view some economic inequality (i.e., poverty) as being functional. Because the poor are at the bottom of the stratification system, they receive few of the material and social rewards in the society. Functionalists view the threat of being at the bottom of the heap as an important mechanism for motivating people to perform. According to functionalists, poverty becomes a social problem when it no longer performs the function of motivating people to make productive contributions to society. Poverty is also functional because the poor do the demeaning, difficult, and low-paying jobs that are essential but that no one else wants to do.
12-4cApplication of Conflict Theory to Poverty
Conflict theorists assume that, because there is such enormous wealth in modern societies, no one in such societies should go without their essential needs being met. These theorists assert that poverty exists because the power structure wants it to exist. They assert that the working poor are being exploited, being paid poverty-level wages so that their employers can reap higher profits. The unemployed are also seen as victims of the power structure. Wealthy employers oppose programs to reduce unemployment (such as educational and job training programs) because they do not want to pay the taxes to support them.
Wealthy people are apt to cling to the ideology of individualism, viewing unemployment and poverty as stemming from a lack of effort rather than from social injustice or from circumstances beyond the control of the individual. As a result, the wealthy ignore the economic and political foundations of poverty and instead get involved in charitable efforts for the poor, which leaves them feeling they have done good deeds. Conflict theorists see charity and government welfare programs as perpetuating poverty and economic inequality, because such programs quell political protests and social unrest that threaten the status quo. Conflict theorists also assert that many poor people eventually come to accept the judgments passed on them by the rest of society and adjust their aspirations and self-esteem downward.
Conflict theorists do not see poverty as either essential or functional. They see poverty as arising because some groups benefit from the poverty of others. From the conflict perspective, poverty becomes a social problem when some group feels that the existing distribution of resources is unjust and that something should be done about it.
Conflict theorists believe that poverty can best be dealt with by the poor becoming politically aware and organizing to reduce inequality through government action. These theorists view poor people’s adjustments to poverty as being a set of chains that must be broken. Most conflict theorists believe poverty can be significantly reduced only through political action that receives at least some support from concerned members of the power structure.
12-4dApplication of Interactionist Theory to Poverty
Interactionists emphasize the subjective nature of poverty. Poverty is viewed as being relative, because it depends on what it is compared to. Most poor people in the United States today have a higher standard of living than middle-class people did 200 years ago. Poor people in this country are also substantially better off than poor people in Third World countries.
The main reference for poor people in this country is their poor neighbors. A successful person in some neighborhoods is someone who knows where the next meal is coining from, and a big success may be someone who gets a job on an assembly line. People with such attitudes become trapped in their own beliefs. Another value that traps them is instant gratification, in which they are not inclined to defer immediate rewards for the sake of long-range goals, such as a college education.
Interactionists view poverty as a matter of shared expectations. The poor are judged negatively by influential groups. Those who are the objects of such labeling are stigmatized and may begin to behave in accordance with those expectations. Interactionists emphasize that poverty is not just a matter of economic deprivation, but involves the person’s self-concept. For example, a third-generation welfare recipient is apt to view himself or herself much more negatively than a person working his or her way through college, even if both have the same income.
To resolve the poverty problem, interactionists urge that the stigma associated with poverty be eliminated. Positive changes in the poverty problem will not occur until the poor are convinced that they are no longer doomed to live in poverty. The poverty trap can be sprung with improved public assistance programs that bring the poor up to an adequate standard of living, combined with programs that provide opportunities to move up the socioeconomic ladder and programs that encourage the poor to redefine their social environment.
12-4eFamily Mezzo-System Problems
The first part of this chapter has emphasized the importance of understanding macro social systems when assessing human behavior. It is equally important to understand people’s interactions with mezzo systems—small groups, including families. This section will examine problems and living arrangements in families.
12-4fEmpty-Shell Marriages
Cuber and Harroff (1971) identified three types of empty-shell marriages. In a devitalized relationship, husband and wife lack any real interest in each other or their marriage. Boredom and apathy characterize this marriage. Serious arguments are rare.
In a conflict-habituated relationship, husband and wife frequently quarrel in private. They may also quarrel in public, or they may put up a facade of being compatible. The relationship is characterized by considerable conflict, tension, and bitterness. Highlight 12.7 provides strategies for couples—and people in general—to resolve interpersonal conflicts.
Highlight 12.7
Conflict Resolution Strategies
Conflict, an antagonistic state or action involving divergent ideas or interests, is inevitable in interpersonal relationships. There is an erroneous belief in our society that conflicts always produce negative results and therefore should be avoided. But since people have divergent interests, beliefs, values, and goals, it is inevitable that conflicts will occur in our work settings and in our private lives. Conflicts are not only a natural component of any interpersonal relationship, but often desirable, because they have a number of potential payoffs. Conflicts produce lively discussions. When constructively handled, conflicts motivate the people involved to define issues more sharply, to search harder for resolution strategies, and to work harder in implementing solutions. Conflict, when handled effectively, can also lead to greater commitment to the relationship of the people involved, raise morale, and increase communication and cooperation. Successful resolution of conflict can lead to: personal growth and facilitate innovation and creativity.
However, ineffective management of conflict can lead to deterioration of rapport between the people involved, distrust, and perhaps alienation and burnout. Unfortunately, some organizations have norms that urge frontline service providers to suppress their suggestions for changes. Such norms are often communicated informally by agency management taking adverse actions (such as dismissal, demotion, assignment to onerous tasks, and no salary raises) against those who press for changes. Efforts to suppress suggestions for change by agency management usually result in lower morale, lower productivity, and less commitment to the agency’s mission by the staff.
Following are a variety of strategies for resolving conflicts: the win-lose approach, the problem-solving approach, role reversal, empathy, inquiry, being assertive, I-messages, disarming, stroking, letting go or forgiving, and mediation. This section ends with a discussion of what to do if none of these strategies works.
Win-Lose Approach
With the win-lose approach, the two sides engaged in the conflict attempt to sell their own solution without really listening to the other side. Each side denies the legitimacy of the other’s interests and concerns. Sometimes each side seeks to form a power bloc of supporters.
In win-lose situations, both sides usually end up losing. The losing side is not motivated to carry out the winning decision. The losing side is apt to resent the winning side, and then search for subtle ways to get even. In a win-lose situation, distrust increases between the two opposing sides, communication becomes more limited and inaccurate, and rapport deteriorates.
Problem-Solving Approach
The problem-solving approach asserts that it is almost always possible for both sides to have their needs met in a conflict situation. This approach is based on two basic premises: both sides have the right to have their needs met; and what is in conflict between the two sides is almost never their needs but their solutions to those needs.
The six steps in the problem-solving approach are as follows:
1. Identify and define the needs of each opposing side.
2. Generate possible alternative solutions.
3. Evaluate the merits and shortcomings of the alternative solutions.
4. Decide on the best acceptable solution.
5. Work out ways of implementing the solution.
6. At a later date, evaluate how well the solution is working.
The advantages of this approach are numerous. Both sides fulfill their needs. The resentment, hostility, and subversive actions of a win-lose situation are avoided. Open communication is increased, and trust between the parties is enhanced. Both sides are more prepared to handle conflicts constructively in the future, as they have now had experience in doing so. A cooperative, problem-solving approach also promotes creativity. The problem-solving approach often generates new perspectives on a problem and innovative alternatives for resolving it.
Role Reversal
A useful strategy in resolving conflict is role reversal. The basic rule for role reversal is this: Each person expresses his or her opinions or views only after restating the ideas and feelings of the opposing person. These ideas and feelings should be restated in one’s own words rather than parroted or mimicked in the exact words of the other person. It is advisable to begin the restatement with words such as “Your position is …,” “You seem to be saying …,” or “You apparently feel ….” Approval or disapproval, blaming, giving advice, interpreting, or persuading should be avoided.
In addition, nonverbal messages should be consistent with the verbal paraphrasing and should convey interest, openness, and attentiveness to the opposition’s ideas and feelings. Above all, role reversal should be the expression of a sincere interest in understanding the other person’s feelings, ideas, and position.
Role reversal can result in a reevaluation and a change of attitude concerning the issue by both parties. The approach has also been found to increase cooperative behavior between role reversers, to clarify misunderstandings, to change win-lose situations into problem-solving situations, and, most important, to allow the issue to be perceived from the other person’s frame of reference.
Empathy
A closely related technique to role reversal is the expression of empathy. Empathy involves putting yourself in the shoes of the person you are in conflict with, and expressing your understanding of what the other person is thinking and saying. Some phrases that may help you get started in expressing empathy are “What you seem to be saying is … “I take it that you think …,” and “I sense you feel … about this issue,”
When expressing empathy, it is essential to mirror what was said in a nonjudgmental way, to grasp the essence of what the other person is thinking or feeling. Similar to role reversal, the use of empathy facilitates open communication, assists in clarifying misunderstandings, increases cooperative behavior, and facilitates the process of no-lose problem solving.
Inquiry
If you are in conflict with someone and you are confused regarding his or her thoughts and feelings, the inquiry technique is often useful. This technique involves using gentle, probing questions to learn more about what the other person is thinking and feeling. Tone of voice is crucial in the inquiry technique, as asking a question sarcastically or defensively is apt to result in defensive responses from the other person.
Being Assertive
There are three basic styles of interacting with others: nonassertive, aggressive, and assertive. (See Chapter 7 for an expanded discussion of these terms.) Simply stated, assertive behavior is being able to express yourself in a confident, non-aggressive manner. The assertive approach in discussing issues with someone you are in conflict with is almost always more effective than the nonassertive approach or the aggressive approach. With the nonassertive approach, you fail to express your thoughts and concerns. An aggressive approach usually results in escalation of the conflict.
I-Messages
When conflicts arise, most people respond with you-messages. There are two types of you-messages: a solution message and a put-down message. A solution message orders, directs, commands, warns, threatens, preaches, moralizes, or advises. A put-down message blames, judges, criticizes, ridicules, or name-calls. Examples of you-messages include “You stop that,” “Don’t do that,” “I hate you,” and “You should know better.” You-messages tend to inhibit open communication.
I-messages, in contrast, tend to foster open communication. I-messages are nonblaming messages that simply communicate how the sender of the message believes the receiver is affecting the sender. I-messages do not provide a solution, and they do not criticize. It is possible to send an I-message without using the word I. For example, when you are a passenger in a car in which the driver is speeding recklessly, an I-message that does not use I is, “Driving this fast really frightens me.” The essence of I-messages involves sending a nonblaming message of how the sender feels the receiver is affecting him or her.
You-messages are generally counterproductive because people do not like to be ordered or criticized. You-messages frequently result in an ongoing struggle between the two people involved.
In contrast, I-messages communicate much more honestly the effect of behavior. I-messages tend to be more effective because they help the other person to assume responsibility for his or her behavior. An I-message conveys to the person with whom you are in conflict that you are trusting him or her to respect your needs and that you are trusting him or her to handle the conflict constructively. I-messages are much less likely to produce an argument. They tend to facilitate honesty, openness, and more cordial relationships. (See Chapter 8 for an expanded discussion of I-messages.)
Disarming
When you are in conflict with someone, a frequently effective strategy in moving toward resolving the conflict is the disarming technique. This technique involves finding some truth in what the other person (or side) is saying and then expressing this “agreement”—even if you feel that what the other person is saying is largely wrong, unreasonable, irrational, or unfair. There is always a grain of truth in what the other person is saying, even if it sounds obnoxious and insulting. In response to disarming, the other person won’t feel so dogmatic, and will have less of an urge to insist that he or she is right and you are wrong. As a result, he or she is apt to be more willing to examine the merits of your point of view. If you want respect, you first have to give respect. This technique helps you to listen to the other person first and facilitates more open (rather than defensive) communication thereafter.
In using the disarming technique, it is important that you be genuine in what you say and express your agreement in a sincere way.
Stroking
A closely related technique to disarming is stroking. Stroking is saying something genuinely positive to the person (or side) you are in conflict with, even in the heat of battle. Stroking tells the other person that you respect him or her, even though both of you may be angry with each other. During an argument or conflict, we have a tendency to feel the need to reject the other person before we get rejected (so we can save face). Often we overreact, and differences of opinion become blown out of proportion. To prevent this rejection, all we need to do is let the other person know that, although we are at odds, we still think highly of him or her. This makes it easier for the other person to open up and to listen, as he or she feels less threatened.
Letting Go or Forgiving
If we hold a long-term grudge against someone, we are primarily hurting ourselves (both emotionally and health-wise). Emotionally we hurt ourselves by being in a state of periodic anger (which occurs when we think about the perceived “wrong”). By holding a grudge, we also raise our level of stress, which (as described in Chapter 14) often leads to a variety of stress-related illnesses. Mentally nursing a grudge puts your body through the same strains as a major stressful event, muscles tense, blood pressure rises, and sweating increases.
Two strategies to get rid of holding a long-term grudge are “letting go” and forgiving. With the “letting go” strategy, we reframe our thinking so that we no longer dwell on the perceived wrong. One way of reframing our thinking is to do a rational self-analysis (described in Chapter 8). If there is no way to change a perceived “wrong,” the best thing we can do for our mental and physical well-being is to “let go” of it.
Forgiveness is actually another strategy for “letting go.” When you forgive someone who has hurt you, you make yourself—rather than the person who hurt you—responsible for your happiness.
Mediation
In the past two decades, mediation has increasingly been used to resolve conflicts. Mediation involves the intervention of a mutually acceptable, impartial, neutral third party who has no authoritative decision-making power but who can assist contending parties in voluntarily reaching their own settlement of the issues in dispute. Mediation leaves the decision-making power in the hands of the people in conflict. Mediation is a voluntary process in that the participants must be willing to accept the assistance of the intervenor if the dispute is to be resolved. Mediation is usually initiated when the partners no longer believe that they can handle the conflict on their own and feel the need of impartial third-party assistance.
One of the major techniques a mediator uses is a caucus. At times a mediator, or either party, may stop the mediation and request a caucus. In a caucus, the two parties are physically separated and there is no direct communication between them. The mediator meets with one of the parties or with each party individually. There are many reasons for calling a caucus: to vent intense emotions privately, to clarify misperceptions, to reduce unproductive or repetitive negative behavior, to clarify a party’s interests, to provide a pause for each party to consider an alternative, to convince an uncompromising party that the mediation process is better than going to court, to uncover confidential information, to educate an inexperienced disputant about the processes of mediation, or to design alternatives that will later be brought to a joint session.
In a caucus, one party may be willing to express possible concessions privately. Usually such concessions are conditional on the other party’s making certain concessions. Through the use of caucuses, a mediator can go back and forth, relaying information from one party to the other, and seek to develop a consensus.
What if These Strategies Don’t Work?
If used appropriately, these strategies can help resolve interpersonal conflicts in the vast majority of cases. When these strategies fail to work, you can probably correctly conclude that the person you are in conflict with does not really want to resolve the conflict. Perhaps the other person is a very hostile person who wants to generate conflicts to meet his or her personal needs by venting anger and hostility. Or perhaps the other person wants to be in conflict with you in order to make your life uncomfortable.
What can you do when you become aware that the other person really wants to sustain the conflict with you? Using the “law of requisite variety” is an option. This law states that if you continue to creatively come up with new ways of responding to the “daggers being thrown” at you, eventually the other person will grow tired of the turmoil and will finally decide to “bury the hatchet.” Here are two examples.
Janice and Pete Palmer were married about a year ago. Unknown to Janice, Pete was having lunch about once a month with a former partner (Paula), whom he had dated over a three-year period. Seven months ago, Janice walked into a restaurant at noon and saw her husband with Paula. In a fit of rage, Janice stomped out. That evening she and Pete had a major uproar about this. Pete claimed Paula was just a friend and that nothing romantic was occurring. Janice yelled and screamed. Pete indicated he would stop having lunch with Paula. But be didn’t keep his promise. About once a month he continued to see Paula, and when Janice found out, there was a major argument. Janice suggested a number of resolution options, including marriage counseling. Pete refused to go to counseling and also indicated he had decided that he was going to continue having lunch with Paula (the win-lose approach).
Then one day Janice ran into one of her former partners—Dave. Dave invited Janice for lunch or dinner. A lightbulb went on for Janice—she accepted the invitation and made plans for dinner. She went home and gleefully told Pete she had run into Dave (who Pete knew had dated Janice in the past). Pete became very jealous and tried to talk Janice out of having dinner with Dave. Janice said, “No way.” Pete was in anguish during the time Janice and Dave were having dinner. When Janice came home, Dave politely said he had called Paula that evening to cancel their next scheduled lunch and to tell her he felt it was best that they no longer meet for lunch. Pete then asked Janice if she also would no longer get together with Dave, and she agreed. Through this experience, Pete and Janice learned to respect and appreciate each other to a greater extent.
Vicki Stewart was a secretary for an attorney, Randy Fuller, who frequently criticized her and never complimented her. The harder she sought to perform well, the more it seemed she was criticized. She tried a variety of resolution strategies—discussing the conflict with him, discussing it with his supervisor, and making a point of complimenting him to set a good example. Nothing worked. Finally, she decided on a new approach. Mr. Fuller’s grammar and spelling were atrocious. Ms. Stewart always improved the spelling and grammar when given rough drafts from Mr. Fuller and the other attorneys in the office. When Mr. Fuller gave her a rough draft of a legal brief for the state supreme court, Ms. Stewart typed it as it was and sent it after Mr. Fuller signed it (he frequently signed such documents without proofreading them). When Mr. Fuller finally read the brief three weeks later, he was first angry, and then discussed the matter with his supervisor. His supervisor at first laughed, and then informed Mr. Fuller that in order to avoid a similar situation in the future, he needed to show appreciation to Ms. Stewart. After a few more days of reflecting about it, Mr. Fuller decided it was in his personal interest to display more respect and appreciation to Ms. Stewart.
In a passive-congenial relationship, the partners are not happy, but are content with their lives and generally feel adequate. They may have some interests in common, but these interests are generally insignificant. The spouses contribute little to each other’s real satisfactions. This type of relationship generally has little overt conflict.
Ethical Question 12.6
1. Is it better to get a divorce than live in an empty-shell marriage?
The couples in these marriages engage in few activities together and display no pleasure in being in one another’s company. Sexual relations between the partners, as might be expected, are rare and generally unsatisfying. Visitors will note that the partners (and often the children) appear insensitive, cold, and callous to each other. Closer observation will reveal that the family members are highly aware of each other’s weaknesses and sensitive areas, and manage to frequently mention these areas in order to hurt one another.
Both spouses have to put considerable effort into making a marriage work in order to prevent an empty-shell marriage from gradually developing. The number of empty-shell marriages ending hi divorce is unknown. It is likely that many eventually do.
12-4gDivorce
Our society places a higher value on romantic love than most other societies do. In societies where marriages are arranged by parents, being in love generally has no role in mate selection. In our society, however, romantic love is a key factor in forming a marriage.
Children in this country are socialized from an early age to believe in the glories of romantic love. Magazines, films, TV programs, and books portray “happy-ending” romantic adventures. All of these romantic stories suggest that every normal person falls in love with that one special person, gets married, and lives happily ever after. This happily-ever-after ideal rarely happens.
About one of two marriages ends in divorce (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015). This high rate has gradually been increasing. Before World War I, divorce was comparatively rare.
Divorce usually leads to a number of difficulties for those involved. First, those who are divorcing face emotional concerns, such as concerns that they have failed, over whether they are able to give and receive love, about a sense of loneliness, over the stigma attached to divorce, about the reactions of friends and relatives, over whether they are doing the right thing by parting, and over whether they will be able to make it on their own. Many people feel trapped because they believe they cannot live with their spouse and cannot live without him or her. Dividing up the personal property is another area that frequently leads to bitter differences of opinions. If there are children, there are concerns about how the divorce will affect them.
Other issues also need to be decided. Who will get custody of the children? Joint custody is now an alternative. With joint custody, both parents have responsibility for decision making involving the children, and they may (or may not) share equally in the physical custody of the children. If one parent is awarded custody, controversies are apt to arise over visiting rights, and how much (if any) child support should be paid. Both spouses often face the difficulties of finding new places to live, making new friends, doing things alone in our couple-oriented society, trying to make it on their own financially, and thinking about the hassles of dating.
Studies show that going through a divorce is very difficult for the spouses (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). People are less likely to perform their jobs well and more likely to be fired during this period. Divorced people have a shorter life expectancy. Suicide rates are higher for divorced men.
Divorce per se is no longer automatically assumed to be a social problem. In some marriages where there is considerable tension, bitterness, and dissatisfaction, divorce is sometimes a solution. It may be a concrete step that some people take to end the unhappiness and to begin leading a more productive and gratifying life. It is also increasingly being recognized that a divorce may be better for the children, as they are no longer subjected to the tension and unhappiness in a marriage that has gone sour.
The rising rate of divorce does not necessarily mean that more marriages are failing. It may simply mean that more people are dissolving empty-shell marriages rather than continuing to live unhappily.
Reasons for Divorce
The reason people decide to divorce may have nothing to do with specific “bad” qualities of the marriage partners. Rather, a major reason people divorce is disappointment with each other. In other words, partners simply do not measure up to their spouse’s expectations. Over time such disappointment and disillusionment lead to the decision to divorce. ( Highlight 12.8 provides a framework for people to analyze their love relationships.)
Highlight 12.8
Analyzing Love Relationships
Cameron-Bandler (1985) developed the following framework for understanding the various stages of a love relationship. Cameron-Bandier also gave suggestions for improving love relationships. Knowing when to get out of a destructive relationship is as important as knowing how to improve a healthy relationship.
1. Attraction/Infatuation: All of us have in mind a picture of our ideal date or mate. This picture may include a variety of characteristics about such items as physical appearance, color of ham, color of eyes, age, height, weight, personality, hobbies, personal interests, religion, musical interests, sports, education, career interests, family background, financial security, and sexual values and interests. Such pictures vary from person to person. When we meet someone who comes close to having the characteristics we desire, we tell ourselves that this is an ideal potential partner. We feel strongly attracted to the person and are in a stage of infatuation. After a few dates, the infatuation may intensify. Cameron-Bandier notes that this is “a fun time, full of intensity and excitement and romance” (p. 119).
2. Appreciation: In this stage, the two persons are a couple who are seriously dating, living together, or even married. They are delighted to be together. They focus on each other’s positive qualities. They appreciate each other, rather than taking one another for granted. Cameron-Bandier says, “This phase can be based on a wide range of illusions or varying degrees of knowledgeable understanding of each other’s wants and needs. The extent to which it is based on knowledgeable understanding is the extent to which it can be depended upon to last” (p. 120).
There are three basic elements for achieving and maintaining appreciation in a relationship. First, each partner has to know what he or she needs and wants in a relationship. Second, each partner must know what specifically fulfills these needs and wants. Third, each person must be able to elicit these fulfilling behaviors, lovingly, from his or her partner.
3. Habituation: Habituation is the stage of becoming accustomed to something. It involves being comfortable and secure with dependability and familiarity. For people who seek security, habituation is viewed as equaling safety and commitment. However, for people seeking adventure, habituation can be viewed as equaling boredom. Cameron-Bandier notes, “The phase of habituation can be a very positive one, provided it cycles back to appreciation and includes an occasional trip back to attraction” (p. 121).
Partners in this state of a relationship are advised to engage in bid and new activities that they enjoy. One suggestion is for the partners to commit two weekends each year for enhancing the relationship: The partners first agree on how much money will be spent for each weekend. Then one of the partners arranges the activities that are designed to meet his or her fantasies of how he or she wants to spend time with the partner. A few weeks later the other partner similarly arranges for his or her fantasy weekend. Among other benefits, these weekends serve as a learning experience for each partner as to the other’s previously unexpressed or newly formed desires.
4. Expectation: Cameron-Bandier writes, “The difference between duty and pleasure often rears its ugly head in the phase of expectation” (p. 122). Many of the things that one did and were appreciated by one’s partner now become an expectation. For example, at first A expressed intense appreciation when B shopped for groceries and cooked on certain evenings. Now these tasks have become expected duties, and B receives frowns and criticisms when they aren’t done. This stage in a relationship is usually signaled by more complaints than compliments. Each partner focuses on what the other is not doing, rather than on what he or she is doing to benefit the relationship. One way of seeking to halt further deterioration in a relationship when this stage is reached is an intervention in which each partner is encouraged to, once again, treat the other as a lover instead of as a spouse.
5. Disappointment/Disillusionment: Unless the couple works on their relationship, disappointment and disillusionment soon follow expectation. In this stage the partners become increasingly disappointed because each is failing to fulfill the other’s expectations. In this stage partners are apt to say their mate has started some bad habits; however, closer investigation usually shows the mate has been engaging in the undesirable behavior all along. In this stage the partners still remember the past as being wonderful and want things to be “the way they used to be.” A relationship at this stage can be improved by a mutual commitment from each partner to put forth efforts to elicit those fulfilling behaviors, lovingly, from his or her partner.
6. Threshold/Perceptual Reorientation: The threshold is reached when one or both partners decide the relationship is over. The partner reaching this stage has a memory change—from remembering past pleasurable experiences to remembering primarily past unpleasant memories. Such partners are no longer able to feel the good times, even when they think about earlier good times. Sometimes the threshold is reached by the occurrence of a minor event that, like the straw that broke the camel’s back, leads a partner to conclude the relationship is over. The partner reaching this threshold has a perceptual reorientation of discounting the partner’s positive qualities and instead seeks to find evidence in the partner’s behaviors that warrant terminating the relationship.
7. Verification: In this stage the partner who has decided to end the relationship focuses on observing the other’s behaviors and qualities to find evidence that warrants termination. Sometimes during this phase, one or both partners experience the feeling that “I can’t live with him/her and I can’t live without him/her.” Considerable emotional energy is generated by anyone with this feeling, because he or she is under intense stress.
Usually one of the partners reaches this stage sooner than the other. One wants out, and the other seeks to maintain the relationship. The person seeking to maintain it may engage in a variety of behaviors, such as seeking to please the partner, attempting to make the other partner feel guilty, seeking to have a child in order to “lock” the partner into the relationship, flirting with others to make the partner jealous, or threatening suicide. Relationships at this stage are not fun. The partner who wants out has the most power, as he or she decides whether the relationship continues or ends.
8. Termination: At this stage one or both partners decide to end the relationship. This stage is usually a painful experience for both. Property must be divided. Goodbyes are said—sometimes with considerable anger and animosity. If children are involved, custody and child support arrangements need to be worked out. If the couple is married, the legal divorce process must be gone through. In addition, each person has to work on forming a new life without the former partner.
We often tend to treat strangers with more respect than we give the people close to us. If a stranger does something we dislike, we usually ignore it or politely express our concerns. But if someone we love does something we dislike, we are apt to criticize and attempt to train the partner to meet our expectations. A major suggestion for improving intimate relationships is to seek to treat a partner with the same kind of respect given to strangers.
There are many sources of marital breakdown, including alcoholism, economic strife caused by unemployment or other financial problems, incompatibility of interests, infidelity, jealousy, verbal or physical abuse of spouse, and interference in the marriage by relatives and friends.
As noted earlier, many people marry because they believe they are romantically in love. If this romantic love does not grow into rational love, the marriage is apt to fail. Unfortunately, young people are socialized in our society to believe that marriage will bring them continual romance, resolve all their problems, be sexually exciting, be full of adventure, and always be as wonderful as the courtship. (Most young people only need to look at their parents’ marriage to realize such romantic ideals are seldom attained.) Unfortunately, living with someone in a marriage involves carrying out the garbage, washing dishes and clothes, being weary from work, putting up with the partner’s distasteful habits, changing diapers, dealing with conflicts over such things as how to spend a vacation, and differences in sexual interests. Making a marriage work requires that each spouse put considerable effort into making it successful.
Another factor that is contributing to an increasing divorce rate is the unwillingness of some men to accept the changing status of women. Many men still prefer a traditional marriage in which the husband is dominant and the wife plays a supportive (subordinate) role as child rearer, housekeeper, and emotional supporter of her husband. Many women no longer accept such a status and demand an egalitarian marriage in which making major decisions, doing the domestic tasks, raising the children, and bringing home paychecks are shared responsibilities.
About 58 percent of women ages 25 to 64 the United States are now in the labor force (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015). As a result, women are no longer as dependent financially on their husbands. Women who are able to support themselves are more likely to seek a divorce if their marriage goes sour.
Another factor contributing to the increasing divorce rate is the growth of individualism. Individualism involves the belief that people should seek to develop their interests and capacities to the fullest, to fulfill their own needs and desires. The interests of the individual take precedence over the interests of the family. People in our society have increasingly come to accept individualism as a way of life. In contrast, people in more traditional societies and in extended families are socialized to put the interests of the group first, with their own individual interests being viewed as less important. In extended families, people view themselves as members of a group first and as individuals second. With the growing belief in individualism, people who conclude that they are unhappily married are much more apt to dissolve the marriage and seek a new life.
Another reason for the rising divorce rate is the growing acceptance of divorce in our society. With less stigma attached to divorce, more people who are unhappily married are now ending the marriage.
In addition, modern families do not have as many functions as traditional families did. Education, food production, entertainment, and other functions once centered in the family are now largely provided by outside agencies. In earlier times, the end of a marriage was far more likely to deprive both spouses of much more than each other’s company. Because family members performed so many functions for one another, divorce in the past meant a father being without a wife as a partner in educating the children and doing the farm work, and meant a mother being without a husband to plow the fields and raise crops to feed their children. Today, when emotional satisfaction is the bond that holds marriage together, the waning of love and the failure to meet one another’s expectations leave few reasons for a marriage to continue. ( Highlight 12.9 provides some facts about divorce.)
Highlight 12.9
Facts about Divorce
· Age of spouses: Divorce is most likely to occur when the partners are in their 20s.
· Length of engagement: Divorce rates are higher for those whose engagement was brief.
· Age at marriage: People who marry at a very young age (particularly teenagers) are more apt to divorce.
· Length of marriage: Most divorces occur within three years after marriage. There is also an increase in divorce shortly after the children are grown; it seems that some couples wait until the children are ready to leave the nest before dissolving an unhappy marriage.
· Social class: Divorce occurs more frequently at the lower socioeconomic levels.
· Education: Divorce rates are higher for those with fewer years of schooling. Interestingly, divorce occurs more frequently when the wife’s educational level is higher than the husband’s.
· Residence: Divorce rates are higher in urban areas than in rural areas.
· Second marriages: The more often individuals have divorced, the more likely they are to divorce again.
· Religion: The more religious individuals are the less apt they are to divorce. Divorce rates are higher for Protestants than for Catholics or Jews. Divorce rates are also higher for interfaith marriages than for single-faith marriages.
Source: A. Mooney, D. Knox, and C. Schacht, 2015, Understanding Social Problem (8th ed.). Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Consequences of Divorce
Both members of the couple, even the person who initiated the divorce, experience grief at the loss. Familiar patterns of behavior must be changed. Even the loss of negative behavior patterns causes stress, because new ways of interacting must be established. The old ways, even when they were bad, were at least predictable. The unknown is scary to many people, making any kind of change more difficult.
Feelings are often strong and varied after a divorce. People may feel anger and anxiety. Things didn’t work out as they had planned. It’s easy to think of how unfair it all is and to blame the other partner for the failure. People may also feel self-blame and guilt.
The current trend is toward joint custody in divorce cases. When custody is shared, both parents are more apt to be closely involved with the children.
Ethical Question 12.7
1. Is it desirable for mothers to be awarded custody of the children when divorce occurs? Does this tradition discriminate against fathers?
Children of Divorce
About 50 percent of children born to married parents in the United States are affected by a divorce (Mooney Knox, & Schacht, 2015). These children must confront many unknowns. For instance, there is often a change of home environment, frequently to a home that is not as nice as the old one. Another issue is custody. Legal custody refers to whether one or both parents maintain all rights and responsibilities regarding the children.
Kaluger and Kaluger (1984) note that society places two conflicting demands on parents who are contemplating a divorce:
One is that the couple’s first concern should be with their parental roles and that they should try to put aside their marital problems, which imply that marriage roles are secondary to parental roles. Yet, in a society that places great emphasis on personal ego-need satisfaction in marriage, the placing of marriage in a secondary position may be difficult for the married person to accept. (p. 298)
A basic question that parents contemplating divorce ask themselves is, “Which would be better for the children—that we remain unhappily married or we end the marriage and thereby end the conflict and tension?” A key to answering this question depends on what life will be like after the divorce. In general, children grow up and become better adjusted when they have a good relationship with one parent than when they grow up in a two-parent home with discord and discontent. An inaccessible, rejecting, or hostile parent is worse than an absent one (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
In general, children who have a good relationship with one parent are better adjusted than children who grow up in a two-parent home where there is discord and discontent.
Simon Jarratt/Corbis
Within five years after a divorce, three-quarters of all divorced people are remarried (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). Therefore, most children of divorce eventually return to living in a family having an adult male and female.
The breakup of a marriage is traumatic not only for the parents but also for the children. Children appear to react more severely to a divorce than they do to the death of a parent, as children of divorce are more likely to get into trouble with the law than are those whose parent has died (Mooney, Knox, & Schacht, 2015). This delinquent behavior appears to be a reaction more to the discontent in the home that caused the divorce than to the separation and divorce itself, because children from intact homes where there is considerable conflict are also more likely to commit delinquent acts.
Immediately after a breakup, there is considerable disruption and disorganization in family life. The parents have a variety of stresses to deal with, including economic pressures (partly the result of now maintain in g two households), restrictions on recreational and social activities (more so for the custodial parent, especially if she or he is unemployed), and the need for affectionate and intimate relationships. A number of changes also occur in parent–child interactions. Divorced parents make fewer demands on the children, are less consistent in discipline, communicate less effectively with them, and have less control over them. These differences are greatest during the first year after the breakup. The first two years after a breakup tend to be stressful for everyone in the family.
A child’s reaction to a divorce depends on a variety of factors, including the age and sex of the child, the length of time of severe discord in the marriage, and the length of time between the first separation and the formal divorce. A key factor in how traumatic the divorce will be for the child is how well the parents deal with the child’s concerns, fears, questions, and anxieties. It is much more traumatic when parents do not explain that the breakup is not the child’s fault and if the divorce and custody arrangements are hotly contested.
The trauma of divorce is exacerbated when one or both parents seek to turn the child against the other parent. Transferring anger and bitterness about the breakup to the child also increases the child’s trauma. The many feelings children of divorce may experience include pain, confusion, anger, hate, bitter disappointment, a sense of failure, and self-doubt.
Children need to work through at least six major issues in order to maintain positive emotional adjustment. First, children need to accept that their parents’ marriage is over. They need to understand that their parents will no longer be together and that their access to one or both parents will be changed. Second, children need to withdraw from any conflicts their parents might be having and get on with their own lives and activities. Third, children need to cope with their loss. This might include their loss of contact with a parent, home situation, family rules, or family routines. Fourth, children need to acknowledge and cope with their strong feelings of anger at their parents and of self-blame. They need to forgive all involved, stop dwelling on what went wrong, and attend to the present and future. Fifth, children need to understand that the situation is permanent. They need to relinquish any dreams they might have that their parents will get together someday. Sixth, children need to maintain a realism about their own relationships with other people. They need to understand and accept that just because their parents’ relationship failed, it does not mean their own close relationships will fail.
Although the period during and immediately following a divorce is traumatic for both parents and children, the negative effects appear to lessen after two years. The worst disturbance seems to occur during the first year after the divorce. It seems that after a while the single-parent family is able to make adjustments to the new financial and social situation and regain its homeostasis. Over time, fathers also tend to become less and less available to their children. Perhaps children learn to accept their mother as the primary, single family leader. They have to (and do) adjust to the fact that a father is not always available.
A critical variable affecting children’s adjustment to a divorce is the way the parents handle both the divorce and their children’s feelings. For example, children react more negatively if the divorce proceedings are drawn out and bitter. Children also suffer when parents use them as a buffer and a means of transmitting hostility, because this only fosters children’s confusion and resentment. As Highlight 12.10 indicates, the effects of a divorce on children depend largely on what happens after the divorce.
Highlight 12.10
The Effects of a Divorce on Children Depend on What Happens after the Divorce
The Haag Family
Mary Beth and Doug Haag obtained a divorce after nine years of marriage. They had two children, John, 8, and David, 4. The divorce process was filled with a fair amount of emotional trauma, because both partners were uncertain whether to end the marriage. But both partners were honest in answering their children’s questions about the divorce and made crystal clear to them that they were in no way at fault for the marriage ending. Mary Beth and Doug decided to each take custody of a child, partly because John wanted to live with Doug. Doug took custody of John, and Mary Beth took custody of David. The reasons for separating the children were carefully explained to them. The children frequently visited each other on weekends, holidays, and during the summer. Telephone calls between the children were frequent and encouraged.
Mary Beth and Doug respected each other after the divorce and no longer fought. Doug was an accountant, and Mary Beth was an elementary-school teacher; both earned enough that neither was in serious financial difficulty. Doug was married a year and a half later to a woman who understood the harmonious relationship that had developed between Doug and Mary Beth after the divorce,
Mary Beth occasionally dates, but largely concentrates her free time on attending college to obtain her master’s degree and on spending time with David. The home environment is now much better for all the Haags than it was in the final years of a marriage that was filled with bitterness and hostility.
The Denny Family
Robert and Corine Denny divorced after 13 years of marriage. Robert, a dentist, asked, for the divorce because he was involved with one of his dental assistants. Corine was furious when she found out. Because she had stayed home to raise the children for the last 12 years, she got the larger part of the divorce settlement. She received the house, the year-old Buick, custody of the three children, and $2000 per month in child support. The reasons for the divorce were never fully explained to the children, because the parents wanted to hide the fact that Robert had been dating someone else for two years prior to the divorce. As a result, the children assumed they were responsible for causing the tension and arguments before the divorce and felt guilty because they thought they were responsible, for their parents’ separation.
Corine became depressed after the divorce and sought to drown her misery in vodka. She also began going out with a woman friend who was also divorced. Frequently she brought men home to stay overnight. Her standard of living dropped sharply. She refused to look for a job or seek job training and sought to live off the child support payments. When the children were with their father (which was infrequent, because Corine tended to sabotage such times), Robert sought to dazzle his children with how well his life was now going. Both Robert and Corine sought to use the children as pawns to get back at each other. Corine viewed Robert as someone who had destroyed her comfortable life, while Robert viewed Corine as an irresponsible lush.
The children suffered greatly. Their grades dropped sharply in school. They were embarrassed about having friends over because their house was a mess and they never knew when their mother would be intoxicated. The oldest daughter, Jill, 12, began skipping school and is now sexually active without using birth control. Bob, 10, was recently caught for shoplifting and is on informal supervision at the juvenile probation department. Dennis, 8, has withdrawn. He spends most of his free time watching rock videos on TV. In school he makes practically no effort, has few friends, and is receiving Ds and Fs.
Lefrancois (1999) reviewed a number of studies of the effects on children of parental separation and divorce. One large body of research (reviewing studies that were conducted more than 30 years ago) found that divorce had significant negative effects on school achievement, behavior, adjustment, self-concept, and relations with both the remaining parent and the departed parent. Several explanations were offered, including the absence of one parent (the remaining parent has to struggle to raise the children alone), problems adjusting to the remaining parent (who may be in emotional turmoil over the breakup of the marriage), continuing conflict between the two parents, and economic hardship. Later investigations (Lefrancois, 1999), however, found fewer negative effects on children than did these earlier studies. Apparently, the impact of divorce was far stronger in the 1950s and 1960s than it is now. Why? Perhaps because divorces then were less culturally acceptable, both children and parents were more likely to encounter disapproval and less support from family members, the school system, and the community.
Social Work Roles: Marriage Counseling
The primary social service for people who are considering a divorce, or who have an empty-shell marriage, is marriage counseling. (Those who do divorce may also need counseling to work out adjustment problems—such as adjusting to a single person’s life. Generally, such counseling is one-on-one, but at times it may include the ex-spouse and the children, depending on the nature of the problem.)
Marriage counseling is provided by a variety of professionals, including social workers, psychologists, guidance counselors, psychiatrists, and members of the clergy. It is also provided by most direct social service agencies.
Marriage counselors generally use a problem-solving approach in which
· (1)
problems are identified;
· (2)
alternative solutions are generated;
· (3)
the merits and shortcomings of the alternatives are examined;
· (4)
the clients select one or more alternatives to implement; and
· (5)
the extent to which the problems are being resolved by the alternatives are later assessed.
Because the spouses “own” their problems, they are the primary problem solvers.
Married couples may encounter a wide range of problems. A partial list includes sexual problems, financial problems, communication problems, problems with relatives, interest conflicts, infidelity, conflicts over how to discipline and raise children, and drug or alcohol abuse problems. Marriage counselors seek to have spouses precisely identify their problems and then use the problem-solving format to resolve the issues. At times, some couples may rationally decide a divorce is in their best interests.
Marriage counselors try to see both spouses together during sessions. Practically all marital conflicts involve both partners, and therefore are best resolved when both partners work together to resolve them. (If the spouses are seen separately, each spouse is apt to become suspicious of what the other is telling the counselor.) By seeing both together, the counselor can facilitate communication between the partners and have them work together on resolving their concerns. Seeing both partners together allows each partner the opportunity to refute what the other is saying. Only in rare cases is it desirable to hold an individual session with a spouse. For example, if one partner wants to work on unwanted emotions connected with an incestuous relationship in the past, meeting individually with that spouse might be desirable. When an individual session is held, the other spouse should be told why the session is being held and what will be discussed. If the other spouse is not informed, he or she might suspect that negative information is being related, which will increase his or her distrust of both the spouse and the counselor.
If some of the areas of conflict involve other family members (such as the children), it may be desirable to include them in some of the sessions. For example, if a father is irritated because his 14-year-old daughter is often disrespectful, the daughter may be invited to the next session to work on this subproblem.
The self-help organization Parents Without Partners serves divorced people, unwed mothers or fathers, and stepparents. It is partially a social organization, but it is also an organization to help members adjust to raising a family alone. Social workers may function as brokers in linking divorcing parents to this organization.
Divorce mediation helps spouses who have decided to obtain a divorce resolve such issues as dividing the personal property, resolving custody and child-support issues, and working out possible alimony arrangements. Some social workers are now receiving specialized training to provide divorce mediation services.
12-4hOne-Parent Families
About one child in four in the United States lives in a home with only one parent present. Several reasons account for this: divorce, desertion, death of a spouse, and births outside marriage. About 90 percent of these families are headed by women. The rate of female-headed homes in African American families is nearly three times that in white families—more than 60 percent (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). These rates have increased significantly over the past four decades. The traditional family configuration (two parents, one a mother who remains in the home to provide full-time child care) is becoming less and less common.
Just what effect does being raised in a one-parent home have on children? Obviously, a single parent must fulfill all the responsibilities of running a home, instead of being able to share them with a partner. A single parent wrestles with responsibilities and tasks equal to two full-time jobs in the traditional two-parent family. Research reviewed by Lefrancois (1999) parallels the findings, described earlier, regarding the effect of divorce: 30 to 50 years ago, children raised in one-parent families were found to be significantly more likely than those raised in two-parent families to experience behavioral, social, emotional, or academic problems.
It must be taken into consideration that this research was done during a time when a father’s absence was considered an anomaly. Female-headed, one-parent families are much more common today. Possible negative influences on children, such as feeling different from other children or being stigmatized for their family situations, may no longer have as much adverse impact.
Poverty affects one-parent families significantly more than it does two-parent families. Differences in the average income levels of one-parent, female-headed families and two-parent families are striking. Twenty-nine percent of female-headed families are living in poverty, compared to 7 percent of two-parent families (Mooney Knox, & Schacht, 2015).
White mothers who live in poverty most likely have been married. Their current single status results from divorce, separation, or death of a spouse. African American mothers in poverty, however, are more likely to have borne their children without having been married (Mooney Knox, & Schacht, 2015). See Highlight 12.11 for information on Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF), which is designed to assist one-parent families, as well as other low-income families.
Highlight 12.11
Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF)
In 1996, President Bill Clinton and the Democrats and Republicans in Congress compromised on welfare reform and passed the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act. This act abolished the AFDC (Aid to Families with Dependent Children) program and replaced it with TANF. No longer is cash assistance to the poor an entitlement. It is now a short-term program and a variable one among the states. Key provisions of TANF are the following:
· The federal guarantee of cash assistance for poor families with children (under the AFDC program) is ended. Each state now receives a capped block grant (lump sum) to run its own welfare and work programs.
· The head of every family has to work within two years, or the family loses its benefits. After receiving welfare for two months, adults have to perform community service unless they have found regular jobs. (States can choose not to have a community service requirement.)
· Lifetime public welfare assistance is limited to five years. (States can establish stricter limits.) Hardship exemptions from this requirement are available for up to 20 percent of the recipients in a state.
· States can provide payments to unmarried teenage parents only if a mother under 18 is living at home, or in another adult-supervised setting, and attends high school or an alternative educational or training program as soon as the child is 12 weeks old.
· States are required to maintain their own spending on public welfare at 75 percent of their 1994 level, or 80 percent if they failed to put enough public welfare recipients to work.
· States cannot penalize, a woman on public welfare who does not work because she cannot find day care for a child under 6 years old.
· States are required to deduct from the benefits of welfare mothers who refuse to help identify the fathers. States may deny Medicaid to adults who lose welfare benefits because of a failure to meet work requirements.
· A woman on public welfare who refuses to cooperate in identifying the father other child must lose at least 25 percent of her benefits.
· Future legal immigrants who have not yet become citizens are ineligible for most federal welfare benefits and social services during their first five years in the United States. SSI benefits and food stamp eligibility ended in 1996 for noncitizens, including legal immigrants, receiving benefits.
Because each state has considerable leeway in designing its own version of TANF, it is accurate to say that there are 50 versions of TANF. Taking advantage of the flexibility allowed by the federal legislation, some states modified TANF services by setting stricter time limits on how long someone living in poverty could receive cash assistance. For example, Georgia and Florida set their limits at 48 months; Montana and Indiana, at 24 months; and Utah, at 36 months. Cash amounts given to TANF participants vary widely from one state to another, with Alabama and Mississippi on the low end, and California and New York on the high end.
Numerous studies have been conducted, and are continuing to be conducted, on the effects of Temporary Assistance to Needy Families. Supporters of the program tout several benefits. Critics cite a number of shortcomings.
Supporters of the program cite the following benefits:
· Employment of young single mothers (ages 18–24) has nearly doubled.
· Employment of never-married mothers has increased.
· The number of Americans on cash assistance (the AFDC program compared to TANF) has plummeted.
· Teenage birth rates have fallen since 1996. One motivation for the passage of the 1966 Welfare Reform Act was the desire to change policies that conservatives claim reward early childbearing by single mothers. The Welfare Reform Act denies public assistance payments to teenage mothers, except under the following conditions: States can provide payments to unmarried teenage parents only if a mother under 18 is living at home or in another adult-supervised setting and attends high school or an alternative educational or training program as soon as the child is 12 weeks old. The underlying reason behind denying welfare payments to most teenage mothers is to send a message to teenagers that having babies will not be financially rewarded.
· Almost all mothers (and fathers) who are working state they prefer work to welfare. Having a job may be more psychologically beneficial to the parents and to their children than being on a stigmatized welfare program. Some of these working parents may rise in socioeconomic status and have an increased sense of self-worth and, a higher living status. Eventually these families will have more total income than when they received cash assistance. In such families, the children are apt to be proud of their working mothers (or parents), and such children are apt to follow their mothers’ (or parents’) example.
Critics of TANF cite the following shortcomings:
· Most mothers who leave the welfare rolls find jobs, but a large minority do not. Moreover, some of those who find jobs soon lose them and do not reappear on the welfare rolls.
· Some former welfare recipients are making successful transitions to work, often after many years of welfare dependency. Yet even the more successful job holders experience economic hardship and often must ask for help from family and friends. Incomes are rising at the top, but not at the bottom.
· The long-term impact of welfare reform on both single mothers and their children could well turn out to be similar to the long-term impact of deinstitutionalization on the mentally ill; good for some but terrible for others.
· There have been significant increases in the proportion of poor people, especially single mothers and their children, who are not covered by health insurance. Once people leave welfare to begin working, they may not be eligible for Medicaid, and their employers may not offer health, insurance. (Implementation of the Affordable Care Act, passed in 2010, may provide the needed health care.)
· Many working mothers report problems finding satisfactory child care. There is some evidence that young children are being left alone, sometimes for long periods. Will welfare reform end up helping parents but hurting their children?
· The people who have been kicked off the welfare rolls are pushing down wages for low-skilled workers in the United States. People desperate for food and shelter are being hired for lower wages than those currently employed, who may lose their jobs to former welfare recipients. Flooding the labor market with thousands of desperate workers has helped to lower labor costs for businesses. The welfare overhaul has depressed the median wage of all women workers. Increased competition for jobs makes it easier for employers to pay less, and harder for unions to negotiate good contracts.
· The group that has benefited most by welfare reform is employers—as this group now has a much larger pool of applicants for low-income jobs. Welfare reform has led to increased economic hardship for many low-income parents and their children.
· States now have much more choice in determining whom they will assist. What requirements they will impose upon those who receive aid, and what non-cash supports those families will receive. As a result, there is much more disparity between states than existed under AFDC. With this disparity between states, two children in identical situations in different states now live with very different realities. One may have household resources above the poverty level; stable, high-quality child care; and health insurance. The other may have none of these.
· Most of those who receive TANF do not make it above the poverty line, as TANF benefits are often below the poverty line. In addition, many of those who obtain a job often remain in poverty because the jobs are often minimum-wage (or slightly above) jobs that are below the poverty line.
· There is a serious danger that many TANF recipients will be trapped into long-term poverty TANF programs provide almost no opportunities, via paid benefits, for TANF recipients to continue their education beyond high school. As a result, TANF recipients are likely to obtain minimum-wage jobs and other “dead-end work” (work involving poor pay, scant fringe benefits, and little opportunity for advancement). The education offered to TANF recipients does not prepare or qualify them for higher-end work.
Source: Alvin L. Schorr, Welfare Reform: Failure and Remedies. West-port, CT: Praeger Publishers, 2001; Kirk A. Johnson, Robert Rector, and Mimi Abramovitz, 2007, “Has Welfare Reform Worked?” in Howard Jacob Karger, James Midgley, Peter A. Kindle, and C. Brené Brown (eds.), Controversial Issues in Social Policy (3rd ed.). Boston: Pearson, pp. 200–216; William Kornblum and Joseph Julian, Social Problems, 14th ed. (Boston: Pearson, 2012), p. 217.
12-4iBlended Families
As mentioned previously, one in two marriages in the United States ends in divorce (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). Many people who divorce have children. Most people who divorce remarry within a few years. Some people who are marrying for the first time have parented a child while single. Some people cohabitate, and one or both partners may have children from a prior relationship. Thus, a variety of blended families are now being formed in our society.
As indicated in Chapter 4, a blended family is any nontraditional configuration of people who live together, are committed to each other, and perform functions traditionally assumed by families. Such relationships may not involve biological or legal linkages. The important thing is that such groups function as families.
In blended families, numerous adjustments have to be made. One or both partners have to adjust to raising children that are biologically parented by someone else. The children in blended families have to form relationships with stepsiblings. The children in such families also often have to adjust to a prior divorce. Many children in blended families have to form new relationships with a biological parent who is absent from the home and with a stepparent. A man or woman who marries a divorced person who has children often has to form a relationship with the ex-spouse, as the ex-spouse is apt to have visitation rights and an impact on the family. If ex-spouses are still feuding, they are apt to use the children as pawns to create problems, thereby generating extensive strife and turmoil.
Because practically all marital conflicts involve both partners and therefore are best resolved when the partners work together on resolving their conflicts, marriage counselors try to see both spouses together.
iStock.com/FatCamera
Blended families are increasing in number and proportion in our society. The family dynamics and relationships are much more complex than in the traditional nuclear family. Blended families are, in short, burdened by much more baggage than two childless adults who are forming a family for the first time. Blended families must deal with stress that arises from the losses (as a result of divorce or death) experienced by both adults and children, which can make them afraid to love and to trust. Previously established bonds between children and their biological parents may interfere with the formation of ties to the stepparent. If children go back and forth between two households, conflicts between stepchildren and stepparents may be intensified.
Some difficulties in adjustment can be anticipated (Lefrancois, 1999). Jealousies arise between new siblings. These jealousies may focus on the sharing of parental attention with the new partner and new siblings. Another issue for children is adjusting to a new parent, who may have different ideas, values, rules, and expectations. Yet another adjustment involves sharing space and property when children aren’t used to sharing with these new people, or to sharing at all. Finally, if one member of the couple comes into the relationship with no child-rearing experience, an adjustment is apt to be necessary by all family members to allow time for the new parent to learn and adapt.
People come into a blended family with ideas and issues based on past experiences. Old relationships and ways of doing things still have their impacts. A blended family differs somewhat from a traditional family in that more people are involved—for example, ex-spouses, former in-laws, and an assortment of cousins, uncles, and aunts. The new couple can have both positive and negative interactions with this large supporting cast. If a prior marriage has ended bitterly, the unresolved emotions that remain will affect the present relationship.
A blended family was created when this woman married a single dad.
pixelheadphoto digitalskillet/ Shutterstock.com
The area of greatest stress for most stepparents is child rearing. A stepchild, used to being raised in a somewhat different way, may balk at having to conform to a new set of rules. The stepchild may also have difficulty accepting the stepparent as one who has the right to parent him or her. Such a difficulty is more likely to arise if the stepchild feels sad because the missing parent is not present. If the new couple disagree about how to raise children, the chances of conflict are substantially increased. Stepparents and stepchildren also face the problem of adjusting to each other’s habits and personalities. Stepparents should not rush into establishing a relationship with stepchildren; a gradual approach is more likely to result in a trusting and positive relationship. Lefrancois (1999) notes that becoming a stepparent is usually more difficult for a woman because children tend to be emotionally closer to their biological mother and have spent more time with her than with the father.
Three myths about blended families can also be addressed. First, there is the myth of the wicked stepmother. This involves the idea that the stepmother is not really concerned about what is best for the children, but is more concerned about her own well-being. The story of Cinderella comes to mind. Here, the wicked stepmother cruelly keeps Cinderella from going to the ball in the hope that her own biological daughters will have a better chance at nabbing the handsome prince. In reality, stepmothers have been found to establish very positive and caring relationships with their stepchildren, provided that the stepmother has a strong self-concept and the support of her husband (Papalia & Martorell, 2015).
A second myth about blended families is that “step is less.” In other words, this myth asserts that stepchildren will never hold the same place in the hearts of parents that biological children do. This myth does not take into account the fact that people can learn to love each other and are motivated to bind members of their new family together.
The third myth about blended families is that the moment they become joined as one family, they will have instant love for each other. Relationships take time to develop and grow. The idea of instantly having strong love bonds for each other does not make sense. People involved in any relationship need time to get to know each other, test each other out, and grow to feel comfortable with each other. Kail and Cavanaugh (2010) reviewed the research literature on stepparenthood and made the following conclusions:
1. Integration tends to be easier in families that have been split by divorce than by death, perhaps because the children realize the first marriage was not working out.
2. Stepparents and stepchildren come to the blended family with unrealistic expectations that love and togetherness will rapidly occur.
3. Children tend to see a stepparent of the opposite sex as playing favorites with their own children.
4. Most children continue to miss and admire the absent biological parent.
5. Male children tend to more readily accept a stepparent, particularly if the new parent is also male.
6. Adolescents have greater difficulty accepting a stepparent than young children or adult children.
Stepfamilies need to pursue at least four tasks in order to achieve integration. The first task involves acknowledging that losses from old relationships do exist. In addition to the bad times suffered in these prior relationships, there are also memories of the good times. Recalling how good things used to be may elicit feelings of sadness that these times are gone and anger that they can be no more. As Janzen and Harris (1986) put it, “In this case, help is usually needed to assist stepfamily members in sorting out feelings, identifying sources of sadness and anger, and looking at the new family as an opportunity to develop and share meaningful relationships, without being disloyal to friends and relatives or desecrating pleasant memories from previous experiences” (p. 284).
A second task for stepfamilies is the creation of new customs and traditions. New ways of doing things need to be established to replace the old ways used in the old family structures. New traditions involve a combination of values and activities enjoyed by all new blended family members. For instance, one side of a newly blended family member celebrated at home on New Year’s Eve and the other side celebrated the New Year on New Year’s Day. A completely new tradition might be established where the family spends the New Year’s holiday at a resort and celebrates both on New Year’s Eve and New Year’s Day.
The third task for blended families involves establishing new alliances within the family. Alliances may involve not only the new couple’s relationship with each other, but also relationships among siblings and between parents and children. Spending time on activities together is one of several ways of working on alliances.
The fourth task for blended families is integration. Parents have the responsibility of providing organization for the family. Children need to have their limits defined and consistently upheld. One difficulty is that children are faced with a new stepparent attempting to gain control, when they have not yet enjoyed many supportive and positive experiences with this individual. It is important, therefore, for the new stepparent to provide nurturance and positive feedback to stepchildren, in addition to making rules and maintaining control.
Berman (1981) and Visher and Visher (1983) give the following suggestions to help parents in blended families increase the chances of positive relationships developing between adults and children:
1. Understand the emotions of their children. Although the new couple in a recently formed blended family may be fairly euphoric about their relationship, these adults need to be perceptive and responsive to the fears, concerns, and resentments of their children.
2. Allow time for loving relationships to develop between stepparents and stepchildren. Stepparents need to be aware that their stepchildren will probably have emotional ties to their absent biological parent, and that the stepchildren may resent the breakup of the former family. Some children may even feel they are responsible for the separation of their biological parents. Some may try to make life difficult for the stepparent so that he or she will leave, with the hope that the biological parents will then reunite. Stepparents need to be perceptive and understanding of such feelings, and patiently allow their stepchildren time to work out their concerns and to bond.
3. New rituals, traditions, and ways of doing things that seem right and enjoyable for all members of the blended family need to be developed. Sometimes it is helpful to move to a new house or a new apartment that does not hold memories of a past life. Leisure time should be given structure so that the children spend some time alone with the biological parent of the family, some time alone with the stepparent, some time with both of these parents together, and perhaps some time with the absent parent or parents. The new couple also need time to be alone. New rituals need to be developed for holidays, birthdays, and other special days.
4. Seek social support. Parents in blended families should seek to share their concerns, feelings, frustrations, experiences, coping strategies, and triumphs with other stepparents and stepchildren. Such sharing allows parents in blended families to view their own situations more realistically and to learn from the experiences of others.
12-4jMothers Working outside the Home
A major break with tradition has occurred with the surge of married women entering the workforce over the past several decades. Employment of married women with children under 18 has risen from 24 percent in 1950 to 40 percent in 1970 to 70 percent in 2013 (Mooney Knox, & Schacht, 2015). Among female-headed one-parent families, 71 percent of the mothers were employed (Mooney Knox, & Schacht, 2015). Most working mothers work full-time.
Many questions have been raised concerning the effects of working mothers (and single working custodial fathers) on the social and emotional development of children. The traditional view stressed the importance of a stable, supportive, caregiver being available consistently to meet the needs of children. In other words, it was important for a mother to remain in the home and coordinate the family’s care and activities. However, research indicates that women do not have to remain home in order to maintain a well-adjusted family.
Reviews of the research on working mothers and their children conclude that if the mother is satisfied with her job and the provision for child care is reasonably good and suitable, there is no adverse effect on the child’s development (Papalia & Martorell, 2015). Many contemporary researchers emphasize the positive effects of a mother’s employment on her entire family.
Some questions have been raised concerning the effects on children under age 3 when mothers work outside the home. These questions tend to revolve around the issue of maternal deprivation (i.e., that infants are emotionally deprived if they do not have enough contact with their mothers). Concerns were initially raised after some early research indicated that institutionalized infants suffered negative effects. This research related these negative effects to the fact that the mother was absent. However, could these effects have been due to the fact that the infants received inadequate care and very little attention from anyone? It may not necessarily be that they specifically missed their mothers.
There is no simple answer to the question about the effects on children of their mothers’ working. Children need consistent nurturance, guidance, and care. Home conditions vary widely. Not all biological mothers provide adequate care and attention to their young children. Also, the conditions under which a mother works vary tremendously. Some mothers love their jobs; others hate having to work. The level of the mother’s overall satisfaction with life must affect the child.
Indications are that good child care—that is, child care that provides the child with consistent attention and care—does not harm a child. Much of the research on the effects on children of mothers working was performed in good facilities with high-quality care. Many parents find it difficult to get good child care for a number of reasons, including cost, location, hours available, type of care, and age restrictions on children. Substantial concerns exist when the single mother works outside the home (or when both parents work outside the home) and the children receive poor child care or no care. It seems that the ideal solution is to make enough good alternative care available so that mothers can work with the knowledge that their children are well cared for.
Another issue is the role of the father in caring for children in those cases where a father is present in the home. Can’t the father be a primary participant in child care? It’s interesting that the term maternal deprivation is commonly used, whereas the parallel term paternal deprivation is not. In reality, mothers, whether they work outside the home or not, generally maintain the primary responsibility for child care in our society.
Child rearing is most often seen as the mother’s responsibility. However, perhaps this idea was more credible when few women worked outside the home. Perhaps changing attitudes to encourage shared parenting would be in the best interest of families.
12-4kThe “Sandwich” Generation
Many middle-aged adults are “sandwiched” between two generations—their parents and their children. This puts great demands and pressures on them. Because older adults are the fastest-growing age group in terms of numbers in our society, an increasing proportion of middle-aged adults will find themselves providing care for their parents as well as their children. Some middle-aged adults have their children and a parent or two living with them. People find it difficult to find the time and resources to respond to the needs and demands of their work, their children, and their parents.
Middle-aged adults who feel the obligations of caring for both their children and their aging parents may be torn between love and resentment. They love both their children and their parents—but may resent that caring for their parents may deprive them of any chance to fulfill their dreams of getting involved in more enjoyable activities.
For members of the sandwich generation who are working outside the home, flexible work schedules can help alleviate the stresses associated with both caregiving responsibilities and work responsibilities. The Family and Medical Leave Act, adopted in 1993, guarantees family caregivers some unpaid leave. In addition, some large corporations provide time off for caregiving.
12-5Understand Material on Assessing and Intervening in Family Systems
12-5aAssessing and Intervening in Family Systems
Families are characterized by multiple ongoing interactions. When social workers intervene with families, there is much to observe and understand. The dimensions of family interaction that will be discussed here include communication, family norms, and problems commonly faced by families. In addition, two prominent family-assessment instruments will be described: the ecomap and the genogram.
12-5bVerbal and Nonverbal Communication
Communication involves transmitting information from one person to another, using a common system of symbols, signs, or behaviors. Verbal communication involves the use of words and will be addressed first.
The first phase of verbal communication involves the translation of thoughts into words. The information sender must know the correct words and how to put them together. Only then will the information have the chance of being effectively received. The sender may be vague or inaccurate in forming the message, and interruptions and distractions may detract from the communication process.
The information receiver then must be receptive to the information. That is, he or she must be paying attention both to the sender and to the sender’s words. The receiver must understand what the specific words mean. Inaccuracies or problems at any point in this process can stop the information from getting across to the receiver. At any point, distortions may interfere.
Verbal communication patterns inside the family include who talks a lot and who talks only rarely. They involve who talks to whom and who defers to whom. They also reflect the subtle and not so subtle qualities involved in family members’ relationships.
The sender also transmits nonverbal messages along with the verbal messages. These include facial expressions, body posture, emotions displayed, and many other subtle aspects of communication. Somewhere between verbal and nonverbal aspects of communication are voice inflection, intonation, and loudness. All this gives the receiver additional information about the intent and specific meaning of the message that’s being sent. Sometimes the receiver will attribute more value to the nonverbal aspects of the message than to the verbal.
For example, a 17-year-old son asks his father, “Dad, can I have the car next Saturday night?” Dad, who’s in the middle of writing up his tax returns (which are due in two days), replies “No.” Harry interprets this to mean that his father is an authoritarian tyrant who does not trust him with the family car. Harry stomps off in a huff. However, what Dad was really thinking was that he and Mom need the car this Saturday because they’re taking their best friends, the Jamesons, out for their twentieth wedding anniversary. Dad was also thinking that perhaps the Jamesons wouldn’t mind driving. Or maybe he and Harry could work something out to share the car. At any rate, Dad really meant that he was much too involved with the tax forms to talk about it and would rather discuss it during dinner.
This is a good example of ineffective communication. The information was vague and incomplete, and neither person clarified his thoughts or gave feedback to the other. There are endless variations to the types of ineffective communication that can take place in families. Social workers can often help to clarify, untangle, and reconstruct communication patterns.
One especially important aspect of assessing messages is whether they are congruent or incongruent. Communication is incongruent when two or more messages contradict each other’s meaning. In other words, the messages are confusing. Contradictory messages within families disturb effective family functioning.
Nonverbal messages can sometimes contradict verbal messages. For example, a recently widowed woman says, “I’m sorry Frank passed away,” with a big grin on her face. The information expressed by the words indicates that she is sad. However, her accompanying physical expression shows that she is happy. Her words are considered socially appropriate for the situation. However, in this particular case, she seems relieved to get rid of “the old buzzard” and happy to be the beneficiary of a large life insurance policy.
The double message reflected by the widow’s verbal and nonverbal behavior provides a relatively simple, clear-cut illustration of potential problem communication within families. However, congruence is certainly not the only important aspect of nonverbal communication. All of the principles of nonverbal communication discussed in Chapter 11 can be applied to communication within families.
12-5cFamily Norms
Family norms are the rules that specify what is considered proper behavior within the family group. Often, the most powerful rules are those that are not clearly and verbally stated. Rather, these are implicit rules or repeated family transactions that all family members understand but never discuss. It’s important for families to establish norms that allow both the entire family and each individual member to function effectively and productively.
Every family differs in its individual set of norms or rules. For example, the Myers family believes the husband’s role is to earn enough money to support his wife and three children. Mr. Myers works as a bus driver for the city he lives in, and makes about $60,000 a year. He works 40 hours a week, and then is free to lie on the couch or pursue his hobbies of hunting and fishing. His wife is expected to stay at home, raise the children, and perform all the household tasks. She also home-schools the three school-age children. The Myers attend a fundamentalist church that urges the wife to play a supportive role to her husband. Mrs. Myers is unaware that she puts in more than 100 hours per week performing all her teaching and domestic tasks. The children are expected to concentrate on their studies, and are not asked to help out around the house. As a result, Mrs. Myers is becoming physically and emotionally exhausted, looks haggard, and her blood pressure is elevated.
Social workers need to help families identify and understand that inappropriate, ineffective norms can be changed. For example, it simply is not in Mrs. Myers’s best interest to be putting in more than 100 hours a week on home-schooling and domestic tasks. If a social worker became involved (perhaps after a referral from Mrs. Myers’s physician, who is concerned about her blood pressure), that social worker could help Mrs. Myers (and probably eventually Mr. Myers) to examine the family norms that are adversely affecting12-5dFamily System Assessment: The Ecomap
An ecomap is a paper-and-pencil assessment tool that practitioners use to assess specific troubles and plan interventions for clients. The ecomap is a drawing of the client/family in its social environment. An ecomap is usually drawn jointly by the social worker and the client. It helps both the worker and the client achieve a holistic or ecological view of the client’s family life and the nature of the family’s relationships with groups, associations, organizations, other families, and individuals. It has been used in a variety of situations, including marriage and family counseling, and adoption and foster-care home studies. The ecomap has also been used to supplement traditional social histories and case records. It is a shorthand method for recording basic social information. The technique helps users (clients and practitioners) gain insight into clients’ problems and better sort out how to make constructive changes. The technique provides a “snapshot view” of important interactions at a particular point in time. The primary developer of the technique is Ann Hartman (1978).
A typical ecomap consists of a family diagram surrounded by a set of circles and lines used to describe the family within an environmental context. The ecomap user can create her or his own abbreviations and symbols (see Figure 12.2).
Figure 12.2Commonly Used Symbols in an Ecomap
To draw an ecomap, a circle (representing the client’s family) is placed in the center of a large, blank sheet of paper (see Figure 12.3). The composition of the family is indicated within the family circle. A number of other circles are drawn in the area surrounding the family circle. These represent the other systems (i.e., the groups, other families, individuals, and organizations) with which the family ordinarily interacts.
Figure 12.3Setting Up an Ecomap
Different kinds of lines are drawn to describe the nature of the relationships that the members of the client family have with the other systems. The directional flow of energy (indicating giving and/or receiving of resources and communication between the client family members and the significant systems) is expressed by the use of arrows. A case example of the use of an ecomap follows.
An ecomap is an assessment tool for depicting the relationships and interactions between a client family and its social environment. The largest circle in the center depicts the client family. The surrounding circles represent the significant groups, organizations, other families, and individuals that make up the family’s social environment.
Barb and Mike Haynes meet with Maria Garcia, Adult Services Worker. They indicate that they feel a moral obligation to continue caring for Ruth in their home, because Ruth spent most of her adult years caring for Mike and his brother and sister when they were children. Barb and Mike also indicate that they have a 2-year-old child, Erin, at home. This is a second marriage for both Barb and Mike, and they are paying for Mike’s son, Brian, to attend the state university. With such expenses, both believe they need to continue to work. Mike’s oldest sister, Mary Kruger, is a single parent who has two children in high school. Mary Kruger has a visual disability but has been able to be the primary caregiver for Ruth and Erin during the daylight hours when Mike and Barb are at work. Recently, Mary informed Mike and Barb that caring for Ruth is becoming too difficult and that some kind of alternative care is needed. Ms. Garcia suggests that adult day care for Ruth may be a useful resource.
Mike adds that it is emotionally devastating to see his mother slowly deteriorate. He indicates he is in a double bind; he feels an obligation to care for his mother, but doing so is causing major disruptions in his family life. The stress has resulted in marital discord with Barb, and he adds that both he and Barb have become increasingly short in temper and patience with Erin.
At this point, Ms. Garcia suggests it may be helpful to graphically diagram their present dilemma. Together, the Hayneses and Ms. Garcia draw the ecomap shown in Figure 12.4. While drawing the map, Mike inquires whether Ruth’s medical condition might soon stabilize. Ms. Garcia indicates that Ruth may occasionally appear to stabilize, but the long-term prognosis is gradual deterioration in mental functioning and in physical capabilities. The ecomap helps Mike and Barb see that even though they are working full-time during the day and spending the remainder of their waking hours caring for Erin and Ruth, they are becoming too emotionally and physically exhausted to continue doing so. During the past three years, they have ceased socializing with friends. Now they seldom have any time to spend even with Brian. Feeling helpless and hopeless, they inquire if some other care arrangement is available besides a nursing home. They indicate that Ruth has said on numerous occasions, “I’d rather die now than be placed in a nursing home.” Ms. Garcia tells them of some high-quality adult group homes in the area and gives them the addresses.
Figure 12.4Sample Ecomap: Barb and Mike Haynes
After visiting a few of the care facilities, Barb and Mike ask Ruth to stay for a few days at one they particularly like. At first Ruth is opposed to going for a “visit.” But after being there a few days, she adjusts fairly well and soon concludes (erroneously, but no one objects) that it is a home she bought and that the people on the staff are her “domestic employees.” Ruth’s adjustment eases the guilt that Barb and Mike feel in placing Ruth in a care facility, and this results in substantial improvements in their marital relationship and in their interactions with Erin, Brian, and their friends.
A major value of an ecomap is that it facilitates both the worker’s and the client’s view of the client’s family from a systems and an ecological perspective. Sometimes, as happened in the case of the Hayneses, the drawing of the ecomap helps clients and practitioners gain greater insight into the social dynamics of a problematic situation.
her. Once such norms are identified, the social worker could help them clarify alternative solutions and help them assess which is the best solution for them.
12-5eFamily System Assessment: The Genogram
A genogram is a graphic way of investigating the origins of a client’s problem by diagramming the family over at least three generations. The client and the worker usually construct the family genogram jointly. The genogram is essentially a family tree. Murray Bowen is the primary developer of this technique (Kerr & Bowen, 1988). The genogram is a useful tool for the worker and family members to examine problematic emotional and behavioral patterns in an intergenerational context. Emotional and behavioral patterns in families tend to repeat themselves; what happens in one generation will often occur in the next. Genograms help family members to identify and understand family relationship patterns.
Figure 12.5 shows some of the commonly used symbols. Together, the symbols provide a visual representation of at least three generations of a family, including names, ages, genders, marital status, sibling positions, and so on. When relevant, additional items of information may be included, such as emotional difficulties, behavioral problems, religious affiliation, ethnic origins, geographic locations, occupations, socioeconomic status, and significant life events. The following case example illustrates the use of a genogram.
Figure 12.5Commonly Used Genogram Symbols
Mr. Nolan inquires as to the specifics of the “scuffle.” Chris says he came home after having a few beers. His dinner was cold, and he “got on” Karen for not cleaning up the house. He adds that Karen then started mouthing off, and he slapped her to shut her up. Mr. Nolan inquires whether such incidents had occurred in the past. Chris indicates, “A few times,” and adds that getting physical with Karen is the only way for him to “keep her in line.” He says he works all day long in his small business as a concrete contractor, while his wife sits at home watching soap operas. He feels she is not doing her fair share and the house usually looks like a disaster.
Mr. Nolan asks Chris if he feels that getting physical with his wife is justifiable. He responds, “Sure,” and adds that his dad frequently told him, “Spare the rod, and spoil both the wife and the kids.” Mr. Nolan asks Chris if his dad was abusive to him when he was a child. Chris indicates that he was and adds that to this day he detests his dad for abusing him and his mother.
Mr. Nolan then suggests that together they draw a family tree, focusing on three areas: episodes of heavy drinking, episodes of physical abuse, and traditional versus modern gender stereotypes. Mr. Nolan explains that a traditional gender stereotype includes the husband as the primary decision maker, the wife as submissive to him, and the wife as primarily responsible for domestic tasks. The modern gender stereotype involves an egalitarian relationship between husband and wife. After an initial reluctance (Chris expresses confusion as to how such a tree would help get his wife back), Chris agrees. The resulting genogram is presented in Figure 12.6.
Figure 12.6Sample Genogram: The Chris and Karen Witt Family
The genogram helps Chris to see that he and his wife are products of family systems that have strikingly different values and customs. In his family, the males tend to drink heavily, have a traditional view of marriage, and tend to use physical force in interactions with their spouses and children. Upon questioning, Chris mentions that he has at times struck his own children. Mr. Nolan asks Chris how he feels about repeating the same patterns of abuse with his wife and children that he despised his father for using. Tears come to his eyes, and he says one word, “Guilty.”
Mr. Nolan and Chris discuss what Chris might do to change his family interactions and how he might best approach his wife to request that she and the children return. Chris agrees to attend AA (Alcoholics Anonymous) meetings and a therapy group for batterers. After a month of attending these meetings, Chris contacts his wife and asks her to return. Karen agrees to return if Chris stops drinking (most of the abuse occurred when he was intoxicated) and if he agrees to continue to attend group therapy and AA meetings. Chris readily agrees. Karen’s parents express their disapproval of her returning.
For the first few months, Chris Witt is on his best behavior, and there is considerable harmony in the Witt family. Then one day Chris has to fire one of his employees. Feeling bad, he stops afterward at a tavern and drinks until he is intoxicated. When he finally arrives home, he starts to verbally and physically abuse Karen and the children. This is the final straw for Karen. She takes the children to her parents’ house, where they stay for several days until they are able to find and move into an apartment. She also files for divorce and follows through in obtaining one.
In many ways, this is not a success case (in reality, many cases are not). The genogram, however, was useful in helping Chris realize that he had acquired, and was acting out, certain dysfunctional family patterns. Unfortunately, he was not yet fully ready to make lasting changes. Perhaps sometime in the future he will be more committed to making changes. At the present time, he has returned to drinking heavily.
The ecomap and the genogram have a number of similarities. With both techniques, users gain insight into family dynamics. Some of the symbols used in the two approaches are identical. There are also differences. The ecomap focuses attention on a family’s interactions with groups, resources, organizations, associations, other families, and other individuals. The genogram focuses attention on intergenerational family patterns, particularly those that are problematic or dysfunctional.
12-5fFamily Problems and Social Work Roles
· (1)
marital problems between the husband and wife;
· (2)
difficulties between parents and children;
· (3)
personal problems of individual family members; and
· (4)
stresses imposed on the family by the external environment.
Family problems do not necessarily fall neatly into one or another of these categories. Frequently, families experience more than one category of problems. Nor are these problem categories mutually exclusive. Many times, one problem will be closely related to another. Consider, for instance, the wife and mother of a family who is a department store manager and the primary breadwinner for her family. The store at which she has been working for the past 11 years suddenly goes out of business. Despite massive efforts, she is unable to find another job with similar responsibilities and salary. This can be considered a family problem caused by stresses in the environment. However, this is also a personal problem for the wife and mother. Her sense of self-worth is seriously diminished by her job loss and inability to find another position. She becomes cranky, short-tempered, and difficult to live with. The environmental stress she is experiencing causes her to have difficulties relating to both her children and spouse. The entire family system becomes disturbed.
A family therapy perspective sees any problem within the family as a family group problem, not as a problem on the part of any one individual member (Okun & Rappaport, 1980). Social workers, therefore, need to assess the many dimensions of the problem and the effects on all family members.
The first category of problems typically experienced by families is marital problems between the husband and wife. Although problems between spouses affect all family members, intervention may target a subsystem of the family—in this case, the marital subsystem. In other words, a social worker may work with the couple alone instead of the entire family to solve a specific problem. When the marital pair gets along better, the entire family will be positively affected. A marital problem case example follows.
Gianna and Mark Di Franco were married in 1998. Both had been previously divorced. Gianna had two children from a prior marriage, and Mark had four. Gianna was a financial planner who owned her own company. Mark was vice president of a much larger company. Both earned about the same amount. On the night before they were married, Mark presented Gianna with a prenuptial agreement. It stated that the assets each brought into the marriage would be kept separate, and would be the property of the person bringing it into the marriage if a divorce occurred. The agreement also stated that each spouse would pay an equal share of the family expenses. Mark said he would not marry Gianna unless she signed the agreement. Gianna did not want to call off the wedding, so she signed the agreement.
After three years of marriage, Gianna had two major concerns. First, when Mark became angry with her, he would refuse to talk to her—often for as long as two weeks. Gianna often did not know “what she did wrong.” Mark, after pouting for a while, would eventually start talking again. When she asked why he’d stopped communicating, he’d always respond, “If you can’t figure it out, I’m not going to tell you.”
Gianna’s second concern was financial. Mark became president of his company and received a big increase in salary. Gianna, on the other hand, saw her earnings sliced nearly in half as the stock market drop in the early 2000s resulted in much less business for her company. She asked Mark several times to pay more of the family expenses. He always pulled out the prenuptial agreement and said he wanted to pay his extra money into trust funds for his four children.
The financial situation and the communication problem became such major issues for Gianna that she went to see a family social worker. The social worker indicated that progress on these issues could only be made if Mark came in for joint counseling. Mark at first refused to go. Gianna had to give him an ultimatum: “Either go with me for counseling, or I’m filing for divorce.”
Mark relented and went for counseling with Gianna. At first, he refused to change the prenuptial agreement, but eventually he realized that if he didn’t pay more of the household expenses, and if he didn’t start communicating with Gianna about his concerns, she was going to file for divorce. He thus agreed to pay more of the family expenses. However, the communication issue was more of a hurdle for him. He was raised in a family in which he learned the pattern of not communicating from his father, who also would stop speaking for a week or two to his wife when he was angry with her. Gianna adopted the strategy of making a counseling appointment for Mark and her whenever Mark stopped talking to her for a day or two.
Richard B. Stuart (1983) developed a Couple’s Pre-Counseling Inventory, which is used to assess a couple’s problems. Each member of the couple is asked to fill out the questionnaire separately. Later, answers can be shared during counseling, and misconceptions each has about how the other person feels can be clarified. Areas that are evaluated include happiness with the relationship; caring behaviors liked by the partner; perceptions of caring behaviors liked by the partner; communication; how conflict is managed; how moods and other aspects of personal life are managed; sexual interaction; how children are managed; willingness to make changes; marital history; and specific goals each person wants to pursue.
Such an instrument provides an excellent mechanism for assessment because misconceptions between partners can be clearly pinpointed. For instance, under the topic of sexual interaction, members of the couple are asked to respond to a variety of statements, indicating their levels of satisfaction with the issue involved. The range is from 5, which means “very satisfied,” to 1, which means “very dissatisfied.” One statement concerns “the length of our foreplay.” If one partner is very satisfied and the other very dissatisfied, this is clearly an area that needs to be addressed.
The second major type of family problem involves relationships between parents and children, including parents’ difficulties controlling their children and, especially as children reach adolescence, communication problems.
There are many perspectives on child management and parent–child communication techniques. Two major approaches are the application of learning theory and Parent Effectiveness Training (PET), developed by Thomas Gordon (1970). Practitioners can help parents improve their control of children by assessing the individual family situations and teaching parents some basic behavior modification techniques. Behavior modification involves the application of learning theory principles to real-life situations. Practitioners can also teach the use of PET techniques. (The application of learning theory principles to positive parenting was discussed in Chapter 4, and PET was described in Chapter 8.)
Personal problems of individual family members make up the third category of problems typically experienced by families.
For example, John and Tara Altman brought their 12-year-old son, Terrell, into treatment because for two years he had shown decreasing interest in doing his schoolwork. His grades also slowly fell from a B average to one D (in physical education) and the rest Fs. The school system was considering recommending that Terrell repeat the seventh grade. John and Tara asked the social worker to “inspire” Terrell to become refocused on his schoolwork. The social worker asked Terrell why his grades had slid. He replied that his mom and dad used to help him with his schoolwork, but they had stopped showing much interest in him. In fact, it seemed that his parents had stopped talking to one another in the past two and a half years.
At this point, the social worker decided to meet at the next session with just John and Tara to explore what was happening between them. At that session, Tara revealed she had discovered two and a half years earlier that John had had a brief affair with one of her best friends shortly after they were married, and she was unable to forgive him. At first, she was furious with John, but now she had become so depressed that she was on Prozac. She had given up talking to John, and they had not been intimate since her discovery. John acknowledged that he had had the affair, and said he was trying to do everything in his power to restore their former relationship. John added that he had thrown himself into his work as an electrician in order to escape his wife’s wrath. He was also concerned that Tara was drinking too much. Tara said alcohol helped her escape the pain of knowing that John had had an affair. And she was seriously thinking about divorcing John once Terrell graduated from high school.
The social worker helped John and Tara see that Terrell’s lack of interest in school was related to his parents’ showing little interest in him; it was also his way of adapting to the animosity between John and Tara. The social worker helped Tara see that she needed to either divorce John now or let go of focusing on the pain she felt about the affair. After considerable reflection, Tara said she wanted to find a way to let go. The social worker helped her learn to tell herself “Stop” whenever she began to think about the affair, and to then think instead of positive attributes about John and her family. This process of learning to let go took Tara about three months to fully implement.
During this period, both Tara and John focused much more of their attention, in positive ways, on Terrell. He began refocusing on his schoolwork, his grades began to improve, and he also became more contented.
The Altman family provides a good illustration of a family-owned problem. All three family members were hurting emotionally. Terrell was the identified client, but all three family members needed to make changes in order for the family to function more effectively.
The fourth category of problems frequently found in families includes problems caused by factors outside the family. These problems may include inadequate income, unemployment, poor housing, inadequate access to means of transportation and places for recreation, and lack of job opportunities. Also included in the multitude of potential problems are poor health, inadequate schools, and dangerous neighborhoods.
To begin addressing these problems, social workers need effective brokering skills. That is, they need to know what services are available, and how to make a connection between families in need and these services.
12-6Summarize Material on Social Work with Organizations, including Several Theories of Organizational Behavior
LO 5
When we first talk with students in classes about social work with organizations, they tend to yawn and show little interest. They tend to view such material as being irrelevant to their lives. Their interest, however, is usually accelerated when we note that most social workers are employed in agencies (which are organizations), and that it is critical that social work students learn “how to survive and thrive” in agencies/organizations.
12-6aSocial Work with Organizations
Organizations are “
· (1)
social entities that
· (2)
are goal-directed,
· (3)
are designed as deliberately structured and coordinated activity systems, and
· (4)
are linked to the external environment” (Daft, 2007, p. 10).
Social entities involve groups of people, all having their own strengths, needs, ideas, and quirks. Organizations are goal-directed in that they exist to accomplish some purpose or meet some need. As an activity system, an organization is made up of a coordinated series of units accomplishing different tasks yet working together to achieve some common end. Finally, organizations are in constant interaction with other people, decision makers, agencies, neighborhoods, and communities in the external social environment as they strive to achieve goals.
It is imperative that social workers have an extensive knowledge of organizations. As Chapter 1 indicates, working with organizations is one of the systems in which social workers are expected to have expertise. Highlight 12.12 expands on the importance of social workers being skilled in understanding and analyzing organizations. Several theories of organizational behavior are presented in this section. These different theories provide a variety of perspectives for viewing and analyzing organizations.
Highlight 12.12
Analyzing a Human Services Organization
It is essential that a social worker understand and analyze not only the agency or organization that she or he works for but also the other agencies and organizations that she or he interacts with. Some questions that are useful in analyzing an agency or organization are the following:
1. What is the mission statement of the organization?
2. What are the major problems of the organization’s clients?
3. What services does the organization provide?
4. How are client needs determined?
5. What percentage of clients are people of color, women, gays or lesbians, older adults, or members of other at-risk populations?
6. What was the total cost of services of this organization in the past year?
7. How much money is spent on each program?
8. What are the organization’s funding sources?
9. How much money and what percentage of funds does the organization receive from each source?
10. What types of clients does the organization refuse?
11. What other organizations provide the same services in the community?
12. What is the organizational structure? For example, does the organization have a formal, chain of command?
13. Is there an informal decision-making process and structure at the organization? (That is, are there people who exert more influence than would be expected from their formal positions in the bureaucracy of the organization?)
14. How much input do the direct service providers at the organization have on major policy decisions?
15. Does the organization have a board that oversees its operations? If so, what are the backgrounds of the board members?
16. Do employees at every level feel valued?
17. What is the morale among employees?
18. What are the major unmet needs of the organization?
19. Does the organization have a handbook of personnel policies and procedures?
20. What is the public image of the organization in the community?
21. What has been the rate of turnover in recent years among the staff at the organization? What were departing staff members’ major reasons for leaving?
22. Does the organization have a process for evaluating the outcomes of its services? If so, what is the process, and what are the outcome results?
12-6bThe Autocratic Model
The autocratic model has been in existence for thousands of years. During the Industrial Revolution, it was the predominant model for how an organization should function. This model depends on power. Those who are in power act autocratically. The message to employees is, “You do this—or else”; an employee who does not follow orders is penalized, often severely.
An autocratic model uses one-way communication—from the top to the workers. Management believes that it knows what is best. The employee’s obligation is to follow orders. Employees have to be persuaded, directed, and pushed into performance, and this is management’s task. Management does the thinking, and the workers obey the directives. Under autocratic conditions, the workers’ role is obedience to management.
The autocratic model does work in some settings. Most military organizations throughout the world are formulated on this model. The model was also used successfully during the Industrial Revolution, for example, in building great railroad systems and in operating giant steel mills.
The autocratic model has a number of disadvantages. Workers are often in the best position to identify shortcomings in the structure and technology of the organizational system, but one-way communication prevents feedback to management. The model also fails to generate much of a commitment among the workers to accomplish organizational goals. Finally, the model fails to motivate workers to put forth an effort to further develop their skills (skills that often would be highly beneficial to the employer).
12-6cThe Custodial Model
Managers treated workers crudely, sometimes even to the point of physical abuse. Since employees could not strike back directly for fear of losing their jobs, they found another way to do it. They symbolically fed their supervisor to a log-shredding machine! They did this by purposely destroying good sheets of veneer, which made the supervisor look bad when monthly efficiency reports were prepared. (p. 31)
In the 1890s and 1900s, some progressive employers thought that if these feelings could be alleviated, employees might feel more like working, which would increase productivity. To satisfy the employees’ security needs, a number of companies began to provide welfare programs such as pension programs, child-care centers, health insurance, and life insurance.
The custodial approach leads to employee dependence on the organization. According to Davis and Newstrom (1989), “If employees have ten years of seniority under the union contract and a good pension program, they cannot afford to quit even if the grass looks greener somewhere else!” (p. 31).
Employees working under a custodial model tend to focus on their economic rewards and benefits. They are happier and more content than under the autocratic model, but they do not have a high commitment to helping their organization accomplish its goals. They tend to give passive cooperation to their employer. The model’s most evident flaw is that most employees are producing substantially below their capacities. They are not motivated to advance to higher capacities. Most such employees do not feel fulfilled or motivated at their place of work. In summary, contented employees (which the custodial model is designed to ensure) are not necessarily the most productive.
12-6dThe Scientific Management Model
One of the earliest and most important schools of thought on the management of functions and tasks in the workplace was based on the work of Frederick Taylor (1947). Taylor was a mechanical engineer, an American industrialist, and an educator. He focused primarily on management techniques that would lead to increased productivity. He asserted that many organizational problems in the workplace involved misunderstandings between managers and workers. Managers erroneously thought that workers were lazy and unemotional, and they mistakenly believed they understood workers’ jobs. Workers mistakenly thought that managers cared most about exploiting them.
To solve these problems, Taylor developed the scientific management model, which focused on the need for managers to conduct a scientific analysis of the workplace. One of the first steps was to conduct a careful study of how each job could best be accomplished. An excellent way to do this, according to Taylor, was to identify the best worker at each job and then carefully study how he or she did the work. The goal of this analysis was to discover the optimal way of doing the job—in Taylor’s words, the “one best way.” Once this best way was identified, tools could be modified to better complete the work, workers’ abilities and interests could be fitted to particular job assignments, and the level of production that the average worker could sustain could be gauged.
Once the level of production for the average worker was determined, Taylor indicated that the next step was to provide incentives to increase productivity. His favorite strategy was the piece-rate wage, in which workers were paid for each unit they produced. The goals were to produce more units, reduce unit cost, increase organizational productivity and profitability, and provide incentives for workers to produce more.
Taylor’s work has been criticized as having a “technicist” bias, because it tends to treat workers as little more than cogs on a wheel. No two workers are exactly alike, so the “one best way” of doing a job is often unique to the person doing it. In fact, forcing the same work approach on different workers may actually decrease both productivity and worker satisfaction. In addition, Taylor’s approach has limited application to human services providers. Because each client is unique, each situation has to be individualized, and therefore it is difficult (if not impossible) to specify the “one best way” to provide a service.
12-6eThe Human Relations Model
In 1927, the Hawthorne Works of the Western Electric Company in Chicago began a series of experiments designed to discover ways to increase worker satisfaction and worker productivity (Roethlisberger & Dickson, 1939). Hawthorne Works manufactured telephones on an assembly line. Workers needed no special skills, and they performed simple, repetitive tasks. The workers were not unionized, and management sought to find ways to increase productivity. If job satisfaction could be increased, employees would work more efficiently, and productivity would then increase.
The company tested the effects on productivity of a number of factors: rest breaks, better lighting, changes in the number of work hours, changes in the wages paid, improved food facilities, and so on. The results were surprising. Productivity increased, as expected, with improved working conditions; but it also increased when working conditions worsened. This latter finding was unexpected and led to an additional study.
The investigators discovered that participation in these experiments was extremely attractive to the workers, who felt they had been selected by management for their individual abilities. As a result, they worked harder, even when working conditions became less favorable. In addition, the workers’ morale and general attitude toward work improved, because they felt they were receiving special attention. Participating in a study enabled them to work in smaller groups and become involved in making decisions. Working in smaller groups allowed them to develop a stronger sense of solidarity with their fellow workers. Being involved in decision making decreased, their feelings of meaninglessness and powerlessness about their work.
In sociological and psychological research, the results of this study have become known as the Hawthorne effect. In essence, when people know they are participants in a study, this awareness may lead them to behave differently and substantially influence the results.
The results of this study, and of other similar studies, led some researchers to conclude that the key variables affecting productivity are social factors. Etzioni (1964) summarized some of the basic tenets of the human relations approach:
· The level of production is set by social norms, not by physiological capacities.
· Noneconomic rewards and sanctions significantly affect the behavior of the workers and largely limit the effect of economic incentive plans.
· Workers do not act or react as individuals but as members of groups.
· The role of leadership is important in understanding social factors in organizations, and this leadership may be either formal or informal.
Numerous studies have provided evidence to support these tenets (Netting, Kettner, & McMurtry, 1993). Workers who are capable of greater productivity often will not excel because they are unwilling to exceed the “average” level set by the norms of the group, even if this means earning less. These studies have also found that attempts by management to influence workers’ behavior are often more successful if targeted at the group as a whole, rather than at individuals. Finally, the studies have documented the importance of informal leadership in influencing workers’ behavior in ways that can either amplify or negate formal leadership directives. This model asserts that managers who succeed in increasing productivity are most likely responsive to the workers’ social needs.
One criticism of the human relations model is (surprisingly) that it tends to manipulate, dehumanize, oppress, and exploit workers. The model leads to the conclusion that management can increase productivity by helping workers become content, rather than by increasing economic rewards for higher productivity. The human relations model allows for concentrated power and decision making at the top. It is not intended to empower employees in the decision-making process or to assist them in acquiring genuine participation in the running of the organization. The practice of dealing with people on the basis of their perceived social relationships within the workplace may also be a factor in perpetuating the “good old boys” network; this network has disadvantaged women and people of color over the years. Another criticism of the human relations approach is that a happy workforce is not necessarily a productive workforce, because the norms for worker production may be set well below the workers’ levels of capability.
12-6fTheory X and Theory Y
Douglas McGregor (1960) developed two theories of management. He theorized that management thinking and behavior are based on two different sets of assumptions, which he labeled Theory X and Theory Y.
Theory X managers view employees as being incapable of much growth. Employees are perceived as having an inherent dislike for work and attempting to evade work whenever possible. Therefore, X-type managers believe they must control, direct, force, or threaten employees to make them work. Employees are also viewed as having relatively little ambition, wishing to avoid responsibilities, and preferring to be directed. Theory X managers therefore spell out job responsibilities carefully, set work goals without employee input, use external rewards (such as money) to push employees to work, and punish those who deviate from established rules.
Because Theory X managers reduce responsibilities to a level at which few mistakes can be made, work usually becomes so structured that it is monotonous and distasteful. These Theory X assumptions, of course, are inconsistent with what behavioral scientists assert are effective principles for directing, influencing, and motivating people. Theory X managers are, in essence, adhering to an autocratic model of organizational behavior.
In contrast, Theory Y managers view employees as wanting to grow and develop by exerting physical and mental effort to accomplish work objectives to which they are committed. These managers believe that the promise of internal rewards, such as self-respect and personal improvement, are stronger motivators than external rewards (money) and punishment. They also believe that under proper conditions, employees will not only accept responsibility but seek it. Most employees are assumed to have considerable ingenuity, creativity, and imagination for problem solving. Therefore, they are given considerable responsibility to test the limits of their capabilities. Mistakes and errors are viewed as necessary phases of the learning process, and work is structured so that employees have a sense of accomplishment and growth.
Employees who work for Y-type managers are generally more creative and productive, experience greater work satisfaction, and are more highly motivated than employees who work for X-type managers. Under both management styles, expectations often become self-fulfilling prophecies.
12-6gThe Collegial Model
A useful extension of Theory Y is the collegial model, which emphasizes the team concept. Employees work together closely and feel a commitment to achieving a common purpose. Some organizations—such as university departments, research laboratories, and most human services organizations—have a goal of creating a collegial atmosphere to facilitate achieving their purposes. (Sadly, many such organizations are unsuccessful in creating such an atmosphere.)
Creating a collegial atmosphere is highly dependent on management’s building a feeling of partnership with employees. When such a partnership develops, employees feel needed and useful. Managers are then viewed as joint contributors rather than as bosses. Management is the coach that builds a better team. Davis and Newstrom (1989) described some of the approaches to developing a team concept:
The feeling of partnerships can be halt in many ways. Some organizations have abolished the use of reserved parking spaces for executives, so every employee has an equal chance of finding one close to the workplace. Some firms have tried to eliminate the use of terms like “bosses” and “subordinates,” feeling that those terms simply create perceptions of psychological distance between managers and nonmanagers. Other employers have removed time clocks, set up “fun committees,” sponsored company canoe trips, or required managers to spend a week or two annually working in field or factory locations. All of these approaches are designed to build a spirit of mutuality, in which every person makes contributions and appreciates those of others. (p. 34)
If the sense of partnership is developed, employees produce quality work and seek to cooperate with coworkers, not because management directs them to do so, but because they feel an internal obligation to produce high-quality work. The collegial approach thus leads to a sense of self-discipline. In this environment, employees are more apt to have a sense of fulfillment, to feel self-actualized, and to produce higher-quality work.
12-6hTheory Z
William Ouchi described the Japanese style of management in his 1981 best-seller Theory Z. In the late 1970s and early 1980s, attention in the U.S. business world became focused on the Japanese approach to management, as markets long dominated by U.S. firms (such as the automobile industry) were taken over by Japanese industries. Japanese industrial organizations had rapidly overcome their earlier reputation for poor-quality work and were setting worldwide standards for quality and durability.
Theory Z asserted that the theoretical principles underlying Japanese management went beyond Theory Y. According to Theory Z, a business organization in Japan is more than the profitability-oriented entity that it is in the United States. It is a way of life. It provides lifetime employment. It is enmeshed with the nation’s political, social, and economic network. Furthermore, its influence spills over into many other organizations, such as nursery schools, elementary and secondary schools, and universities.
The basic philosophy of Theory Z is that involved and committed workers are the key to increased productivity. Ideas and suggestions about how to improve the organization are routinely solicited, and implemented where feasible. One strategy for accomplishing this is the quality circle, where employees and management routinely meet to brainstorm about ways to improve productivity and quality.
In contrast to American organizations, Japanese organizations tend not to have written objectives or organizational charts. Most work is done in teams, and decisions are made by a consensus. The teams tend to function without a designated leader. Cooperation within units, and between units, is emphasized. Loyalty to the organization is also emphasized, as is organizational loyalty to the employee.
Experiments designed to transplant Japanese-style management to the United States have resulted in mixed success. In most cases, American organizations have concluded that Theory Z probably works quite well in a homogeneous culture that has Japan’s societal values, but some components do not fit well with the more heterogeneous and individualistic character of the United States. In addition, some firms in volatile industries (such as electronics) have difficulty balancing their desire to provide lifetime employment with the need to adjust their workforces to meet rapidly changing market demands.
12-6iManagement by Objectives
Fundamental to the core of an organization is its purpose—that is, the commonly shared understanding of the reason for its existence.
Management theorist Peter Drucker (1954) proposed a strategy for making organizational goals and objectives the central construct around which organizational life is designed to function. In other words, instead of focusing on employee needs and wants, or on organizational structure, as the ways to increase efficiency and productivity, Drucker proposed beginning with the desired outcome and working backward. The strategy is first to identify the organizational objectives or goals and then to adapt the organizational tasks, resources, and structure to meet those objectives. This management by objectives (MBO) approach is designed to focus the organization’s efforts on meeting these objectives. Success is determined, then, by the degree to which stated objectives are reached.
This approach can be applied to the organization as a whole, as well as to internal divisions or departments. When the MBO approach is applied to internal divisions, the objectives set for each division should be consistent with and supportive of the overall organizational objectives.
In many areas, including human services, the MBO approach can also be applied to the cases serviced by each employee. Goals are set with each client, tasks to meet these goals are then determined, and deadlines are set for the completion of these tasks. The degree of success of each case is then determined at a later date (often when a case is closed) by the extent to which stated goals were achieved.
An adaptation of the MBO approach, called strategic planning and budgeting (SPB), became popular in the 1990s and is still widely used. The process involves first specifying the overall vision or mission of an organization, then identifying a variety of more specific objectives or plans for achieving that vision, and, finally, adapting the resources to meet the specific high-priority objectives or plans. Organizations often hire outside consultants to assist in conducting the SPB process.
One major advantage of the MBO approach for an organization or its divisions is that it produces clear statements (made available to all employees) about the objectives and the tasks that are expected to be accomplished in specified time periods. This type of activity tends to improve cooperation and collaboration. The MBO approach is also useful because it provides a guide for allocating resources and a focus for monitoring and evaluating organizational efforts.
An additional benefit of the MBO approach is that it creates diversity in the workplace. Prior to this approach, those responsible for hiring failed to employ women and people of color in significant numbers. As affirmative action programs were developed within organizations, the MBO approach was widely used to set specific hiring goals and objectives. The result has been significant changes in recruitment approaches that have enabled more women and minorities to secure employment.
12-6jTotal Quality Management
The theorist most closely associated with developing the concept of total quality management (TQM) is W. Edwards Deming (1986). Deming was a statistician who formed many of his theories during World War II, when he instructed industries on how to use statistical methods to improve the quality of military production. Following World War II, Deming taught the Japanese his theories of quality control and continuous improvement, and he is now recognized, along with J. Juran (1989) and others, as having laid the groundwork for Japan’s industrial and economic boom.
Omachonu and Ross (1994) define TQM as “the integration of all functions and processes within an organization in order to achieve continuous improvement of the quality of goods and services. The goal is customer satisfaction” (p. 1). TQM is based on a number of ideas. It means thinking about quality in terms of all functions of the enterprise and as a start-to-finish process that integrates interrelated functions at all levels. It is a systems approach that considers every interaction between the various elements of an organization.
TQM asserts that the management of many businesses and organizations makes the mistake of blaming what goes wrong in an organization on individuals rather than on the system. TQM, rather, believes in the “85/15 Rule,” which asserts that 85 percent of the problems can be corrected by changing systems (structures, rules, practices, expectations, and traditions that are largely determined by management), and less than 15 percent of the problems can be solved by individual workers. When problems arise, TQM asserts, management should look for causes in the system and work to remove them before casting blame on workers.
TQM further maintains that customer satisfaction is the main purpose of the organization. Therefore, quality includes continuously improving all the organization’s processes that lead to customer satisfaction. The customer is seen as part of the design and production process, as the customer’s needs must be continually monitored.
In recent years, numerous organizations have adopted a TQM approach to improve their goods and services. One of the reasons that quality is being emphasized more is because consumers are increasingly shunning mass-produced, poorly made, disposable products. Companies are realizing that to remain competitive in global markets, quality of products and services is essential. Ford’s motto, “Quality Is Job One,” symbolizes this emphasis.
There are a variety of approaches to TQM, largely because numerous theoreticians (business gurus) have advanced somewhat diverse approaches.
In regards to human service agencies, the following are guiding principles of TQM:
· The first and major principle is to satisfy the customer. The customer is the one paying for the service (which may be the funding source, or if it is paying clients—then it would be these clients). Human service agencies satisfy customers by providing them with value for funds they provide. The agencies that provide value for what the customers buy will get more repeat business and referral business, and will have reduced complaints and reduced service expenses. Human service agencies should ask funders what they need, and provide more of what they ask for.
· Human service agencies should instill pride into every employee. Helping every employee to enjoy his or her work will lead to higher motivation of employees to do well, which in turn will result in these agencies becoming more productive. Agencies should provide a forum or seek to create high morale at work so that employees at all levels feel free to voice their opinions when they think they have good ideas. Agencies should review the suggestions and implement the best ones. Employees should be inspired, and empowered, to do their best. The number of layers of authority should be reduced to enhance employee empowerment. A focus of human service agencies should be to instill pride into every employee.
· Complaints from customers or from employees should be viewed as opportunities for improvement. In reviewing a complaint or a suggestion, the focus should be on quality evaluative information and data, rather than on opinions or egos.
· Supervisors should seek to keep their supervisees happy and productive by providing good task suggestions, the tools they need to do their job and good working conditions. Supervisors should also reward productive employees with praise and good pay.
· Employees are an excellent source of ideas for improvements. They often can provide suggestions on how to improve a system/process and eliminate waste or unnecessary work.
12-6kSummary Comments about Models of Organizational Behavior
Any of these models can be successfully applied in some situations. Which model to apply to attain the highest productivity depends on the tasks to be completed and on employee needs and expectations. For example, the autocratic model will probably work well in military operations, where quick decisions are needed to respond to rapidly changing situations or crises, and where personnel expect autocratic leadership. However, this model does not generally work well in human services organizations, in which employees are expecting the Theory Y style of management.
Survive and Thrive in an Agency
Two of the most relevant organizational theories for social workers are Theory X and Theory Y. These theories were described earlier in this chapter. Theory X supervisors rely heavily on the threat of punishment to gain employee compliance. This managerial style is more effective when used to motivate a workforce that is not inherently motivated to perform.
Theory Y, in contrast, is characterized by viewing the worker as being the most important asset of the organization. Theory Y supervisors assume that workers not only like their careers, but also are willing to take on some amount of professional responsibility. Theory Y supervisors seek input from workers on how the organization can make changes in order to better serve customers/clients.
It is critical for newly hired social workers in an organization to observe and determine if supervisors believe in a Theory X or Theory Y style of management. If a worker has Theory X supervisors, then that worker can best “survive” by doing what the supervisors tell him or her to do. That worker should make few (or no) suggestions for changes in the organization because suggestions for changes will irritate the supervisors. To feel fulfilled/gratified as a person, a worker in this situation should seek recognition from outside sources—such as their church or other place of worship, an athletic team, friends, or family members. (Remember, Theory X organizations are not apt to give recognition to workers—such as promotions or praise—other than paying them.)
If a worker has Theory Y supervisors, then that worker can best “survive/thrive” by making suggestions for changes—as these are expected and appreciated. Also, workers can expect to be praised and promoted for work that is well done. When working for Theory Y supervisors, a worker is more apt to find recognition and become more ego-invested with that organization.
How can a new worker determine if his organization has primarily Theory X or Theory Y supervisors? It is essential that new workers in a social service organization observe carefully the actions of their supervisors, rather than simply listening to their words.
Theory X supervisors are apt to say they cherish suggestions for changes, but “the proof is in the pudding,” as the saying goes. I worked for an organization where the president/executive director said, frequently, that she cherished and invited suggestions for changes. However, if a worker made a suggestion for a change that appeared to be a slight criticism of her, she either made it her mission to discharge that worker, or made the job so distasteful for the worker that the worker eventually left. (A president/executive director can make a job distasteful in a variety of ways—such as providing no pay increases, assigning heavy work responsibilities, assigning evening or weekend work, and rewriting that worker’s job description to be more onerous.)
12-6lServant Leadership and Theory Y
Servant leadership and Theory Y are closely related. Servant leadership, described in Chapter 8, was originally developed by Robert K. Greenleaf (1982).
A servant leader is someone who looks to both the needs of the organization and the needs of the employees. The servant leader administrator/supervisor asks herself how she can help the people she is supervising to solve problems, and how she can best promote their personal development. A Theory Y supervisor has the same orientation. Readers may want to reexamine the characteristics of a servant leader that are identified in Chapter 8.
12-6mKnopf’s Bureaucratic System Model and Theory X
Ron Knopf (1979) developed a model of a bureaucratic system and its relevance for helping professionals (including social workers). The model has a number of characteristics of Theory X. Knopf indicates that a bureaucracy is a subcategory (or type) of organization. A bureaucracy can be defined as a form of social organization whose distinctive characteristics include a vertical hierarchy with power centered at the top; a task-specific division of labor, clearly defined rules; formalized channels of communication; and selection, compensation, promotion, and retention based on technical competence.
There are basic structural conflicts between helping professionals and the bureaucratic systems in which they work. Helping professionals place a high value on creativeness and changing the system to serve clients. Bureaucracies resist change and are most efficient when no one is “rocking the boat.” Helping professionals seek to personalize services by conveying to each client that “you count as a person.” Bureaucracies are highly depersonalized, emotionally detached systems that view every employee and every client as a tiny component of a large system. In a large bureaucracy, employees don’t count as “people” but only as functional parts of a system. Additional conflicting value orientations between a helping professional and bureaucratic systems are listed in Highlight 12.13, “Value Conflicts Between a Helping Professional and Bureaucracies.”
Value Conflicts between a Helping Professional and Bureaucracies
|
Orientations of a Helping Professional |
Orientations of Bureaucratic Systems |
|
Desires democratic system for decision making. |
Most decisions are made autocratically. |
|
Desires that power be distributed equally among employees (horizontal structure). |
Power is distributed vertically. |
|
Desires that clients have considerable power in the system. |
Power is held primarily by fop executives. |
|
Desires a flexible, changing system. |
System is rigid and stable. |
|
Desires that creativity and growth be emphasized. |
Emphasis is on structure and the status quo. |
|
Desires that focus be client-oriented. |
System is organization-centered. |
|
Desires that communication be on a personalized level from person to person. |
Communication is from level to level. |
|
Desires shared decision making and shared responsibility structure. |
A hierarchical decision-making structure and a hierarchical responsibility structure are characteristic. |
|
Desires that decisions be made by those having the most knowledge. |
Decisions are made in terms of the decision-making authority assigned to each position in the hierarchy. |
|
Desires shared leadership. |
System uses autocratic leadership. |
|
Believes feelings of clients and employees should be highly valued by the system. |
Procedures and processes are highly valued. |
Any of these differences in value orientations can become an arena of conflict between helping professionals and the bureaucracies in which they work. Knopf (1979) summarized the potential areas of conflict between bureaucracies and helping professionals:
The trademarks of a BS (bureaucratic system) are power, hierarchy, and specialization; that is, rules and roles. In essence, the result is depersonalization. The system itself is neither “good” nor “bad”; it is a system. I believe it to be amoral. It is efficient and effective, but in order to be so it must be impersonal in all of its functionings. This then is the location of the stress. The hallmark of the helping professional is a highly individualized, democratic, humanized, relationship-oriented service aimed at self-motivation. The hallmark of a bureaucratic system is a highly impersonalized, valueless (amoral), emotionally detached, hierarchical structure of organization. The dilemma of the HP (helping person) is how to give a personalized service to a client through a delivery system that is not set up in any way to do that. (pp. 21–22)
Numerous helping professionals respond to these orientation conflicts by erroneously projecting a “personality” onto the bureaucracy. The bureaucracy is viewed as being fraught with red tape, and officialism, uncaring, cruel, the enemy. A negative personality is sometimes also projected onto the officials, who may be viewed as being paper shufflers, rigid, deadwood, inefficient, and unproductive. Knopf (1979) states,
The HP (helping person) … may deal with the impersonal nature of the system by projecting values onto it and thereby give the BS (bureaucratic system) a “personality.” In this way, we fool ourselves into thinking that we can deal with it in a personal way. Unfortunately, projection is almost always negative and reflects the dark or negative aspects of ourselves. The BS then becomes a screen onto which we vent our anger, sadness, or fright, and while a lot of energy is generated, very little is accomplished. Since the BS is amoral, it is unproductive to place a persona lily on it. (p. 25)
A bureaucratic system is neither good nor bad. It has neither a personality nor a value system of its own. It is simply a structure developed to carry out various tasks.
A helping person may have various emotional reactions to these conflicts in orientation with bureaucratic systems. Common reactions are anger at the system, self-blame (“It’s all my fault”), sadness and depression (“Poor me,” “Nobody appreciates all I’ve done”), and fright and paranoia (“They’re out to get me,” “If I mess up I’m gone”).
Knopf (1979) identified several types of behavior patterns that helping professionals choose in dealing with bureaucracies.
The warrior leads open campaigns to destroy and malign the system. A warrior discounts the value of the system and often enters into a win-lose conflict. The warrior generally loses and is dismissed.
The gossip is a covert warrior who complains to others (including clients, politicians, and the news media) how terrible the system is. A gossip frequently singles out a few officials for criticism. Bureaucratic systems often make life very difficult for the gossip by assigning distasteful tasks, refusing to promote, giving very low salary increases, and perhaps even dismissing.
The complainer resembles a gossip but confines complaints to other helping people, to in-house staff, and to family members. A complainer wants people to agree in order to find comfort in shared misery. Complainers desire to stay with the system, and generally do.
The dancer is skillful at ignoring rules and procedures. Dancers are frequently lonely, often reprimanded for incorrectly filling out forms, and have low investment in the system or in helping clients.
The defender is scared, dislikes conflict, and therefore defends the rules, the system, and bureaucratic officials. Defenders are often supervisors and are viewed by others as bureaucrats.
The machine is a bureaucrat who takes on the orientation of the bureaucracy. Often a machine has not been involved in providing direct services for years. Machines are frequently named to head study committees and policy groups and to chair boards.
The executioner attacks people within an organization with enthusiasm and vigor. An executioner usually has a high energy level and is impulsive. An executioner abuses power by indiscriminately attacking and dismissing not only employees but also services and programs. Executioners have power and are angry (although the anger is disguised, denied). They are not committed to either the value orientation of helping professionals or the bureaucracy.
Knopf (1979) listed 66 tips on how to survive in a bureaucracy. The most useful suggestions are summarized here:
1. Whenever your needs, or the needs of your clients, are not met by the bureaucracy, use the following problem-solving approach:
· (1)
Precisely identify your needs (or the needs of clients) that are in conflict with the bureaucracy; this step is defining the problem.
· (2)
Generate a list of possible solutions. Be creative in generating a wide range of solutions.
· (3)
Evaluate the merits and shortcomings of the possible solutions.
· (4)
Select a solution.
· (5)
Implement the solution.
· (6)
Evaluate the solution.
2. Obtain knowledge of how your bureaucracy is structured and how it functions. This knowledge will reduce fear of the unknown, make the system more predictable, and help in identifying rational ways to best meet your needs and those of your clients.
3. Remember that bureaucrats are people who have feelings. Communication gaps are often most effectively reduced if you treat them with as much respect and interest as you treat clients.
4. If you are at war with the bureaucracy, declare a truce. The system will find a way to dismiss you if you remain at war. With a truce, you can identify and use the strengths of the bureaucracy as an ally, rather than having the strengths be used against you as an enemy.
5. Know your work contract and job expectations. If the expectations are unclear, seek clarity.
6. Continue to develop your knowledge and awareness of specific helping skills. Take advantage of continuing education opportunities (e.g., workshops, conferences, courses). Among other advantages, your continued professional development will assist you in being able to contract from a position of competency and skill.
7. Seek to identify your professional strengths and limitations. Knowing your limitations will increase your ability to avoid undertaking responsibilities that are beyond your competencies.
8. Be aware that you can’t change everything, so stop trying. In a bureaucracy, focus your change efforts on those aspects that most need change and that you have a fair chance of changing. Stop thinking and complaining about those aspects you cannot change. It is irrational to complain about things that you cannot change or to complain about those things that you do not intend to make an effort to change.
9. Learn how to control your emotions in your interactions with the bureaucracy. Emotions that are counterproductive (such as most angry outbursts) particularly need to be controlled. Doing a rational self-analysis of unwanted emotions (see Chapter 8) is one way of gaining control of your unwanted emotions. Learning how to respond to stress in your personal life will also prepare you to handle stress at work better.
10. Develop and use a sense of humor. Humor takes the edge off adverse conditions and reduces negative feelings.
11. Learn to accept your mistakes and perhaps even to laugh at some of them. No one is perfect.
12. Take time to enjoy and develop a support system with your coworkers.
13. Acknowledge your mistakes and give in sometimes on minor matters. You may not be right, and giving in sometimes allows other people to do the same.
14. Keep yourself physically fit and mentally alert. Learn to use approaches that will reduce stress (see Chapter 14).
15. Leave your work at the office. If you have urgent unfinished bureaucratic business, do it before leaving work or don’t leave.
16. Occasionally take your supervisor and other administrators to lunch. Socializing prevents isolation and facilitates your involvement with and understanding of the system.
17. Do not seek self-actualization or ego satisfaction from the bureaucracy. A depersonalized system is incapable of providing this. Only you can satisfy your ego and become self-actualized.
18. Make speeches to community groups that accentuate the positives about your agency. Do not hesitate to ask after speeches that a thank-you letter be sent to your supervisor or agency director.
19. If you have a problem involving the bureaucracy, discuss it with other employees; focus on problem solving rather than on complaining. Groups are much more powerful and productive than an individual working alone to make changes in a system.
20. No matter how high you rise in a hierarchy, maintain direct service contact. Direct contact keeps you abreast of changing client needs, prevents you from getting stale, and keeps you attuned to the concerns of employees in lower levels of the hierarchy.
21. Do not try to change everything in the system at once. Attacking too much will overextend you and lead to burnout. Start small and be selective and specific. Double-check your facts to make certain they accurately prove your position before confronting bureaucratic officials.
22. Identify your career goals and determine whether they can be met in this system. If the answer is no, then
· (1)
change your goals,
· (2)
change the bureaucracy, or
· (3)
seek a position elsewhere in which your goals can be met.
12-6nValue Orientations in Organizational Decision Making
In theory, the task of making decisions about an organization’s objectives and goals would follow a rational process. This process would include identifying the problems, specifying resource limitations, weighing the advantages and disadvantages of proposed solutions, and selecting the resolution strategy with the fewest risks and the greatest chance of success. In practice, however, subjective influences (particularly value orientations) can impede the rational process.
Most people tend to believe that decisions are made primarily on the basis of objective facts and figures. However, values and assumptions form the bases of most decisions, and facts and figures are used only in relation to these values and assumptions. Consider the following list of questions. What do they indicate about how we make our most important decisions?
· Should abortions be permitted or prohibited during the first weeks following conception?
· Should same-sex sexual behavior be viewed as a natural expression of sexuality?
· When does harsh discipline of a child become child abuse?
· Should the primary objective of imprisonment be rehabilitation or retribution?
Practically every decision is also based on certain assumptions. Without assumptions, nothing can be proved. Assumptions are made in every research study to test any hypothesis. For example, in a market research survey, analysts assume that the instruments they use (such as a questionnaire) will be valid and reliable. It cannot even be proved the sun will rise in the east tomorrow without assuming that its history provides that proof.
Every decision maker in an organization brings not only his or her objective knowledge and expertise to the decision-making process, but also his or her value orientations. Value orientation means an individual’s own ideas about what is desirable and worthwhile. Most values are acquired through prior learning experiences in interactions with family, friends, educators, organizations such as a church, and anyone else who has made an impression on a person’s thinking.
Philosopher Edward Spranger (1928) believed that most people eventually come to rely on one of six possible value orientations. Although it is possible for a person to hold values in all six orientations, each person tends to lean more heavily toward one type in the decision-making process. The six value orientations are as follows:
· Theoretical. A person with a theoretical orientation strives toward a rational, systematic ordering of knowledge. Personal preference does not count as much as being able to classify, compare, contrast, and interrelate various pieces of information. The theoretical person places value on simply knowing what exists—and why.
· Economic. An economic orientation places primary value on the utility of things, and practical uses of knowledge are given foremost attention. Proposed plans of action are assessed in terms of their costs and benefits. If the costs outweigh the benefits, the economically oriented person is not likely to support the plan.
· Aesthetic. An aesthetic orientation is grounded in an appreciation of artistic values, and personal preferences for form, harmony, and beauty are influential in making decisions. Because the experience of single events is considered an important end in itself, reactions to aesthetic qualities will frequently be expressed.
· Social. A social orientation is an empathetic one that values other people as ends in themselves. Concern for the welfare of people pervades the behavior of the socially oriented decision maker, and primary consideration is given to the quality of human relationships.
· Political. A political orientation involves a concern for identifying where power lies. Conflict and competition are seen as normal elements of group activity. Decisions and their outcomes are assessed in terms of how much power is obtained, and by whom, because influence over others is a valued goal.
· Religious. A person with a religious orientation is directed by a desire to relate to the universe in some meaningful way. Personal beliefs about an “absolute good” or a “higher order” are employed to determine the value of things, and decisions and their outcomes are placed into the context of such beliefs.
Ethical Question 12.8
1. When you make major decisions, which of these value orientations do you tend to use?
12-7Describe Liberal, Conservative, and Developmental Perspectives on Human Service Organizations
12-7aLiberal, Conservative, and Developmental Perspectives on Human Service Organizations
Note that the three dimensions described in the following sections—conservative, liberal, and developmental—are portrayed in a purist fashion, implying that proponents rigidly adhere to the prescribed views. As with Democrats and Republicans, in real life, most people reflect a unique combination of these views.
12-7bConservative Perspective
Conservatives (a term derived from the verb to conserve) tend to resist change. They emphasize tradition and believe rapid change usually results in more negative than positive consequences. In economic matters, conservatives feel that the government should not interfere with the workings of the marketplace. They encourage the government to support (e.g., through tax incentives) rather than regulate business and industry. A free market economy is thought to be the best way to ensure prosperity and fulfillment of individual needs. Conservatives embrace the old adage, “That government governs best which governs least.” They believe that most government activities constitute threats to individual liberty and to the smooth functioning of the free market.
Conservatives generally view individuals as being autonomous—that is, as being self-governing. Regardless of what a person’s situation is, or what problems he or she has, each person is thought to be responsible for his or her own behavior. People are thought to choose whatever they are doing, and they therefore are viewed as being responsible for whatever gains or losses result from their choices. Conservatives view people as having free will, and thus as able to choose to engage in behaviors such as hard work that help them get ahead, or activities such as excessive leisure that contribute to failing (or being poor). Poverty and other problems are seen as being the result of laziness, irresponsibility, or lack of self-control. Conservatives believe that social welfare programs force hardworking, productive citizens to pay for the consequences of the irresponsible behavior of recipients of social welfare services.
Conservatives generally advocate the residual approach to social welfare programs (Wilensky & Lebeaux, 1965). The residual view holds that social welfare services should be provided only when an individual’s needs are not properly met through other societal institutions, primarily the family and the market economy. Social services and financial aid should not be provided until all other measures or efforts have failed and the individual’s or family’s resources are fully used up. In addition, this view asserts that funds and services should be provided on a short-term basis (primarily during emergencies) and should be withdrawn when the individual or the family again becomes capable of being self-sufficient.
The residual view has been characterized as “charity for unfortunates.” Funds and services are not seen as a right (something that one is entitled to) but as a gift, and the receiver has certain obligations; for example, in order to receive financial aid, recipients may be required to perform certain low-grade work assignments. Under the residual view, there is usually a stigma attached to receiving services or funds.
Conservatives believe that dependency is a result of personal failure, and they also believe it is natural for inequality to exist among humans. They assert that the family, religious organizations, and gainful employment should be the primary defenses against dependency. Social welfare, they believe, should be only a temporary function that is used sparingly. Prolonged social welfare assistance, they believe, will lead recipients to become permanently dependent.
Conservatives believe charity is a moral virtue and that the “fortunate” are obligated to help the “less fortunate” become productive, contributing citizens. If government funds are provided for health and social welfare services, conservatives advocate that such funding should go to private organizations, which are thought to be more effective and efficient than public agencies in providing services. Conservatives tend to believe that the federal government is not a solution to social problems but is part of the problem. They assert that federally funded social welfare programs tend to make recipients dependent on the government, rather than assisting recipients to become self-sufficient and productive.
Conservatives revere the traditional nuclear family and try to devise policies to preserve it. They see the family as a source of strength for individuals, and as the primary unit of society. Accordingly, they oppose abortion, sex education in schools, rights for homosexuals, public funding of day care centers, birth control counseling for minors, and other measures that might undermine parental authority or support alternative family forms such as single parenthood.
Ethical Dilemma
Are the Poor to Blame for Being Poor?
The residual view of social welfare holds that people are poor as a result of their own malfunctioning. The following are illustrations of this view:
· Some are lazy.
· Some make bad decisions, such as buying too many useless items on credit cards.
· Some have more children than they can support.
· Some are unable to work because they are addicted to alcohol or other drugs.
· Some have a very low IQ.
· Some teenagers have children before they can finish their education, thus affecting job opportunities.
Since the poor are perceived as being to blame for their predicament, the residual view asserts that funds and social services to help them should be only minimally provided.
In contrast, the institutional view of social welfare holds that people are poor as a result of causes largely beyond their control. The following are illustrations of this view:
· Some are unemployed, or underemployed, because of a lack of employment opportunities.
· Racial discrimination and sexism prevent some people of color and some women from reaching their full economic potential.
· Economic recessions lead some to lose their jobs.
· Outsourcing of jobs to other countries results in some people in this country losing their jobs.
· Natural disasters, such as earthquakes, hurricanes, wildfires, and tornadoes, result in some people losing their homes and personal possessions.
· Low-quality school systems prevent some people from fulfilling their economic potential.
· Some lose most of their financial resources as a result of scams and corporate fraud.
With this institutional view, the poor are not perceived as being to blame for their predicament. They are viewed as being entitled to long-term assistance from society. Also, efforts should be made to improve economic opportunities for the poor.
Which view do you hold?
12-7cLiberal Perspective
In contrast, liberals believe that change is generally good as it brings progress; moderate change is best. They view society as needing regulation to ensure fair competition between various interests. In particular, the market economy is viewed as needing regulation to ensure fairness. Government programs, including social welfare programs, are viewed as necessary to help meet basic human needs. Liberals advocate government action to remedy social deficiencies and to improve human welfare. Liberals believe that government regulation and intervention are often necessary to safeguard human rights, to control the excesses of capitalism, and to provide equal chances for success. They emphasize egalitarianism and the rights of minorities.
Liberals generally adhere to an institutional view of social welfare. This view holds that social welfare programs are “accepted as a proper legitimate function of modern industrial society in helping individuals achieve self-fulfillment” (Wilensky & Lebeaux, 1965, p. 139). Under this view, there is no stigma attached to receiving funds or services; recipients are viewed as entitled to such help. Associated with this view is the belief that an individual’s difficulties are due to causes largely beyond his or her control (e.g., a person may be unemployed because of a lack of employment opportunities). With this view, when difficulties arise, causes are sought in the environment (society) and efforts are focused on improving the social institutions within which the individual functions.
Liberals view the family as an evolving institution, and therefore they are willing to support programs that assist emerging family forms—such as single-parent families and same-sex marriages.
12-7dDevelopmental Perspective
Liberals for years have criticized the residual approach to social welfare as being incongruent with society’s obligation to provide long-term assistance to those who have long-term health, welfare, social, and recreational needs. Conservatives, on the other hand, have been highly critical of the institutional approach as they claim it creates a welfare state in which many recipients simply become dependent on the government to meet their health, welfare, social, and recreational needs—without seeking to work and without contributing in other ways to the well-being of society. It is clear that conservatives will attempt to stop the creation of any major social program that moves the country in the direction of being a welfare society. They have the necessary legislative votes to stop the enactment of programs that are “marketed” to society as being consistent with the institutional approach.
A Peace Corps volunteer teaches a group of Costa Rican boys.
Paul Conklin/PhotoEdit
Is there a view of social welfare that can garner the support of both liberals and conservatives? Midgley (1995) contends that the developmental view (or perspective) offers an alternative approach that appears to appeal to liberals, conservatives, and to the general public. Midgley defines this approach as a “process of planned social change designed to promote the well-being of the population as a whole in conjunction with a dynamic process of economic development” (p. 25).
This perspective has appeal to liberals because it supports the development and expansion of needed social welfare programs. The perspective has appeal to conservatives because it asserts that the development of certain social welfare programs will have a positive impact on the economy. The general public also would be apt to support the developmental perspective. Many voters oppose welfare, as they believe it causes economic problems (e.g., recipients living on the government dole, rather than contributing to society through working). Asserting and documenting that certain proposed social welfare programs will directly benefit the economy is attractive to voters.
Midgley and Livermore (1997) note that the developmental approach is, at this point, not very well defined. The approach has its roots in the promotion of social programs in developing (Third World) countries. Advocates for social welfare programs in developing countries have been successful in getting certain programs enacted by asserting and documenting that such programs will have a beneficial impact on the overall economy of the country. Midgley and Livermore note, “The developmental perspective’s global relevance began in the Third World in the years of decolonization after World War II” (p. 576). The United Nations later used the developmental approach in its efforts to promote the growth of social programs in developing countries, asserting that such programs had the promise of improving the overall economies of these countries.
What are the characteristics of the developmental approach? It advocates social interventions that contribute positively to economic development, thus promoting harmony between economic and social institutions. The approach regards economic progress as a vital component of social progress, and it promotes the active role of government in economic and social planning (in direct opposition to the residual approach). Finally, the developmental approach focuses on integrating economic and social development for the benefit of all members of society.
The developmental approach can be used in advocating for the expansion of a wide range of social welfare programs. It can be argued that any social program that assists a person in becoming employable contributes to the economic well-being of a society. It can also be argued that any social program that assists a person in making significant contributions to his or her family, or to his or her community, contributes to the economic well-being of a society, as functional families and functional communities are good for businesses. Members of functional families tend to be better employees, and businesses desire to locate in communities that are prospering and that have low rates of crime and other social problems.
A few examples will illustrate how the developmental approach can be used to advocate for the expansion of social welfare programs. It can be argued that job training, quality child care, and adequate health insurance will all benefit the economy because they will help unemployed single parents obtain employment. All of these programs will facilitate the parents being able to work. It can be argued that providing mentoring programs and other social services will help at-risk children stay in school and eventually contributing to society as adults by obtaining employment and contributing to their families and to the communities in which they live. It can be argued that rehabilitative programs in the criminal justice system will help correctional clients become contributing members of society. It can be argued that alcohol and drug treatment programs, nutritional programs, eating disorder intervention programs, stress management programs, and grief management programs will help people with issues in these areas to handle them better, thereby increasing the likelihood that they will become contributors to the economy and to the well-being of society.